BBG201122EN

Bodybuilder guidelines
DAF LF, CF and XF105
Update: 2011-22
Bodybuilders' Guidelines is published by
DAF Trucks N.V.
This information is also available on the internet.
The user is responsible for ensuring that he is
working with the latest released information.
Parts of this publication may be copied or
reproduced providing that a reference is made to
the source.
In the interest of continuing product development,

DAF reserves the right to change specifications
or products at any time without prior notice. DAF
can in no way be held responsible for any
incorrect information included in this manual and/
or the consequences thereof.
This publication refers to chassis with FR, GR,
PR or MX engine complying to the Euro 3, Euro
4 and Euro 5 emissions.
Note
For Euro 3 chassis with CE, BE, PE or XE engine
see the digital publication that is available under
file number BBG0541.zip on the 'archive' page of
the Bodybuilder's info website.
June 2011
201122 DWint201122EN
BODYBUILDERS' GUIDELINES
Bodybuilders' guidelines
GENERAL
1
CHASSIS INFORMATION
2
GENERAL INFORMATION ON SUPERSTRUCTURES
3
SUPERSTRUCTURES
4
CAB INFORMATION
5
PTO AND OTHER ENERGY CONSUMERS
6
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM GENERAL
7
DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
8
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM LF SERIES
9
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM CF SERIES
10
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM XF SERIES
11
APPLICATION CONNECTOR (CODE) NUMBER LIST
12
PART NUMBERS
13
REACTION FORM
14
201122
General
GENERAL
General
Page Date
1.1 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 201122
1.2 Addresses to contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 201122
1.3
1.4
Verificaton of superstructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Statutory requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
201122
201122
1
1.5 Vehicle specification and layout drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 201122
1.6 Weight distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 201122
1.7 Period of bodying and storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 201122
1.8 Painting the chassis and components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 201122
1.9 DAF vehicle range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 201122
1.10 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 201122
1.11 Product modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 201122
1.12 Feedback form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 201122
201122 5
General

6 201122
General
1. GENERAL
1.1 PURPOSE The manufacturer of the superstructure should
make sure that moving parts of the vehicle
chassis, in particular the propeller shafts, cannot
The purpose of these guidelines is to give the
bodybuilder advice and assistance to enable him
to obtain a homogeneous and optimally
be restricted in their operation by, for example,
parts of the superstructure and/or mountings. All 1
components must remain easily accessible for
functioning assembly of superstructure and DAF maintenance and repair! Work on the vehicle
chassis. should at all times be done by qualified staff.
The supplier of the superstructure will under
1.2 ADDRESSES TO CONTACT all circumstances remain fully responsible for
the product supplied by him and, in view of
the safety of the user, he must deliver the
In these guidelines the designation "DAF" refers product with clear information, instructions
to the responsible subsidiary or importer of DAF for use and/or documentation with respect to
Trucks N.V. in the country concerned. the superstructure and any additional
equipment. Prior to delivery to the customer,
the bodied vehicle should be inspected by the
1.3 VERIFICATON OF DAF dealer. DAF cannot be held liable for any
SUPERSTRUCTURE consequences of the actions of third parties.
Machine directives and CE marking
In view of vehicle safety, product liability and the If the superstructure (or parts of it) can be
quality standards set by DAF, it is not permitted to qualified as a machine, special attention should
make changes to the design of the vehicle be paid to the machine directive and the CE
without prior consultation with and written marking. If necessary, consult the authorities
permission from DAF. concerned.
Superstructures fitted fully in keeping with these For the integration of the superstructur with
guidelines do not require verification. DAF is related vehicle systems, see Section
always willing to answer any questions in this 7: "Electrical system general".
field.
Whenever these guidelines are not fully
conformed to, and in all cases not provided 1.4 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS
for in these guidelines, consultation with and
verification by DAF is required. The superstructure and any vehicle modifications
connected with it must in all respects comply with
Requests for such verifications can be submitted the statutory requirements in the country
to DAF by sending in duplicate, functional concerned.
description, drawings and engineering
calculations of all systems that are affected by the As DAF builds its commercial vehicle chassis
intended modification. If found in order, one set fully in accordance with the statutory
will be returned by DAF with a declaration written requirements in force, the responsibility for the
down in letter of "no objection" (LONO) and bodied vehicle rests with the bodybuilder.
possibly accompanied by some comments with
regard to the construction to be used. When the bodied vehicle is inspected, DAF is not
responsible for problems caused by the
The manufacturer of the superstructure should in superstructure or by parts fitted and/or modified
all cases ensure that the operations carried out by third parties.
on the vehicle fully comply with the applicable
quality standards.
201122 7
General
1.5 VEHICLE SPECIFICATION AND TOPEC Light: On top of the above-mentioned

LAYOUT DRAWINGS digital file of component and chassis drawings, a
TOPEC Light subscription includes the
calculation modules required for making layout,
In determining the right chassis and body weight, turning circle and chassis strength
1 specifications, it is essential that the three parties
involved, customer, bodybuilder and DAF,
calculations.
should each bring in their own specialism.

Intensive consultation is the only way to obtain an 1.6 WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION
optimum result. This consultation requires the
availability of all Technical data, such as vehicle
specifications and layout drawings (DAF When constructing the superstructure, make sure
bodybuilders' drawings), and the possibility of that weight is correctly distributed so that the
forming a quick assessment of all the technical permitted axle loads can be utilised, and take
possibilities with their specific advantages and note of the following guidelines:
disadvantages.
- The length of the body and consequently the
DAF's professional transport advice system, position of the centre of gravity may vary
TOPEC, has been developed especially for this within the axle load distribution tolerance
purpose and is also available to the bodybuilder. limits permitted in the country concerned.
TOPEC enables fast calculation of the effects of - To avoid excessive leaning of the vehicle to
particular vehicle dimensions on, for instance, one side, the difference in weight between
weight distribution, coupling position, turning the LH and RH wheels on one and the same
circle and axle load pattern during unloading. axle must not be more than 4%; see also the
Requests for TOPEC calculations can be paragraph below on lateral stability.
submitted to DAF. - The weight under the front axle(s) must in all
cases be at least 20% of the total vehicle
Layout drawings weight when used solo or in combination
The chassis bodying possibilities can be with a conventional coupled trailer and at
determined on the basis of the very detailed cab/ least 30% of the total vehicle weight when
chassis layout drawings showing many used in combination with a mid-axle trailer.
dimensions and component positions. These - The weight under the driven axle(s) must be
drawings are available from DAF and they can be at least 25% of the maximum total weight of
found as digital files on the internet the vehicle or vehicle combination.
(www.daf.com). - The centre of gravity of the total of
Additionally, DAF can supply on request (chassis superstructure, any loading/unloading
number specific) a CAD file in either the 3D-DXF equipment and vehicle load must at all times
or 3D-STEP 2.14 file format showing the main be within the theoretical wheelbase, because
chassis longitudinal with full hole pattern. Contact otherwise vehicle behaviour could be
DAF for applicable cases with complex adversely affected.
superstructures like heavy cranes.
Chassis reinforcements and additional
TOPEC availability to the bodybuilding components, such as compressors,
industry additional fuel tanks and loading and
The TOPEC program is available in two versions: unloading equipment, affect the weight and
'TOPEC View' and 'TOPEC Light', and can be therefore the weight distribution of the
ordered from DAF via a subscription system. vehicle being bodied. It is therefore essential
that the vehicle, including any extra
TOPEC View: A TOPEC View subscription equipment, should be weighed before the
provides for bodybuilders' access to an online bodying is started. Only then will it be
archive of current and historical chassis layout possible to establish in time the effect any
drawings in the DXF and PDF file format. All such extra equipment may have on the
chassis layout drawings can be read online, location of the vehicle's centre of gravity.
complemented with remarks and details, and
printed using the regular Adobe PDF viewer. With Lateral stability (dynamic)
the TOPEC view application the chassis height High superstructures, whether or not in
can be calculated based on the wide variety of combination with a high centre of gravity of the
front and rear axle suspension and tire types as load, are sensitive to side winds and may have an
supplied by DAF. The additional 2D-DXF format adverse effect on the lateral stability and
can be used in your own AutoCAD system or any therefore the driving characteristics of the
other program capable of opening a DXF file. vehicle. The same applies in the case of:

8 201122
General
- asymmetric loading; - Air intake openings on filter units.

- specific load distribution; - NOx sensors and solenoid valves.
- axle load shifts when the vehicle is partly - Heat shield panels and heat isolated exhaust
laden; pipes (when fitted).
- axle load shifts when the load is moving. - Sealings and sliding joints on propeller shaft.
In all cases, ultimate responsibility rests with the
- Identification plates (on gearbox, drive axle
and valves etc.).
1
supplier of the superstructure or the user of the - Door locks.
vehicle. - Cab windows, head - brake - indicator lights
and reflectors.
1.7 PERIOD OF BODYING AND NOTE: Many components and in

particular cab panels are produced in a
STORAGE variety of material types each requiring
a different specific (re)paint treatment.
When a vehicle, for instance, because of a long For obtaining the cleaning and
period of bodying, is not being used for a (re)spraying guidelines (preparations),
prolonged time, measures should be taken to as published by the DAF After Sales/
guarantee the continued high quality of the Service department, please contact a
vehicle. These measures depend on the DAF representative in your country. For
estimated duration of storage and/or bodying. applying the top coating always follow
the manufacturers instructions.
The measures that should normally be taken,
may include the following:
- Closing windows and roof hatch. 1.9 DAF VEHICLE RANGE
- Checking fluid levels and, where necessary,
topping-up reservoirs.
DAF's vehicle range is composed of several
- Checking the tyre pressure.
tractor chassis in the weight category above 12
- Removing, storing and charging the
tonnes and an even wider variety of rigids in the
batteries.
category of 6 tonnes GVW and over.
- Checking the coolant antifreeze content.
- Patching up damaged spots in paintwork. DAF LF45 series
For measures to be taken in the event of very
long storage periods, DAF should be
contacted.
1.8 PAINTING THE CHASSIS AND

COMPONENTS
In case the chassis (cab) and components must

be (re)painted then the under mentioned area's
must thoroughly be masked before painting to
avoid problems with electrical or mechanical
vehicle systems.
- The contact area's between wheel hub and 20090503-035
wheel rim and flanged nuts.
- Brake disks, brake calliper and pads. This series offers gross vehicle weights from 7,5
- Breather valves placed on components, to 12 tonnes. The trucks are intended for
such as differential, EAS unit, ECAS valves, intensive use in urban and regional distribution
brake valves and so on. transport and are powered by 4.5 litre four-
- Air intake and outlet openings of the Power cylinder FR diesel engines generating outputs
electronics carrier (PEC) unit on LF45 Hybrid from 103 kW up to 152 kW, or by 6.7 litre six-
chassis. cylinder GR diesel engines with a power rating
- The full length of all orange coloured high of 165 kW up to 184 kW.
voltage wiring cables (LF45 Hybrid chassis).
- All warning labels on components and
chassis.
201122 9
General
DAF LF55 series engines use a highly advanced combustion

This vehicle series, with gross vehicle weights principle and they have four valves per cylinder.
from 14 to 19 tonnes, is intended for light to With power outputs from 183 kW up to 265 kW,
medium-weight transport in urban and regional they are suitable for gross combination weights
goods distribution. These vehicles are also up to 40 tonnes.
1 excellently suited for a wide range of applications
in the field of public utility services. This series is DAF CF85 series
equipped with 4.5 litre four-cylinder FR diesel The DAF CF85 vehicles are equipped with 12.9
engine generating an output of 136 up to 152 kW litre MX diesel engines, which use a highly
or by 6.7 litre six-cylinder GR diesel engines advanced combustion principle and have four
offering outputs from 165 kW up to 220 kW valves per cylinder. With engine outputs from 265
kW up to 375 kW, this truck is made for heavy
DAF CF series work. It can be specified as a two-axle, three-axle
or four-axle vehicle with one or two driven axles.
A robust truck for intensive medium-range
transport requiring high gross combination
weights (over 40 tonnes), for transport in the
building industry and/or heavy special transport.
DAF XF series
G000540
DAF CF65 series

The DAF CF65 series underlines the importance G000392
of market segmentation and of medium line XF105 series
vehicles with specific features and characteristics The DAF XF is the flagship of the DAF range.
for a huge diversity of applications, body types With the XF105 series, DAF has again moved a
and operational conditions. The DAF CF65 series step forward in the ever continuing development
has been developed as a two-axle rigid for local of vehicle and engine technology. The XF chassis
and regional goods distribution and special is fitted with 12,9 litre MX diesel engines, which
transport applications, such as council cleaning use a highly advanced combustion principle and
services and fire services. With a maximum GVW have four valves per cylinder. With engine
of 19 tonnes, this series is powered by 6.7 litre outputs from 300 kW up to 375 kW, these
GR diesel engines generating outputs from 165 vehicles are ideal for long-distance (international)
kW up to 220 kW. haulage requiring gross combination weights of
40 tonnes.
DAF CF75 series
The DAF CF75 series is a real all-rounder with a
choice of chiefly two-axle and three-axle models.
These vehicles are excellently suited for medium-
weight to heavy regional and national distribution
transport and for a wide range of applications in
the field of public utility services, such as council
cleaning services. The 9.2 litre PR diesel

10 201122
General
With the Super Space Cab, the driver virtually

has a mobile residence, complete with all the
conveniences required for lengthy journeys
(away from home for on average 1 to 3 weeks).
The DAF XF series makes no concessions. It
combines a very high level of driver comfort with
optimum transport performance and the lowest
1
possible costs of ownership for the transport
operator.
Designation Type Sort of chassis DAF-series
LF45 LF55 CF65 CF75 CF85 XF105
FA 4x2 Truck chassis
FAR 6x2 Truck chassis with single-
wheel trailing axle
FAS 6x2 Truck chassis with twin-
wheel trailing axle
FAN 6x2 Truck chassis with rear
steered axle
FAG 6x2 Truck chassis with second
steered axle
FAT 6x4 Truck chassis with double-
drive tandem axle
FAC 8x2 Truck chassis with 2 front ax-
les, single drive axle and
twin-wheel trailing axle
FAX 8x2 Truck chassis with 2 front ax-
les, single drive axle and
rear steered single-wheel
trailing axle
FAK 8x2 Truck chassis with three rear
axles, including twin-wheel
trailing axle
FAD 8x4 Truck chassis with 2 front ax-
les and double-drive tandem
axle
FT 4x2 Tractor chassis

FTR 6x2 Tractor chassis with single-
wheel trailing axle
FTS 6x2 Tractor chassis with twin-
wheel trailing axle
FTG 6x2 Tractor chassis with second
steered axle
FTP 6x2 Tractor chassis with non-
steered second axle
FTT 6x4 Tractor chassis with double-
drive tandem axle
FTM 8x4 Tractor chassis with three
rear axles; a steered axle in
front of a double-drive tan-
dem axle
201122 11
General
Wheelbase and rear overhang indications

The indications for wheelbase and rear overhang
(WB/AE) used in these bodybuilders' guidelines
and in general at DAF can be found for each
vehicle type in the following survey:
1
WB AE WB AE WB AE
FT - FA 4x2 FTT - FAT 6x4 FAD 8x4
WB AE WB AE WB AE
FTS/R - FAS/R 6x2 FTG - FAG 6x2 FAC 8x2
WB AE WB AE WB AE
FAN 6x2 FTP 6x2 FAK 8x2
WB AE WB AE
FAX 8x2 FTM 8x4
G000307
1.10 DIMENSIONS 1.12 FEEDBACK FORM
All dimensions in these bodybuilders' guidelines In view of the importance of maintaining the
are shown in millimetres, unless stated present level of quality and user-friendliness of
otherwise. the DAF Bodybuilders' Guidelines, your
recommendations and/or suggestions will be
highly appreciated.
1.11 PRODUCT MODIFICATIONS Use the : "Feedback form" you will find on the last
page(s) to communicate your findings to us.
In the interest of continuing product development,
DAF reserves the right to make changes in the
specifications or the designs of the vehicles
without prior notice.
Furthermore, vehicle specifications may vary
from country to country, depending on local
conditions and legislation. For exact and up-to-
date information, please contact the local DAF
sales organisation.

12 201122
Chassis Information
CHASSIS INFORMATION
Chassis Information
Page Date
2.1 Levelling the chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 201122
2.2 Drilling of holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 201122
2.3 Welding on the chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 201122
2.4 Modifying the rear overhang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 201122
2.5 Wheelbase modifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 201122
2.6
2.7
Attachment of components to the chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Replacing rivets by bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
201122
201122 2
2.8 Inlet and exhaust systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 201122
2.9 Fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 201122
2.10 Chassis and cabine related dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 201122
2.11 Drawbar cross member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 201122
2.12 Rear light brackets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 201122
2.13 Wheel mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 201122
2.14 Wheel clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 201122
2.15 Location of the mudguards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 201122
2.16 EC-approved rear underrun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 201122
2.17 Automatic lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 201122
201122 13
Chassis Information

14 201122
Chassis Information
2. CHASSIS INFORMATION
2.1 LEVELLING THE CHASSIS
It is essential for the quality and durability of the

bodied vehicle that the chassis should be in a
completely level position when it is being bodied.
The side members should be parallel and the
chassis frame must not be twisted. Frame height
differences on the left/right of 1.5% of the 2
distance from ground to the frame upper flange
are within the limits. Variations > 1.5% must be
notified to DAF Trucks, before any work are
carried out. 20061604-201
For the levelling of an air-suspended chassis, at

least three adjustable supports must be used.
These supports must not be removed during the
bodying of the vehicle.
WARNING! Each time the vehicle is
moved, the chassis must be levelled
again!
2.2 DRILLING OF HOLES
When mounting components, use the existing

holes in the chassis whenever possible,
preferably the holes according to BAM 1 and 3
(see section: 3.2: "BAM's - body attachment
methods"), which are factory-made and
exclusively intended for the superstructure. The
location of these holes is therefore indicated on
the bodybuilders' drawings.
Adhere to the following instructions when drilling
holes:
- NEVER drill holes in the flanges of the side
members. > 70 mm (2x)
- NEVER drill holes in the tapered ends of a
tractor chassis frame.
- NEVER weld filler pieces into any unused
holes of the chassis frame.
- To prevent the forming of cracks from the
drilled holes, these holes must always be de-
burred - by 45 countersinking (on two 1 mm
sides!) - and subsequently treated with
primer/paint.
- The drilling of holes less than 70 mm away G001184
from a bend in the chassis frame is not

permitted.
- A hole drilled by mistake close to the radii of
(or within) the tapered section of the chassis
must always be protected against fatigue
cracks at its edges by fitment of the largest
(and accordingly tightened) flange bolt and
nut possible.
201122 15
Chassis Information
Dimensions for holes drilled in side members:

B> 3 x D (D = diameter of largest hole, at most
18 mm)
C> 70 mm (tractor chassis), 50 mm (truck
chassis)
B
B
For deviations from the above-mentioned
dimensions, DAF should be consulted.
2 B
C
D
G001219
Minimum distances for drilling of holes
2.3 WELDING ON THE CHASSIS
WARNING! Welding on the chassis

is not permitted without a written
permission from DAF, with the
exception of welding operations
required for rear overhang
extensions.
WARNING! For the LF45 hybrid

chassis extra welding guidelines are
applicable; see section:
7.20: "Hybrid system LF45" for more
information.
The following DAF welding instructions should

be observed at all times:
Welding on the chassis
- Disconnect the connectors of electrical and
electronic equipment (sensors and
actuators) and the battery terminals if they
are less than 1 metre away from the chassis
part to be welded or the earth terminal of the
welding equipment.
- If the battery terminals have to be
disconnected, all electronic units mounted
on the chassis and the bulkhead lead-
through connectors should be disconnected,
too.
20061604-203
Measures to be taken when welding!
Welding on the cab

- Always disconnect the batteries (starting
with the negative lead).

16 201122
Chassis Information
- Disconnect the connectors between chassis

and cab (bulkhead lead-through).
- Disconnect the connectors of electrical and
electronic equipment if they are less than 50
cm away from the cab part to be welded or
the earth terminal of the welding equipment.
Welding on the superstructure
- Adhere to the above instructions for 'welding
on the chassis', supplemented by specific
bodybuilders' instructions.
2
General
- The earth terminal should never be attached
to vehicle components such as engine, axles
and springs. Arcing on these parts is not
permitted either, because of the risk of
damage to bearings, springs, etc.
- The earth terminal must make good contact
and be placed as close as possible to the
part to be welded.
- Plastic pipes, rubber parts and parabolic
springs should be well protected against
welding spatter and temperatures higher
than 70.
- The contact switch must not be in the
accessory or contact position. The contact
key should be removed.
- Reconnect in reversed order of
disconnecting. Ensure that a good earth
connection is made between chassis, engine
and cab.
WARNING! If the connectors are not
disconnected, serious damage may
be caused to the electronic control
units (ECU's) of various vehicle
systems.
See section: 7.13: "Connection points and

permitted power loads" for the connection points
on LF, CF and XF vehicles.
2.4 MODIFYING THE REAR

OVERHANG
For the chassis material to be used for rear

overhang extensions (if they are necessary),
see section 13: "Part numbers".
Extending/shortening the rear overhang
When extending the rear overhang, take note of
the following:
- The maximum rear overhang (AE) extension
is 500 mm, provided that the maximum rear
overhang (AE) length of 60% of the
wheelbase (WB) is not exceeded.
201122 17
Chassis Information
- The rearmost cross member must be

retained when the chassis frame is made
longer or shorter.
- When the rear overhang is shortened, at
least 30 mm must be left behind the rear
spring brackets (leaf-sprung chassis) or the
stabiliser bracket (air-sprung chassis).
- The distances between the cross members
in the chassis frame should be not more than
2 1200 mm.
WARNING! The rear overhang of
tractor chassis and of vehicles with
side members of KF 600 material
must NOT be changed
Tapering of chassis side member rear ends

On vehicles used for (high-)volume transport
(lower position of drawbar cross member) and/or
equipped with under-chassis tail lifts, the rear
ends of the side members may be tapered in min
accordance with the dimensions shown in the 0,5H
opposite drawing.
H
max 1500
96120404-206
For certain applications, for instance for plant

bodies, it is permitted to make a bend in the rear
overhang. To do this, remove a sector from the
side member, starting from the underside and
ensuring that the upper flange is left intact and
that, after the bending of the chassis, both the
web and the lower flange can be welded together
again. See the opposite drawing.
When doing this, the welding instructions
must always be adhered to.
min 30
97122901-001

18 201122
Chassis Information
Welding instructions for rear overhang

extensions
The weld should always comply with (European)
quality standard EN25817, quality class B.
Main chassis profile A
1. Bevel off the parts to be welded at an angle
of 45. Put them against each other.
2. Make a provisional weld by tack welding
(using an electrode with a diameter of 2.5
mm).
2
3. Fill the joint (using an electrode with a
diameter of 3.5 mm).
4. Grind down the outside weld area as far as
the weld.
5. Fill the joint from the outside (using an
electrode with a diameter of 2.5 mm or 3.5
mm).
6. Grind the outside and inside surfaces until
they are smooth.
Inner reinforcement profile B
1. Bevel off the inner profile to be welded at an
angle of 45. (Do not grind the main chassis
profile).
2. Make the first weld (using an electrode with
a diameter of 2.5 mm).
3. Bevel off the inner profile and positioned it
approximately 1 to 2 mm from the first weld
(using an electrode with a diameter of 3.5
mm).
4. Make the second weld (using an electrode
with a diameter of 2.5 mm).
5. Fill the weld to the top (using an electrode
with a diameter of 3.5 mm).
6. Grind the inside surface of the reinforcement
profile until it is smooth.
NOTE: At stage 2 and 4 the first and
second weld seam will join together the
main chassis and inner reinforcement
profile.
The drawing shows how a weld should be made

with a welding electrode or a wire electrode
(MAG).
201122 19
Chassis Information
Position of the welds between main and

reinforcement profile
Independent from whatever welding process is
chosen, distance (A) between the separate welds
must be at least 100 mm to avoid unacceptable
stress concentration. It is advised to round of the
edges over 50 mm to each side of the weld to
diminish the possibility of notching.
G000562
Specification of welding material

WELDING ELECTRODE
The welding electrode should meet one of the undermentioned specifications or should be of equiva-
lent quality.
LF series EN757 EY 4666 MN B
CF65
CF75 and CF85 Series AWS5.1 E7016 - 1
XF series ISO 2560 E 515 B 24(H)
DIN 1913 E 5155 B 10
BS 639 E 5154 B 24(H)
WIRE ELECTRODE
The wire electrode should meet one of the undermentioned specifications or should be of equivalent
quality.
G 35 2 G2Si or G38 3 G3Si1 EN 440: 1994
Wire diameter: 0.8 mm
Welding current: 120 A
Voltage: 17 - 18 V
Gas mix: 80% Ar and 20% CO2
2.5 WHEELBASE MODIFICATIONS
Wheelbase modifications may only be carried out

with DAF's prior permission in writing and in
accordance with DAF's instructions. The written
permission and the conditions to which it is
subject, should at all times be kept with the
vehicle documents.
WARNING! The wheelbase of a
tractor chassis and of vehicles with
side members of KF 600 material
must NOT be changed!

20 201122
Chassis Information
2.6 ATTACHMENT OF
COMPONENTS TO THE
CHASSIS
Components such as toolboxes, extra fuel tanks,

onboard weighing system, compressors and side
underrun protection, will usually be attached to
2
the side of the chassis. For all loaded
connections with the chassis, 10.9 flange bolts or
bolts of the same property class, combined with
washers, must be used. The hardness of the
washers should be at least 265-320 HB.
Furthermore, the contact surfaces of bolted
connections should be provided with a thin coat
of primer (thickness 17 - 25 m) and they should
be free from paint and other impurities. The first
service inspection of the vehicle must include the
retorquing of all superstructure attachment bolts.
If required, for the tightening torques of
components such as steering gear, mounting
frame of the Euro 4 and 5 exhaust system, axle
suspension system, cab mounting, etc., see the
workshop manual.
Tightening torques for DAF flange bolts (1)
Bolt type Torque in [Nm] (2) for property class:
8.8 class B 10.9 class B 12.9 class B
Plain flange bolts; standard pitch
M 8x1,25 21 30
M10x1,5 42 60
M12x1,25 - 110
M12x1,75 73 110
M14x1,50 - 170
M14x2 116 170
M16x1,50 - 260
M16x2 180 260
M18x1,5 / M18x2,5 - 360
M20x1,5 / M20x2,5 - 520
M22x1,5 / M22x2,5 - 700
Clamping flange bolts (3)
M14 275
M16 425
M18 550
(1) If non-DAF bolts are used, adhere to the supplier/manufacturer's instructions.

(2) These tightening torques apply to new wax-dipped or oil-dipped bolts from DAF. The tightening torque tolerance is 16%.
(3) Clamping bolts are no longer used by DAF.
201122 21
Chassis Information
Depending on the total weight (G) and the centre a (mm) x G (N)
of gravity of the component in relation to the side 1000
< 350 Nm
member (a) to which the component is to be
attached, one of the solutions shown here may be
chosen. a
NOTE:
- If the load moment on a component 0,6H
carrier is higher than 350 Nm on a G
2 chassis frame without flitches or if

it is higher than 500 Nm on a
H
chassis frame withflitches, a cross 96120404-208

connection* between the two side G a
members must be made. This
cross connection should preferably
be a bolted connection with
silentbloc (with a minimum rigidity 0,6H
of 20 kN/mm) for the absorption of
H
forces and vibrations.
- An extra cross connection is not 96120404-210
required if it would coincide with an a (mm) x G (N)
existing cross member in the 1000
> 350 Nm
chassis frame.
- When components are relocated,
the bolts used must always have
the same property class as those
used for the original fitting. The
a
length of the bolt should be
increased by the thickness of the
material of the component carrier.
0,6H
G
* For part numbers, see section H
13.1: "Mountings" .
Please take care of the required fitting of side
underrun protection. 20090503-021
Ground clearance
If components are attached to the chassis,
whether they are re-located existing components
or new ones which are being added, it should be
ensured that there will be sufficient ground
clearance in any circumstances. G
a
The minimum ground clearance under normal
operating conditions is 80 mm with the chassis
suspension bottoming (metal to metal), or 170 0,6H
mm with the chassis in driving position (laden).
H
20090503-022
2.7 REPLACING RIVETS BY BOLTS
If, for whatever reason, rivets have to be

removed, they may be replaced by bolts or
'Huckbolts'.

22 201122
Chassis Information
The diameter of the hole of the removed rivet is

13 mm. There are three replacement options:
t1 + t2 > L > t1 + 0,5 x t2
- Fitting an M14 - 8.8 flange bolt in hole t2

reamed to a diameter of 14H7.
Attention: an unthreaded shank section with t1
length L is required, see illustration.
- Fitting an M16 - 10.9 flange bolt in hole with
a diameter of 17 mm.
- Fitting an HP8 - 5/8" Huckbolt.
2
For the tightening torques of DAF flange
bolts, see the table concerned in section
2.6: "Attachment of components to the
chassis"'.
L G000367
2.8 INLET AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
When modifications are made to the engine air

inlet system, verification by DAF is in any case
required, in view of type approval and the
possible effect on engine performance and /or
fuel consumption. At all time the intake manifold
opening of the standard or eventual modified air
inlet system must be kept clear of body panels or
brackets of any kind for at least 70 mm to avoid
obstruction of the air flow and possible negative
effect on the engine performance.
If modifications are made to the exhaust system,
consultation with DAF is required (inclusive Letter
of no Objection), in view of type approval
(homologation to taken care of by the
conversionist) and possible effect on engine
performance and /or fuel consumption.
Other matters to which attention should be paid in
relation with the exhaust system are the
following:
- Take care that no flammable materials are
fitted near the exhaust system. As plastic
materials must not be exposed to
temperatures higher than 70C, they should
be protected with heat shields.
- The minimum distance between the exhaust
and plastic brake pipes, electrical wires and
spare wheel are 200 mm without heat
shields and 80 mm with heat shields.
201122 23
Chassis Information
- There must be a minimum clearance of at

least 50 mm between the exhaust silencer/
exhaust pipes and the following component,
rear wall cab, gearbox and brake system
components.
- In view of the permissible back-pressure in
the exhaust system, use should be made of
bent exhaust bends (R = approx. 1,5 x D)
and the exhaust pipe should have at least the
2 same diameter as the existing exhaust pipe.
Maximum back pressure at the first
measuring-point behind turbo (at the first
bent behind the turbo) is 9kPa for the
standard exhaust. The maximum increase of
the back pressure by modifying the exhaust
system is 5kPa on top of the original back
pressure. By increasing the back pressure,
the following items of the engine can be
influenced; fuel consumption, engine
performance, noise and emissions.
The complete exhaust system of Euro 4 and 5
vehicles consists of the following components; a
silencer, an AdBlue tank, an AdBlue pump
module and an AdBlue dosing module.
Relocation of the complete exhaust system or
parts of it is only possible after consultation with
DAF.
Repositioning the exhaust muffler
The under mentioned guidelines must be taken
care of in order to fulfil the Euro4/5 requirements.
The main objective is to minimise the
temperature drop.
- The maximum length of the exhaust pipe is
5.0m; the new position of the exhaust
silencer can be either on the same side of the
chassis or on the opposite side. Insulation of
the exhaust pipe is required when the
dimension from turbo to exhaust silencer
exceeds 1.80m to achieve an optimal
working temperature and limited noise
reduction. Thermal exhaust insulation can be
obtained from e.g. Saveguard (see
www.saveguard.com) or Culimeta (see
www.culimeta.de).
- Maximum vertical displacement to a position
above the chassis thus creating space for
crane support legs is allowed, taking into
account a maximum length of the dosing
pipe, dosing module to nozzle, of 500mm.
- The nozzle position in relation to the exhaust
silencer has to remain unchanged.
- The position of the sensors, temperature and
NOx mandatory from October 2007, may not
be changed.
- the exhaust silencer should not be revolved
around the horizontal axis.
- The sum of bend angles in the exhaust
system is maximum 270.

24 201122
Chassis Information
Exhaust pipe characteristics

Material CF - XF Series
Specificastion No specification
Diameter 127 mm
Thickness 2 mm
Minimum bend radius 190 mm
(centre line)
Maximum total bend angles from turbo till silencer 540 2
Repositioning the AdBlue tank
The AdBlue tank and dosing module should be
positioned as close as possible to each other with
short pipe lengths to minimize restriction and
trapped air.
- The AdBlue tank can be repositioned in
horizontal position alongside the chassis. In
case the position of the AdBlue tank in
relation to the exhaust silencer is changed
additional heating has to be fitted.
- Maximum length of the AdBlue inlet line is 5
m.
- Maximum vertical distance of any part of the
AdBlue inlet line system to under side of the
pump module may not exceed 1000mm. To
avoid AdBlue flowing from the AdBlue tank to
the dosing module through the pump module
the AdBlue pressure line has to be above the
AdBlue fluid level in the tank.
Installation configuration overview
0 0 0
1.0 mtr
1.0 mtr
G001272
201122 25
Chassis Information
Repositioning the pump module:

The pump module can be repositioned provided
that the original pipe and wiring is used.
- The maximum pipe length between pump
module and dosing module nust not exceed
5 m.
- The position of the pump module and AdBlue
pressure line have to make sure that no
AdBlue can return to the dosing module after
2 the afterrun cycle.
Repositioning the dosing module:
- The dosing module should be mounted so
that its orientation remains as standard.
Lengthening pipes
- AdBlue pipes:
The EAS installation may be modified from
PA-PUR in PA AdBlue pipes. The AdBlue
PA-PUR pipes, inlet and return, should be
taken out completely and replaced by PA
pipes. The tank connections should be
according SAE J2044. The Voss246 tank
connection is not suitable for PA pipes; in this
case the complete tank unit should be
replaced by one with 241SAE connections.
The connectors at the side of the pump
module can remain unchanged (Voss246).
- Coolant water pipe:
EPDM 16x3,5 and 15,5x3,25 material should
always be covered by a protective sleeve,
e.g. Co-Flex corrugated tube.
- Air pipe:
For instructions to lengthen or shorten
polyamide pipes see workshop manual.
Exhaust pipe characteristics:
AdBlue feed- AdBlue Air supply Compressed AdBlue
and return pressure pipe air line dosing line
pipe
Max. length 5.0 m 4.5 m no limitation no limitation 0.5 m
Remarks - - - - No modification
allowed
NOTE: Modifications should be carried

out in line with the Cleanliness
Procedures as mentioned in After Sales
Service Rapido system. Mounting and
installation of air lines should be carried
out as mentioned in Service Rapido-
General guidelines for repairs in the
chapter "Plastic Pipes".

26 201122
Chassis Information
WARNING! In case the EAS unit has

to be repainted special care has to
be taken that the breather must be
kept clear to maintain correct
operation of the unit. The minimum
requirement is to fully mask the
breather and the counter bore in
which it is mounted during any
painting process.
2
2.9 FUEL SYSTEM
Without DAF's prior permission in writing, no

modifications may be made to the fuel system.
However, fitting an extra fuel tank is permitted.
Any fuel tanks used must be DAF fuel tanks.
There are three ways of connecting an extra fuel
tank:
1. Single or double suction with a through-
connection. 96120404-212
2. Double suction with a switching valve (see

figure).
3. Double suction with tee piece (only for tanks
of the same size; consult DAF).
Notes on method 1:
The filler openings of the two tanks must be at the
same level. Avoid the use of tanks of different
height, to ensure correct indication of the fuel
level. Apart from this, the advantage of the extra
fuel storage capacity could even be (partly)
undone when tanks of different height are fitted.
All DAF fuel tanks are provided with an M22
threaded hole for the fuel drain plug and they are
not suitable for bottom to bottom connection. DAF
fuel tanks equipped with a low positioned opening
(internal 30 mm) to support the described
bottom to bottom connection are only available as
a service component. To avoid differences in air
pressure (= differences in fuel level) between the
two tanks, an ( 8 mm) air pipemust be fitted
between the return pipes of the two floats that are
intended for extra fuel consumers.
G000294
When extra fuel consumers have to be
connected, the tank can be provided with extra
suction and return pipes on the existing fuel tank
float. These connections are as standard
provided with sealing plugs held in place by a
holding cover. By removing this cover, these
plugs can also be removed and replaced by
quick-release couplings for an 8 mm fuel pipe.
Also see the opposite drawing.
For the part numbers, see section 13: "Part
numbers".
201122 27
Chassis Information
2.10 CHASSIS AND CABINE

RELATED DIMENSIONS
For details of the chassis (including flitch

positions) and the location of the components,
see the bodybuilders' drawing of the vehicle A B C D
concerned. These drawings can be obtained from 1)
2)
x)
DAF and are available on the internet
(2 x )
2
x)
(2
x)
12 1 (2
x)
(2
(2
(www.daf.com). To TOPEC subscribers they are
12
8
1
8
R
R
R
R
available as digital files on CD-ROM (see section
R
1.5: "Vehicle specification and layout drawings"). 1) KF375, KF500
KF600
2) KF460
E F G H
x)
x)
x)
x)
(2
(2
(2
(2
11
11
11
11
R
R
R
R
G000365

28 201122
Chassis Information
Chassis specification: Tractors and Rigids

Vehicle Side member Chassis Flitch Chassis Wxchassis (2) Material,
type (1) (4) dimensions section dimensions section [cm3] v (3)
[mm] [mm] [N/mm2]
[--------] [[----------]] [--------] [[------]]
FT (LF55) 260x75x6 D - - 322 - 460
260x75x6 D + 245x65x5 E 322 524 600
FT
260x75x7 D + 245x65x5 E 368 584 500 2
FTG 260x75x7 D + 245x65x5 E 368 584 500
FTP 260x75x6 D - - 322 - 600
FTR 260x75x7 D + 245x65x5 E 368 584 500
FTS
310x75x7 F + 295x65x5 G 476 766 375
FTT
FTM 310x75x8,5 - + 292x65x8,5 H - 1004 375
FA (LF45) 192x66.5x4.5 D + 180x47/62x4 B 148 238 460
FA (LF55) 260x75x6 D + 245x60x5 C 322 524 460
CF65
FA/N 260x75x7 F + 245x65x5 E 368 584 375
FAR/S
310x75x7 D + 295x65x5 G 476 766 375
FAN (LF55) 260x75x6 D + 245x60x5 C 322 524 460 (5)
260x75x7 D + 245x65x5 E 368 584 500
260x75x7 (6) D + 245x65x5 E 368 584 375
FAT 310x75x6 F + 295x65x5 G 417 696 600
310x75x7 F + 295x65x5 G 476 766 375
310x75x8.5 - + 292x65x8.5 H - 1004 375
310x75x7 F - - - 696 375
FAX
310x75x8.5 - + 292x65x8.5 H - 1004 375
310x75x6 F + 295x65x5 G 417 696 600
FAD 310x75x7 F + 295x65x5 G 476 766 375
310x75x8.5 - + 292x65x8.5 H - 1004 375
FAK/G 310x75x7 F + 295x65x5 G 476 696 375
(1) Always refer to the vehicle specification and/or the bodybuilder drawings which are available from DAF. On the chassis overview
and specifications no rights to delivery can be derived.
(2) Resistance moment Wx [cm3] of the chassis against bending (caution: indicated values apply to 2 side members).
(3) Chassis material: minimum yield point 0,2% [N/mm2]. Permissible load 0,4x (dynamic).
(4) Chassis types with 192x66.5x4.5 or 260x75x6(7) mm frame and continuous inner reinforcement flitches (full chassis lenght) -
which also includes the (G)V chassis - require the added strength and/or rigidity of a sub-frame/superstructure construction (also
see the text on chassis design and section 4).
(5) Material according standard: BSEN 10149-2:1996:S460MC.
(6) FAT chassis with 600 cm wheelbase i.c.w. 325 or 360 cm rear overhang (AE).
201122 29
Chassis Information
Chassis specification: Main dimensions

Vehicle type (1) A B RBV RBA
LF45 series - - 859 859
RBV RBA
LF55 series 14-16 693 284 862 790
tonnes
LF55 series 18-19 643 284 862 790
tonnes
2 CF65 series A B
G000281
CF75-85 series 1100 800 930 790
FAD CF75-85 1500 800 930 790
FAC/X CF85
FAD XF
XF series 1100 800 930 790
(1) The A, B, RBV and/or RBA values for FTT/FAT chassis

with air-sprung rear axles may be different. Consult DAF
for more information.
Cab-related dimensions and CB dimension

for positioning of superstructure
For more details related to cab dimensions (for
instance, for the space taken up by the bumper
when the cab is tilted), see detail 'Z' of the
R3
bodybuilders' drawings.

R2
R3

R1
R3
AC CB C
VA
G001132-01

30 201122
Chassis Information
Cab-related dimensions and CB dimension

Series Cab A B C (2) VA AC CB (1) R1 R2 R3 (3)
Day (4) 141 122 2082 1275 330 70 2580 -- 2450 53
LF 45
Sleeper 141 122 2082 1275 730 70 2865 -- 2715 53
Day (4) 209 44 2150 1325 280 70 2580 -- 2450 55
LF 55
(14-16t) Sleeper 209 44 2150 1325 680 70 2865 -- 2715 55
LF 55
(18-19t)
Day
Sleeper
209
209
44
44
2150
2150
1375
1375
230
630
120
70
2580
2865
--
--
2450
2715
55
55
2
(CF65) 320
CF 2119
(CF75) 310 110 1380 390 160 2580 2350 2350 60
(Day)
(CF85) 410 2219
(CF65) 320
CF 2119
(CF75 ) 310 110 1380 820 150 2875 2670 2650 60
(Sleeper)
(CF85) 410 2219
(CF65) 320
CF 2800
(Space (CF75 ) 310 110 1380 820 150 -- -- 3190 60
Cab) (CF85) 410 2900
Comfort Cab 500 100 2475 1370 880 190 -- -- 2896 60
Space Cab 500 100 2775 1370 880 190 -- -- 3095 60
XF105
Super Space
500 100 3165 1370 880 190 -- -- 3337 60
Cab
(1) Distance between cab rear wall and superstructure front end, including minimum free space required. The listed values for LF45
and LF55 (14-16t) chassis are with 4 cylinder engine and for LF55 (18-19t) chassis with 6 cylinder engine and for all LF series
with the coil type cab suspension.
Note:In the following situations a larger CB dimension is required:
LF series with:
- a water reservoir behind the LF45 day cab (Hybrid series): CB = 140 mm (expansion reservoir for hybrid cooling system).
- day cab LF55 and FR (4-cylinder) engine in combination with body installed on chassis without sub-frame: CB = 130 mm
(extra clearance for gearshift lever)
- day cab and GR (6-cylinder) engine: CB = 130 mm
- high air intake: CB = 175 mm
- exhaust stack on LF45: CB = 182 mm
- exhaust stack on LF55: CB = 272
- vertical exhaust silencer on LF chassis: CB = 400 mm (air filter unit not included); CB = 660 mm (air intake filter unit included)
CF65
- exhaust stack: CB = 276 mm
CF75-85 series with:
- moisture separator unit fitted (positioned behind the cab rear wall): CB = 195 mm (day cab); CB = 175 mm (sleeper cab)
- cyclone filter with air intake opening positioned on top of the roofpanel: CB = 240 mm (Day cab) or 230 mm (Sleeper cab)
- cyclone filter with air intake opening at the cab rear wall: CB = 160 mm (Day cab) or 150 mm (Sleeper cab)
- exhaust stack: CB = 240 mm
- exhaust stack with integrated vertical soot filter: CB = 370 mm
XF series with:
- cyclone filter: CB = 260 mm
- under-cab air intake: CB = 100 mm
- exhaust stack: CB = 240 mm (pipe end 90 transversely to driving direction)
- exhaust stack: CB = 340 mm (pipe end pointing backwards)
(2) Highest point air intake pipe fitted on cab roof: LF series day cab C + 130 mm, CF series C + 139 mm.
(3) Maximum tilt angle for LF Series may be limited if topsleeper is mounted on cab roof; check 5.2: "Maximum permissible
additional cab weights".
(4) For LF45 with rubber-sprung cab: A = 151, B = 152, C = 2052, R1 = 2535, R3 = 2415.
For LF55 with rubber-sprung cab: A = 219, B = 74, C = 2120, R1 = 2535, R3 = 2415.
Chassis design
DAF uses specific designations for the different
chassis types, in order to indicate their specific
applications. See the survey below:
- Low-Deck tractor chassis 'LD'
201122 31
Chassis Information
Only available as an FT CF85 and XF tractor

chassis, suitable for the lowest possible fifth
wheel position and to combine with mega trailers
(internal height 3 m).
- Low-Deck rigid truck chassis
Low rigid truck chassis (fully flat topped frame),
previously referred to as (High-)Volume version
2 '(G)V', with as standard 260 mm high side
members; depending upon the version provided
with lowered axle suspension and/or driving
height compensation, suitable for (demountable)
bodies with maximum internal height. These
vehicles require extra body strength or a sub-
frame. See '(High-)volume body' in section
4: "Superstructures", or consult DAF for further
information!
- - FA LF45 with GVM = 10 12 tonne long
wheel base
FA LF45 chassis with wheel base longer than
5400 mm (available on request) and 192 mm high
side members. These vehicles require extra body
strength or a sub-frame. See in section
4.1: "Fixed body", or consult DAF for further
information!
- UK tipper body
Available as 6x4 and 8x4 truck chassis (FAT and
FAD), suitable for light-weight tipper bodies
without sub-frame,specially developed for the
British market. These chassis are ex-works
provided with a short rear overhang, with a
torsionally rigid cross member, and prepared for
simple mounting of the tipping pivot. Consult DAF
for further information.
These bodybuilders' guidelines are only
applicable to vehicles which comply with
standard DAF specifications, in accordance
with the existing bodybuilders' drawings. In
case of doubt, DAF should be consulted.
Without a sub-frame, the standard chassis are
designed for, and are at least suitable for, the
transport of a uniformly distributed load at
nominal permitted axle loads, with the
exception of vehicles with 260 mm or 192 mm
high side members with continuous inner
reinforcement flitches, such as the Low-Deck
versions or FA LF45. These vehicles require
additional stiffness of a sub-frame or
superstructure construction.
In case the load on the chassis is not equally
divided extra care should be taken with
regard to the tension levels in the chassis. For
chassis material characteristics see table
"Chassis specifications: Tractors and
Rigids". When in doubt DAF Trucks could be

32 201122
Chassis Information
consulted as mentioned in chapter

1.3: "Verificaton of superstructure". For
subframe guidelines related to certain body
types see the relevant text in the section
'Superstructures'.
Component location
DAF pays much attention to a bodybuilder-
friendly positioning of all vehicle components in or
on the outside of the chassis frame. In spite of
this, for some body types a relocation of
2
components may sometimes be necessary. For
the CF75-85 and XF series, DAF uses the
following starting positions: location of fuel tanks
in front of the rear axle on the right-hand side (for
the LF and CF65 series on the left-hand side,
immediately behind the cab), leaving sufficient
room for twist-locks and crane legs (compact
exhaust silencer), standard free space for
mudguards on the rear axle(s) and whenever
possible no components on the rear overhang
section of the chassis. For more detailed
component location data, see the bodybuilders'
drawings of the vehicle concerned.
2.11 DRAWBAR CROSS MEMBER
The rearmost cross member in the chassis may

be constructed as an end beam (on rigids not
used for truck/trailer combinations). This end
beam is not suitable for the fitting of a towing hook
or similar equipment.
The rearmost cross member can also be
constructed as a drawbar cross member suitable
for the fitting of a towing jaw. At all times the ex-
factory supplied drawbar cross member and its
carrying supports are build in accordance with the
guidelines of directive 94/20EC. Also any non
DAF drawbar construction and carrying supports
that are submitted to DAF for approval must
comply to the same directive.
On request, a drawbar cross member fitted in the
required position can ex-works be supplied in
combination with an adapted rear overhang (AE).
However, if the definitive position will not be
known until a later stage, an easy demountable
drawbar cross member can be ordered ex-works,
which for easy recognition, will be fitted in the
chassis the wrong way round.
If necessary, a drawbar cross member fitted in
the chassis may be relocated. When relocating a G001183
drawbar cross member, always use the correct
quantity of attachment bolts of the correct
property class.
201122 33
Chassis Information
WARNING! Note that flange bolts

must not be re-used, unless a new
nut can be screwed along the full
length of the bolt by hand. For the
tightening torques of DAF flange
bolts, see section 2.6: "Attachment
of components to the chassis".
In normal circumstances (wheels pointing straight

2 ahead, flat road), the position of the trailer
drawbar must not deviate more than approx. 10
from an imaginary line parallel to the road.
If mid-axle trailers or trailers with a constrained
steered close-coupling system are used which
exert lateral forces on the rear overhang of the
prime mover, the rear overhang of the prime
mover should be fitted with internal lateral
stiffeners up to the drawbar cross member, to
guarantee sufficient directional stability of the
trailer. These lateral stiffeners may consist of, for
example, diagonal members (channel section,
minimum height 60 mm) in the chassis frame or
in the sub-frame (if fitted). However, if the prime
mover is fitted with a torsionally rigid body, this
extra stiffening is not necessary.
Mid-axle trailers are subject to a vertical load (S)
on the towing eye. In combination with the
distance between rear axle and coupling pin
(AK), this vertical coupling load has an effect on
the ride characteristics of the vehicle. This is the
reason why the AK dimension is limited. See
table 'Maximum AK dimension'.
D value
The D value is defined as the theoretical
reference value for the horizontal force between
the prime mover and the drawn vehicle and is
therefore taken as a basis for the maximum load
under dynamic conditions. The formulas below (I/
II) can be used to determine the minimum D value
required for the drawbar cross member or the
maximum trailer weight.
Dc value
The Dc value is defined as the theoretical
reference value for the horizontal force between GA x GT GT x D/g
the prime mover and the mid-axle trailer and is D=gx (I) GA = (II)
therefore taken as a basis for the maximum load GA + GT GT - D/g
under dynamic conditions. The formulas below
(III/IV) can be used to determine the minimum Dc
value required for the drawbar cross member or GA x GT
the maximum trailer weight: GT x Dc/g
Dc = g x (III) GA = (IV)
GA = Maximum permissible (tonnes) GA + GT GT - Dc/g
mass of the drawn vehi- SE0001
cle (Also see the table of drawbar cross member
GT = Maximum permissible (tonnes) data).
mass of the pulling vehi-
cle

34 201122
Chassis Information
GT' = Maximum permissible (tonnes)

mass of the pulling vehi-
cle including the vertical
(static) load on the draw-
bar cross member.
D = Value of the drawbar (kN)
cross member
g = Gravitational accelera-
tion
(9,81 m/
s2) 2
The permissible D value depends on the
dimensions of the drawbar cross member and the
pattern of holes for the towing jaw; also see the
table of drawbar cross member data below.
When determining the maximum permissible
mass of the trailer, pay attention not only to the D/ e2
Dc value of the drawbar cross member and D2
towing jaw, but also to any statutory requirements D1
and the maximum value stated on the type
approval certificate or on the vehicle registration e1
document.
96120404-216
Standard drawbar cross member mounting in the

chassis
V value
In some countries, it is not only the Dc value that X
is important for combinations with a mid-axle
trailer > 3.5 tonnes, but the V value on the
coupling also has to meet EC directive 94/20.
The V value is defined as the theoretical
reference force for the amplitude of the vertical
h
force between the prime mover and the mid-axle
trailer and is therefore taken as a basis for the
maximum load under dynamic conditions. The L
minimum required V value for the drawbar cross
member can be determined using the formula 97122901-202
below (III): Dimensions of the mid-axle trailer
2
X x C
V=ax (III) in all cases X2/L2 should be 1; see drawbar cross
2
L member data.
SE0002
Where:
a = Equivalent acceleration in the
coupling point:
1.8 m/s2 for air-sprung prime
mover, or
2.4 m/s2 for prime mover with oth-
er suspension system.
X = Trailer body length. (metres)
L = Distance between centre of trail- (metres)
ing axle and end of drawbar.
201122 35
Chassis Information
C = axle loads of the trailer. (tonnes)

V = V value of the drawbar cross (kN)
member.
In view of the high 'V' value usually required for

the drawbar cross member when a mid-axle
trailer is used, DAF advises the mounting of a
D19 drawbar cross member in the case of a
2 calculated V value of up to a maximum of 50kN

(also see the table of drawbar cross member
data).
Drawbar cross member data
Vehicle type D Dc val- V GA S Bolt D1 D2 e1 e2
value ue value [ton- vertical
[kN] [kN] [kN] nes] load
(1)
[kg]
Tractors
FT CF75-85 and 43 - - - - M14 - 15 120 55
XF
FTG/P CF85-XF 43 - - - - M14 - 15 120 55
FTS CF85 - XF 43 - - - - M14 - 15 120 55
FTR XF
FTT CF85-XF 43 - - - - M14 - 15 120 55
FTM XF 43 - - - - M14 - 15 120 55
Rigids
FA LF45 70 50 30 15 650 M14 75 15 120 55
FA LF55 14-16t 75 50 18 15 650 M14 75 15 120 55
FA LF55 18t 100 70 25 25 900 M16 85 17 140 80
FA CF65
FA CF65 (4) 130 90 28 25 1000 M20 95 21 160 100
CF75/85 and XF 130 90 28 40 1000 M20 95 21 160 100
CF75/85 and XF 190 150 50 65 1000 M20 95 21 160 100
CF75/85 and XF 190 130 75 1) 1000 M20 95 21 160 100
CF75/85 and XF 190 130 63 1) 2000 M20 95 21 160 100
(2) (3)
Low version 114 114 43.2 24 1000 M20 95 21 160 100
(1) To be calculated according to formula II or IV, to a maximum permissible value as stated in the column. Specific and/or additional
requirements may differ from country to country and further restrict the maximum trailer weight (GA).
(2) For more information about this low-positioned DAF drawbar cross member, see the next paragraph.
(3) Tested and released according to TV/EC requirements. When the D value is > 114 kN, the use of a mid-axle trailer is not
allowed. However, Dmax = 130 kN in countries where the TV/EC requirements do not have to be met.
(4) Valid for CF65 chassis produced up to and including week 0512.

36 201122
Chassis Information
Maximum AK dimension (centre-to-centre

distance between rearmost axle and coupling
V val- Drawbar cross member in rear Low-positioned DAF drawbar cross
ue overhang (1) (2) member (1) (2)
[kN]
Single rear Two or more rear axles Single rear Two or more rear axles
axle axle
25 3000 3500 2300 2950
40 1900 2200 1450 1850 2
1750 2050 1350 1700
43.2
50 1550 1750 1150 1500
(1) Additional requirements in the country concerned may further restrict the AK dimension. When using a drawbar cross member
with a higher V value, consult DAF.
(2) A vertical load on the coupling affects the axle load distribution of the prime mover; always verify that at least 30% of the total
vehicle weight is under the front axle(s). See sub 1.6: "Weight distribution"
Low version
For the CF75/85 and XF series, a lower and more
forwards positioned drawbar cross member can
be ordered from DAF. When ordering such cross
members, state the X and Y dimensions required.
These drawbar cross members must be fitted in
accordance with DAF's instructions. More
information on its overall dimensions and chassis
mounting position are available on the chassis
detail drawing: 1668101 that is available on the
Internet (Corporate DAF website: www.daf.com - Y
> see item "Products"). If any non-DAF
constructions are used, the dealer or bodybuilder Y X
should submit to DAF a drawing in duplicate for
verification. For the legal requirements involved X
check the first paragraphs of this sub-chapter.
20090503-029
201122 37
Chassis Information
Distance between centre of rearmost axle and

mounting face on the inside of drawbar cross
member
Position of the low drawbar cross member in relation to the rearmost axle
Series Vehicle Type of suspension Distance X (range): distance Distance Y: range
type (4) between centre of rearmost (maximum)
axle to mounting face on in- [mm]
2 side of drawbar cross member

[mm]
X (1) Y (2)
FA / FAS (5) air suspension from 690 to 1140 From 250 to 360
+ (G)V
XF and FAR + (G)V 6-bellows air suspen- from 615 to 1065 from 250 to 360
CF (3) sion
6-bellows air suspen- from 565 to 1065 from 272 to 360
sion
(1) Within this range, adjustment pitches for mounting the low-positioned drawbar cross member are 50 mm. Moving the coupling
further to the rear, in combination with the use of mid-axle trailers, may have an adverse effect on the ride characteristics. Also
take note of statutory requirements, which may differ from country to country. In case of doubt, DAF should be contacted.
(2) Within this range, adjustment pitches for mounting the low-positioned drawbar cross member are 22 mm. One of six possible
Y-positions can be ordered ex-factory, see the following table in this paragraph for the possibilities and their corresponding
selection code numbers.
(3) FA CF65 chassis from production week 0513 onwards are not included.
(4) (G)V = Low deck chassis type (previously referred to as High Volume chassis).
(5) Delevery of the lowered drawbar cross member for the FAS chassis on POV request only.
Overview of SELCO number and corresponding

Y position ex-factory:
Selco number Y position
[mm] (1)
4948 250
4952 272
4953 294
4954 316
4955 338
4956 360
(1) The X position can limit the choice for any of the available
Y-positions. See the previous table for more details.
Centre-to-centre distance between rearmost

axle and coupling (AK dimension)
Dimension AK is - dependent upon the make and
type of the towing jaw - dimension X + 150/190
mm ( min/max). Care should be taken that,
when the vehicle combination is placed in any
position on a level surface, the space between
prime mover and trailer is at all times sufficient to
allow a kink angle of at least 4.

38 201122
Chassis Information
2
When a semi-low drawbar cross member is used,
the dealer or bodybuilder should submit to DAF a
drawing in duplicate for verification. For the legal
requirements involved check the first paragraphs
of this sub-chapter.
The mounting of a drawbar cross member in a
tractor chassis for combined tractor/trailer
applications is permitted in some cases. In
such cases, DAF must always be consulted
beforehand.
96120404-221
Semi-low drawbar cross member
2.12 REAR LIGHT BRACKETS
Chassis are always delivered with rear light

brackets. If however, the rear light units are to be
integrated into the body or superstructure then a
so called 'transport' bracket could be ordered ex-
factory. Be aware that this transport bracket
which is a preformed metal sheet panel always
must be replaced by a more solid construction.
2.13 WHEEL MOUNTING
All DAF vehicles have spigot-mounted wheels.

For safe and trouble-free fitting of the wheels, it is
most important that the mating surfaces of wheel
rims and brake drums should be absolutely clean.
Any coat of paint must never be thicker than 0.05
mm. In practice this means that the old paint must
be removed before applying a new coat.
Tighten the wheel nuts in a cross-wise sequence
to the correct torque.
201122 39
Chassis Information
Wheel nut tightening torques (1)

Wheel nut Tightening torque
[Nm]
M 18 x 1,5 - series FA LF45 -7.5/08 tonnes and FTP non-steered second axle 340 - 400
M 20 x 1,5 - series FA LF45 - 10/12 tonnes, FA LF55 - 12 t/m 15 tonnes 450 - 520
and FAN LF55 rear steered axle
2 M 22 x 1,5 - series LF55 - 18 t/m 19 tonnes, CF and XF 700
(1) All wheel nuts have RIGHT-HAND thread!
2.14 WHEEL CLEARANCE
To ensure sufficient all-round clearance for the

wheels, proceed as follows when bodying the s
chassis and fitting mudguards or wheel housings:
1. Measure the maximum vertical axle v
movement "v" (metal to metal) on the
b
vehicle.
2. Determine the total vertical space (s) by
adding extra space (see table) to the vertical
distance 'v', which is required for vertical axle
movements and superstructure pitch and roll
when cornering or during off-the-road
operation.
3. Determine the lateral movement (b) of the
tyres (see table). With steered axles, the 96120404-222
maximum wheel turning angle should also Air suspension

be taken into account.
4. Note that on multi-axle vehicles the required s
wheel clearance may be different for the
different axles of the vehicle.
v
5. Finally, it should be taken into account that b
(extra) space is required for a liftable second
axle or rear steered axle and for a rigid
trailing axle.
On tractor chassis with flexible plastic or rubber
mudguards, which will only be used for operation
on surfaced roads and under 'normal' conditions,
the mudguards can be fitted without extra
clearance. In that case, dimension 's' is equal to
20090503-008
dimension 'v'!
Leaf suspension
Wheel clearance
Operating conditions Extra space Total space 's' (1) Lateral space 'b'
Operation on normal roads 25 v + 25 15
Off-the-road operation 75 v + 75 25
With snow chains:
- operation on normal roads 60 v + 60 60
- off-the-road operation 110 v + 110 70
(1) Not applicable to Low-Deck chassis.

40 201122
Chassis Information
Clearance dimension
If the chassis to be bodied is not yet available, the
wheel clearance can also be determined on the
basis of the bodybuilders' drawing. The chassis
height and the HBV/HBT/HBA dimension (metal
to metal) can be established from this drawing.
To determine the clearance dimension (U), the
extra space needed as indicated in the above
table may have to be added to the calculated
HBV/HBT/HBA dimension. 2
Each bodybuilders' chassis drawing refers to
drawing No. 1260799/.. (CF75-85 and XF series)
or NSEA383/.. (LF and CF65 series) which
shows a number of general vehicle data, such as
tyre radius, wheel track and maximum width of
the various front and rear axles. This drawing (of
course, the one with the latest modification
index!) should always be consulted.
The above-mentioned bodybuilders' drawings
and drawing No. 1260799 are included on the
TOPEC-CD ROM and available on the internet
(www.daf.com).
Chassis heights
The chassis heights at the front axle (HV
dimension) and rear axle (HA dimension) can, for
the most commonly used tyre sizes (dimensions
according to ETRTO standard), be determined
using the TOPEC chassis height calculation
program. The height of the tyre above the chassis
(HBV/HBT/HBA dimension) and the clearance
dimension (U) for the driven rear axle are also
indicated.
The formulas for calculating the chassis heights
and the corresponding values on the basis of the
DAF bodybuilders' drawings are given below:
Determining the chassis height on the basis of the bodybuilders' drawing (3)
FRONT AXLE: HV = R + Y + A (2)
AHV(min.) = R - C
HA = R + Z + A (2)
REAR AXLE: AHA(min.) = R - D
HBV(max.) = Ro - A - Z, metal to metal, at the driven axle.
HBA(max.) = Ro - A - X, metal to metal, at the trailing axle.
HBA(max.) = Ro - A - Z, metal to metal, at the second driven axle
HBT(max.) = Ro - A - V, metal to metal, at the second front / (non)steered lead-
ing rear axle
U = HBV + 25 mm. (1)
AHA(min.) = R - D
(1) The U dimension given here applies to operation on normal roads. For other operating conditions, see the paragraph 'Driving
conditions'.
(2) The calculated chassis heights only apply to the places in the bodybuilders' drawings that are marked HV and HA.
(3) For chassis weights that are not mentioned in the bodybuilders' drawings, you should consult the DAF specification sheets and/
or (if you have them) the TOPEC layout calculation data.
201122 41
Chassis Information
The parameters indicated in these formulas can

be found in the bodybuilders' drawings
concerned. They can also be derived from the
above-mentioned drawing 1260799. Therefore,
always also refer to this detailed drawing.
2
A
Y
C HV
R
AHV
1025
WD = 2050
22032802-038
Twin front axle, chassis height

Driving conditions
Dimension U is the minimum clearance between
the top of the chassis side member and the
underside of the floor of the body or the HV
o
A
R
mudguard under normal operating conditions.
Additional wheel clearance is required under Y
different driving conditions: C
R
- when snow chains are used: U' = U + 35 mm AHV
- for off-the-road operation: U' = U + 50 mm
- for off-the-road operation: + snow chains: 96120404-224
U' =U + 85 mm Single front axle, chassis height
HBV
U
HA
o
A
R
D
R
AHA
96120404-225
Rear axle, chassis height wheel clearance/

clearance U

42 201122
Chassis Information
WARNING! For multi-axle vehicles, it

should be established which axle is HBT
decisive for the minimum clearance
dimension; also see the relevant
o
A
R
bodybuilders' drawing.
V
WARNING! Always also make a

check on the vehicle to verify the
dimensions.
G000359
2
2nd front axle/second steered axle; tyre above
the chassis
HBA
o
A
R
X/Z
G000360
Trailing axle/rear steered axle (X) or second

driven rear axle (Z); tyre above the chassis
2.15 LOCATION OF THE

MUDGUARDS
On vehicles of the LF55 and CF series, the front

mudguards can be fitted in different places.
Their location depends on the vehicle type and on
the wheels and tyres ordered by the customer.
Location of mudguards LL 260 C
Size LF55 CF65 CF LL 310 D

(1)
18-19t
Low Medi- High
um
A 835 778 778 778 778
B 778 527 372 464 517
B
C 530 584 457 540 575 260 310
A
D - - 398 498 541 E
E 91 240 240 240 240
(1) Values valid for CF65 chassis produced from week 13

2005 onwards (V.I.N. code: XLRAE65CC0E677039). 20090503-007
Position of front mudguards on LF55 and CF

series
201122 43
Chassis Information
Mudguards are factory-mounted in accordance

with the 91/226/EC directive. However, if the
statutory requirements for mudguards do not
apply, the mudguards are fitted in the high M12
position as standard.
On the short cabs of the CF vehicle series, the 130
superstructure may in certain situations come in
the way of the factory-mounted front mudguards.
2 If this is the case, and the problem cannot be
solved by using a lower mounting position, the 130
plastic flaps may be sawn off. However, they
must never be sawn off lower than the top of the
side members. Of course, the bodybuilder should
in such cases ensure that wheel protection
provisions are refitted in accordance with legal
requirements.
95120404-229
If, on a leaf-sprung vehicle, the rear mudguards Air-sprung driven axle (FA LF55 16-18 tonnes,
cannot be attached to the sub-frame or to the CF and XF series) mounting of bracket
body, they may be bolted to the chassis side
members. Wherever possible, use the existing
holes in the chassis. Air-sprung vehicles already
have tapped holes for this purpose in the torque
rod bracket.
For some tractor chassis, DAF also has standard
brackets, which can be used to fit the mudguards
to the chassis at various heights, depending on
the tyre size.
Tractors can ex-works be supplied with these
(3-piece) rear mudguards.
2.16 EC-APPROVED REAR

UNDERRUN PROTECTION
An EC-approved rear underrun protection beam

(with EC certificate No. E4-70/221/92006) is
available as an option for certain vehicles. A
general exception are the Low-Deck rigid truck
chassis (High volume vehicles).
For CF75-85 and XF chassis there is a choice of
three standard heights 'H' for ex-works rear
underrun protection beams: 270 mm, 300 mm or
330 mm below the chassis. H
For LF and CF65 chassis one height 'H' of the

rear underrun protection beam is available ex-
works: 385 MAX.
550 MAX.
- LF45: 245 mm
- LF55 14-16t: 300 mm
- LF55 18-19t: 355 mm
- CF65 16-19t: 355 mm
The rear underrun protection beam according the
EC legislation, must be mounted at the following G001267
possition:

44 201122
Chassis Information
- Maximum 550 mm above the road surface,

in all situations, laden and unladen vehicle.
- Maximum horizontal distance 385 mm, from
the rear end of the vehicle up to the rear end
of the underrun protection beam. This 385
mm is based on the maximum legal distance
of 400 mm including deformation when a test
load has been applied.
2.17 AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION

2
The vehicle series that are ex-works supplied
with a lubrication system can in some cases be
given a number of extra lubrication points for the
superstructure. Depending upon vehicle
application, the vehicle type in question and the
required number of lubrication points on the
superstructure, a tee piece may be fitted to the
pump, which enables the fitting of a second main
pipe, running in parallel with the existing system.
There are no restrictions for the length of the
added main pipe between pump and distribution
point. However, the length of the pipe between
distribution point and lubrication point is restricted
to a maximum of 5 metres. For further
information, DAF should be contacted.
201122 45
Chassis Information

46 201122
General information on superstructures
GENERAL INFORMATION ON SUPERSTRUCTURES

Page Date
3.1 Superstructure with sub-frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 201122
3.2 BAM's - body attachment methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 201122
3.3 First attachment point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 201122
3.4 Type of superstructure/BAM matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 201122
3.5 BAM instructions, general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 201122
3.6 FA LF45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 201122
3.7 FA LF55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 201122
3.8 FA LF55 18t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 201122
3.9 FA CF65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 201122
3.10
3.11
FA CF and XF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
FAR/FAS CF and XF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
201122
201122
3
3.12 FAG CF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 201122
3.13 FAN LF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 201122
3.14 FAN CF and XF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 201122
3.15 FAT CF and XF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 201122
3.16 FAC/FAX CF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 201122
3.17 FAD CF and XF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 201122
3.18 FAK CF and XF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 201122
201122 47

48 201122
3. GENERAL INFORMATION ON SUPERSTRUCTURES

3.1 SUPERSTRUCTURE WITH SUB-
FRAME
For a large number of superstructure types, it is

necessary to fit a sub-frame on the chassis, not to
ensure structural strength and rigidity of the
chassis but to obtain sufficient wheel clearance.
For this purpose a non-rigid attachment is
required. The use of a sub-frame gives an even
distribution of load, creates sufficient wheel
clearance and enables extra components and/or
units to be fitted. As a rule, a material (such as
3
aluminium) which is of lower quality than that of
the chassis side members can be used for the
sub-frame. If, however, the chassis is subjected
to higher loads or stresses, the dimensions of the
sub-frame should be determined taking account
of the anticipated loads, and a rigid attachment
is required, using attachment plates.
Construction of the sub-frame
The following instructions apply to the
construction and attachment of all sub-frames:
- The sub-frame should run the full length of
the chassis frame without joints. A sub-
frame extending far to the front also
reduces the risk of annoying (speed-
dependent) natural frequencies, the so-
called bending vibrations, which in some
cases may also adversely affect the driving
comfort. The front end of the sub-frame,
before the first attachment point, should be
tapered or dove-tailed to prevent an
unnecessarily abrupt change in rigidity
between the sub-frame and the chassis
frame. Finally, to prevent notching, the front
end of the sub-frame must be rounded off on
the underside. The radius should be at least
5 mm.
- A channel section (minimum thickness 5
mm) is generally best suited for side member
sub-frames. For some applications, e.g. a
vehicle loader, it may be necessary to close
off the channel section on a part of the sub-
frame, so that a box section is formed. In that
case, a gradual transition of rigidity should
again be guaranteed by dove-tailing.
96120404-301a
201122 49
- In the case of a rigid attachment of the sub-

frame to the chassis, the material with the
lowest mechanical properties is always
decisive for the strength and stiffness of the
structure. It is therefore then preferable to
make the sub-frame from a material which is
at least of the same quality as that of the
chassis frame; see the overview of side
member dimensions in section
2.10: "Chassis and cabine related
dimensions". If a material other than steel is
used for a rigidly attached sub-frame, the
shape and dimensions must be determined
3 taking account of the specific characteristics
of the material in question. Consult DAF for
more information.
- The sectional pattern of a construction must
always be uniform. Each addition in the form
of construction reinforcements must
continue to guarantee a uniform pattern of
the linear moment of inertia. If, for any H
0,6 H min
reason, the sub-frame height is decreased or
increased in some places, always ensure
that there is a gradual transition of rigidity. 1200 max
- The maximum permissible distance between 96120404-305
one cross member and the next in or on top

of a sub-frame is 1200 mm.
- The height of the sub-frame cross members
must be at least 0.6 times the height of the
sub-frame side members. The sub-frame
cross members should be fitted in such a
way that they can follow the movements of
the chassis frame.
- Cross members should preferably not be 1200 max
welded to the sub-frame flanges. 96120404-306
Any vertical forces exerted on the chassis

should be introduced via the side member
webs and not via the side member flanges!
The upper (and lower) flanges only serve to
add sufficient strength and stiffness to the
section, and they can easily be deformed if
incorrectly loaded by transverse forces
exerted on the flange ends. If this happens
nonetheless, the inside of the section
(between the flanges) should be adequately
reinforced, so that deformation and/or
damage are prevented. Clamped joint to the
flanges are forbidden.
Filler between chassis and sub-frame
If a filler has to be fitted between the chassis
frame and the sub-frame (for example in the case
of an aluminium sub-frame), always use a form-
retaining filler (preferably plastic) over the full
length.
Never fit a filler in the case of totally or partly rigid
attachment of the sub-frame (BAM 2, 3 and 4).

50 201122
Stability by torsional stiffening of the sub-

frame
For some (deforming) superstructures, vehicle
stability requires torsional stiffening of the rear
1200
overhang. This stiffening can consist of parts of
the body (e.g. a tipping stabiliser), separate
torsionally stiff cross members or cruciform
braces fitted in the sub-frame; see the figures 1200
opposite. Where necessary, this is stated in the
relevant text of section 4: "Superstructures".
NOTE: The cruciform braces must be
fitted as close as possible to the chassis
frame and starting from 1000 mm in
front of the centre line of the last axle up
3
to the end of the sub-frame.
Vehicle stability during operation of any I p min. = 175 cm4

superstructure system is the responsibility of
the bodybuilder and the user. The user should 96120404-307
at all times make sure that vehicle stability is Cross members for torsional stiffening
guaranteed. It is therefore important that clear
instructions for use of the superstructure
should be provided on or supplied with the
vehicle. //
//
00
10
I min. = 133 cm4
G000436
Cruciform bracing for torsional stiffening
201122 51
Comparative table for sub-frame sections

Section- Area of cross se- Specific weight of Moment of resist- Linear moment of
designation (1) tion A [cm2] the section M [kg/ ance WX at vertical inertia IX at vertical
m] load [cm3] load [cm4]
Hot-rolled channel section
UNP 60 6,5 5,17 10,5 31,6
UNP 65 9,0 7,2 17,7 57,5
UNP 80 11,0 8,9 26,5 106,0
UNP 100 13,5 10,8 41,2 206,0
UNP 120 17,0 13,7 60,7 364,0
3 UNP 140 20,4 16,4 86,4 605,0
UNP 160 24,0 19,2 116,0 925,0
UNP 180 28,0 22,5 150,0 1350,0
Cold-rolled channel section
U 60x30x4 4,36 3,49 7,8 23,5
U 60x40x4 5,16 4,13 9,9 29,8
U 80x50x6 9,80 7,8 24,5 98,0
U 100x50x6 11,0 8,8 33,4 166,8
U 100x60x4 8,36 6,69 27,3 136,6
U 100x65x6 12,8 10,24 41,3 206,6
U 120x60x5 11,3 9,0 42,3 254,0
U 120x60x6 13,4 10,7 49,5 297,1
U 140x60x4 9,9 8,0 42,7 298,7
U 140x60x6 14,6 11,7 61,2 428,3
U 160x60x6 15,8 12,6 73,7 589,2
U 160x70x5 14,3 11,4 70,2 561,2
U 180x60x5 14,3 11,4 73,8 664,2
U 180x60x6 16,9 12,9 83,9 755
U 200x60x6 18,1 13,9 97,6 976
Box section
80x80x6 17,2 13,9 40,7 163
80x80x7 20,4 16,0 45,8 183,2
80x100x8 26,2 20,6 60,8 243,2
80x120x8 29,4 23,1 71,2 284,8
100x100x8 29,4 23,1 83,7 418,4
100x120x7 28,8 22,6 87,6 438,1
100x150x8 37,4 29,4 117,6 588,1
120x120x8 35,8 28,1 125,5 753,1
120x120x10 44,0 34,5 149,1 894,7
120x120x12 48,0 40,7 151,5 959,4
140x140x12 61,4 48,2 241,8 1692
150x150x12 66,2 51,5 282,4 2118

52 201122
(1) The table above gives information about some of the most commonly used sub-frame sections. This table may also be useful
for the selection of alternative materials with similar properties. The dimensions, weights and static data apply to sections without
flitches!
3.2 BAM'S - BODY ATTACHMENT

METHODS
BAM (Body Attachment Method) type -

overview
DAF uses five body attachment methods (BAM 1,
2, 3, 4 and 5) for the mounting of superstructures.
By using one of three basic attachment tech-
niques (or a combination of them), an optimum
3
and homogeneous superstructure and chassis at-
tachment can be realised for each type of super-
structure. The basic techniques are: non-rigid
attachment, rigid attachment and attachment with
consoles.
96120404-309 G000429
BAM 1: fully non-rigid attachment BAM 1: fully non-rigid attachment

(CF75-85 and XF Series) (LF and CF65 Series)
96120404-310 G000430
BAM 2: rigid attachment at front BAM 2: rigid attachment at front

96120404-311 G000431
BAM 3a + 3b: rigid attachment at rear BAM 3: rigid attachment at rear

201122 53
96120404-312 96120404-313
BAM 4: fully rigid attachment BAM 5: attachment with consoles
3 Three attachment techniques

DAF uses three basic attachment techniques for
the mounting of superstructures. By using one of
these three attachment techniques (or a
combination of them), an optimum and
homogeneous superstructure and chassis
attachment can be realised for each type of
superstructure. DAF's superstructure attachment
techniques are based on state-of-the-art
technological knowledge in the field of chassis
stiffness and spring systems. Observation of the
attachment recommendations guarantees that
the dynamic behaviour of the bodied vehicle will
be the same as defined and tested by DAF.

54 201122
- Tie rods
The tie rod attachment technique provides a non-
rigid connection. It allows limited displacement of
the superstructure in the longitudinal direction.
This gives little resistance to torsion, so that,
while driving on bumpy roads, the chassis frame
and the superstructure will be able to follow each M14
other well. The result is a good balance between
road grip and ride comfort.
A
Tightening torque of M16 nut for tie rod
(CF75-85 and XF series): 55 Nm M12-10.9
A: = 60 mm for CF75-85 series
= 60 - 70 mm for XF series 3
This technique can be used for a superstructure
with or without sub-frame, in accordance with the M16
G000438
following guidelines:
- When using this attachment technique,
always fit at least one attachment plate
near the rear axle, for superstructure fixation
in the longitudinal direction. min.15
- The attachment brackets should be mounted
with flange bolts near the cross member
attachment points in the chassis frame. The A
maximum permissible distance between the
tie rods is 1200 mm. The tie rod should be M12-10.9
located against the side member, so that
lateral displacement of the sub-frame or
superstructure is prevented.
- The tie rod should have a working length of
at least 150 mm. A tie rod may be bolted or M16
welded to a superstructure cross member or G000437
to the sub-frame. Tie rods should always be Tie rod
placed in a vertical position.
- As an alternative, an M16 stud of this length
may also be used.
- The property class of the tie rod material
should in any case be at least 8.8.
- If the tie rods are bolted to the sub-frame, the
thickness of the sub-frame should at least be
5 mm.
- Always use self-locking nuts or locknuts for
the attachment of tie rods.
bolts, see section 2.6: "Attachment of
components to the chassis".
- Consoles
DAF distinguishes console models that are
mounted to the vertical section of the chassis
profile (model A) and consoles that additionally
are supported by the upper flange of the main
chassis longitudinal (model B). Due to its specific
features DAF advices the console model B with
additional chassis flange support to be used for
BAM 5 attachment (described further down this
chapter).
201122 55
Console; model A (LF and CF65 only)

M16-10.9 M16-10.9
These consoles can be equipped with or without
pressure springs to provide a non-rigid or rigid
connection similar to the tie rod and attachment
plate connection that is described further down in M12-10.9 70 mm
this chapter.
WARNING! The rigid connection
with DAF type console may however
not be clasified equal to the
attachment plate connection due to 0 mm 50
the differences in dimensional
3 features and the number of fasteners
used.
3-5 mm
50
M16
This technique can be used for superstructures M12 M16

with a sub-frame, in accordance with the G000441
following guidelines: Consoles (model A) with and without pressure
spring
- The mating surfaces of the console with the
sub-frame and with the chassis frame should
be free from paint and impurities. The only
coating allowed is a thin layer of primer
(thickness 17 - 25 m).
- DAF supplied consoles have elongated
fixing holes in their flanges. Therefore only
flanged bolts and nuts should be used to
fasten DAF consoles to the sub-frame
consoles or brackets. Non flanged fasteners
may only be used in combination with 4 mm
thick washers with an outside diameter of at
least 34 mm under the nut and bolt heads.
- When pressure springs are used, the pre-
tension of each spring should be 1,5kN. For
DAF-supplied springs, the specified pre-
tension is obtained by compressing the
springs to a length of 70 mm. The springs
can be fitted on the upper console of the sub-
frame or under the lower console of the
chassis longitudinal.
- For the rigid attachment method the
consoles must be positioned in such a way
that the touching surfaces have contact over
the full length with no gap in between them.
This will avoid unnecessary stress in the
console flanges, sub-frame and chassis
longitudinal.

56 201122
- Attachment plates
Attachment using attachment plates gives a rigid
connection between the superstructure sub-
frame and the chassis frame (provided that
sufficient flange bolts are used), so that the sub- A
frame contributes to the strength and stiffness of
the chassis frame.
A: M12 - 10.9 (LF45 ,LF55 and CF65 se- 40-85
ries)
M16 - 10.9 (CF75-CF85 and XF series) 15
Rigid attachment with attachment plates is

only used where necessary for the strength of
the construction.
50
3
This technique can only be used for G000494
superstructures with a sub-frame, in Attachment plate position (CF75-85 and XF

accordance with the following guidelines: chassis)
- The mating surfaces of the attachment plate
with the sub-frame and with the chassis
frame should be free from paint and A
impurities. The only coating allowed is a thin
layer of primer (thickness 17 - 25 m).
- When mounting the attachment plates,
wherever possible use the holes in the 40
chassis specially provided for this purpose.
- If no sub-frame is used and the
superstructure is mounted with tie rods, one
attachment plate should be fitted to an extra
50
connection between two superstructure
cross members (near the rear axle) for
superstructure fixation in the longitudinal
direction. This should be done in accordance G001182
with BAM 1. Attachment plate position (LF and CF65 chassis)

NOTE: Attachment plates on LF and
CF65 chassis, if ordered ex-factory, are
fitted close to and above the rear axle
on the second, third and fourth (13 mm)
bolt hole of the standard predrilled set
of four.
201122 57
- Consoles; model B (for BAM 5 attachment)

Console attachment enables torsionally rigid
superstructures, such as tanks and similar
constructions, to be mounted to the chassis
M16-10.9
frame without overloading the superstructure or
the chassis. The attachments must be made in
such a way that torsional movement of the
chassis is not hindered when driving on bumpy
roads. min. 30
This technique can be used for superstructures 40-60

without a sub-frame, in accordance with the
following guidelines:
3 - Consoles must guide the superstructure in
50
both transverse and longitudinal direction. In

the vertical direction, only slight movement is 96120404-317
permitted resulting from torsion occurring in Console (model B) with fixed attachment
the chassis. Superstructure-to-console
attachment can be a fixed attachment or an
attachment with pressure springs,
depending on the type of superstructure and M16-10.9
the operating conditions.
- For a fixed superstructure-to-console
attachment, spacer bushes with a length of
at least 30 mm should always be fitted to
permit the use of bolts that are long enough
to allow some degree of stretch. 40-60
- In relation with a vertical static console load
of 20 kN two pressure springs should be
used, the pre-tension of each spring should 50
be 3 kN. The minimum spring rate per spring
is 225 N/mm.
G000364
- The console attachment introduces a local
vertical point load which results in local Console (model B) with pressure springs
stress in the chassis. Therefore the chassis
longitudinal must be reinforced with an
innerliner, in case there is no innerliner
reinforcement a subframe must be mounted.
- The console attachment might also introduce
lateral torsion on the longitudinal. This
torsion must be eliminated by a cross
member supporting the longitudinal from the
inside. See section 2.6: "Attachment of

58 201122
3.3 FIRST ATTACHMENT POINT
First attachment point

The DAF chassis has a provision for the first
(non-rigid) attachment point for BAM 1 and BAM
3 attachment methods.
If this attachment does not concern a bracket for
the DAF tie rod, but another bracket or a threaded
hole in a spring bracket, a normal M16 stud
(property class 8.8) should be used. The working
30mm
length of this stud should also be at least 150 mm.
3
min.
The console or plate used to fit this stud to the
sub-frame, should at all times project at least 96120404-321
30 mm downwards along the chassis frame.
First attachment, CF75-85 and XF serie
This is necessary to prevent lateral displacement
of the sub-frame.
On LF and CF65 series with non rigid attachment
at the front end (BAM 1 + 3) the first and second
console must at all times be equipped with a
pressure loaded spring to ensure a sufficient non-
rigid attachment. To prevent lateral displacement
of the sub-frame either the first console must be 30mm
projected at least 30 mm above the chassis frame min.
or an additional restraint plate must be fitted on
the sub-frame projecting at least 30 mm
downwards along the chassis frame. Check
previous chapter for more detailed information.
For some examples of first attachment points, 20081102-005
which can be found on various vehicle series, see With stud in spring bracket, CF75-85 and XF
the illustrations in this section. series
NOTE: Consult the table at the end of
this chapter for factory-prepared
positions of the first attachment point in
relation to the front axle centre line .
min.
30 mm
G000514
First attachment, FAT CF75-85 series with day

cab (no vertical exhaust system)
201122 59
Exception
Under extreme conditions, as is for instance the
case with torsionally rigid superstructure
constructions, a somewhat flexible attachment at
the first attachment point is recommended. To
this end, springs or rubber can be used. The
degree of flexibility required depends on the 3-5 mm
operating conditions (area of application), the
relative torsional stiffness of the superstructure min.
and the experience of bodybuilders in similar 30 mm
situations. The springs of the DAF range may 3-5 mm
also be used for this purpose. See section 8:
3
'Order numbers of DAF parts'.
G000425
First and second attachment, LF and CF65 series
3-5 mm
min.
30 mm 3-5 mm
G000453
First and second attchment with restrainer plate ,
LF and CF65 series

60 201122
Position of first attachment point (non-rigid) in relation to front axle centre line
Vehicle type Leaf-sprung front axle Air-sprung front axle
Day cab Sleeper cab Day cab Sleeper cab
LH side RH LH RH side LH RH LH side RH side
side side side side
FA LF45 7.5/12 tonnes 611 (2) 1205 1198 (1) - -
(2)
FA/N LF55 14/16 tonnes 620 894 - -
(2)
FA LF55 18-19 tonnes 570 844 - -
FA CF65 851 (2) 1040 - -
FA CF75-85 562 (3)
1072 562 922 3
FA XF - 1072 - -
FAS/R/N CF75-85 562 (2) 922 562 922
FAN XF - 922 - 922
(3)
FAG CF75-85 619 1072 - -
FAT CF75-85 571 (2) 922 - -
FAT XF - 922 - -
FAD XF - 1015 - -
FAD CF75 629 (2) 1015 - -
(2)
FAC/D/X CF85 629 1015 - -
FAK XF - 1067 1048 - -
(1) Distance is valid for chassis equipped with 125 Ah batteries. If 175 Ah batteries are installed then the distance is 1281 mm.
(2) If a vertical exhaust system (pipe) is fitted then use the values of the sleeper cab situation.
(3) If a vertical exhaust system (pipe) is fitted then the distance is 677mm.
3.4 TYPE OF SUPERSTRUCTURE/

BAM MATRIX
The following overview shows the attachment

method specified by DAF for each of the most
common types of superstructure. The aim has
been to achieve an optimum compromise
between chassis strength and rigidity for specific
superstructures on the one hand (strength) and
maximum flexibility for vehicle comfort on the
other hand. Consult DAF for any superstructure
variants not mentioned in this matrix.
201122 61
BAM overview on the basis of types of superstructure

TYPE OF SUPERSTRUCTURE BAM 1 BAM 2 BAM BAM BAM 4 BAM 5
3a (1) 3b (1)
Fixed body
Demountable body with sub-
frame
(High-)volume body
Body with tail lift
Tanker with sub-frame
3 Tanker with console attachment

Compactor refuse collector

Refuse collector with rotating
drum
Road sweeper
Gully emptier
Tipper with front-end ram
Tipper with central ram
Three-way tipper
Tipping demountable body
Loading arm system
Concrete mixer and concrete
pump
Vehicle loading crane immediate-
ly behind the cab
Vehicle loading crane at rear end
of chassis
Recovery vehicle
Hydraulic platform (dependent on
type)
Fork-lift truck carrier
Fire-fighting vehicle (water ten-
der)
(1) For LF and CF65 chassis use BAM3 instead of BAM3a or BAM3b.
WARNING! Ensure that the

operation of the moving parts on the
chassis cannot be impeded by the
attachments. Furthermore, all
vehicle components should remain
easily accessible for maintenance
and repair.
3.5 BAM INSTRUCTIONS, GENERAL
For correct sub-frame attachment, the following

bodying instructions should be adhered to:

62 201122
A. The minimum numbers of fasteners stated G. The rear end of the body must not protrude
on the next pages should be strictly ad- more than 450 mm from the rearmost attach-
hered to. The fasteners should be evenly ment point.
spaced over the parts I, II and III indicated
in the drawings on the next pages. The
length dimensions of the parts I, II and III
are indicatory values.
B. The numbers indicated always apply to H. Sometimes two figures are given for the number
only one chassis member. of attachments. In such cases, the number de-
pends on the pre-drilled holes and/or the rear
overhang selected, and should be in accord-
ance with the instructions given above.
3
C. When attachment methods BAM 1, 2, 3a, I. Always consult DAF when, applying one of the
3b and 4 are applied, the distance between BAM's detailed on the next pages, you are una-
one attachment point and the next must ble to comply with the above instructions.
never be more than 1200 mm. The only ex-
ception to this rule is BAM 2, where it is im-
possible to fit tie rods between the spring
brackets of the rear axle!
D. The sub-frame should extend forwards as J. On LF, CF and XF vehicles, the hole patterns
far as possible and it should be attached to for BAM 1 and BAM 3 are partly provided. In
the first attachment point. some cases, these holes can of course also be
used for BAM 4 and/or BAM 5.
E. The front of the body must not protrude K. The chassis frames of all vehicle series (with
more than 300 mm from the first attach- the exception of the FA LF45) are tapered at the
ment point. cab rear wall. The sub-frame used should follow
the lines of the chassis frame.
F. The matching attachment points in the LH L. On some vehicles the front body attachment
and RH side members must not be more plates coincide with the vehicle component at-
than 300 mm backwards or forwards in re- tachment brackets. It is allowed to fit a body at-
lation to each other. tachment plate with a thickness of at most 8 mm
between side member and attachment brack-
ets. It should however be ensured that the at-
tachment and the position of the component on
the chassis are equivalent to the original con-
struction.
Max.300 Max.450
Max.1200
WB AE
96120404-322
CF75-85 and XF Series
201122 63
Max.300 Max.450
G000423
Max.1200
WB AE
LF and CF65 Series
3
3.6 FA LF45
FA LF45, BAM 1.
400
*
G000516
WB AE
* See 3.3: "First attachment point".
Wheelbase [m] I (1) II III

Rear axle sus-
pension
G000426 G000426
-325
3.55 Parabolic + air 3 1 2

(1) The first and second consoles always are spring loaded; see 3.3: "First attachment point"
NOTE: BAM 1 chassis mounted

brackets (illustrated black in table) can
be ordered ex-factory with selcode:
0126.
For part numbers of consoles / brackets
that are available via DAF After Sales
see chapter 13.1: "Mountings".

64 201122
FA LF45, BAM 2.
1000 1700
G000416
WB AE
Wheelbase [m] I II III

3
Rear axle sus-
pension
G000426 G000426
-325

201122 65
FA LF45, BAM 3.
* 1700
G000417
WB AE
3
Wheelbase [m] I (1) II III
Rear axle sus-
pension
G000426
-325 -325
3.00 Asymmetric 1 3 1
3.15 Parabolic 1 3 2
3.15 Air 2 2 2
(1) First and second consoles are always spring loaded, see 3.3: "First attachment point"

be ordered ex-factory via POV request.

66 201122
FA LF45, BAM 4.
900
96120404-330
WB AE
Wheelbase [m] Rear axle sus-

pension
I II III
3
-325 -325 -325
3.00 Asymmetric 2 2 1
FA LF45, BAM 5.
1000 1050
96120404-331
WB AE
Wheelbase [m] Rear axle sus- I II III

pension
-326 -326
3.55 Parabolic + air 1 - 1
201122 67
3.7 FA LF55
FA LF55 14-16T, BAM 1.
* 400
G000419
3 WB AE
* See 3.3: "First attachment point"
Wheelbase [m] Rear axle sus- I (1) II III

pension
G000426 G000426
-325


0126.

68 201122
FA LF55 14-16T, BAM 2.
1000 1700
G000420
WB AE
Wheelbase [m] Rear axle suspen-

sion
I II III 3
G000426 G000426
-325

201122 69
FA LF55 14-16T, BAM 3.
* 1700
G000421
WB AE
3

pension
G000426
-325 -325

4.20 parabolic + air 3 2 3


70 201122
FA LF55 14-16T, BAM 4.
900
96120404-336
WB AE

pension
I II III 3
-325 -325 -325

3.80 air 4 1 3
FA LF55 14-16T, BAM 5.
1000 1050 1050
96120404-337
WB AE

pension
-326 -326 -326
All Parabolic + air 1 1 1
201122 71
3.8 FA LF55 18T
FA LF55 18T, BAM 1.
400
*
G000516
3 WB AE
Wheelbase Rear axle I (1) II III

[m] suspension
G000426 G000426
-325

(1) Fisrt and second consoles are always spring loaded, see 3.3: "First attachment point"

0126.

72 201122
FA LF55 18T, BAM 2.
1000 1700
G000420
WB AE

pension
I II III 3
G000426 G000426
-325

201122 73
FA LF55 18T, BAM 3.
* 1700
G000421
WB AE
3

pension
G000426
-325 -325



74 201122
FA LF55 18T, BAM 4.
900
96120404-336
WB AE

pension
I II III 3
-325 -325 -325

3.75 Air 4 1 2
FA LF55 18T, BAM 5.
1000 1050 1050
96120404-337
WB AE

pension
-326 -326 -326
201122 75
3.9 FA CF65
FA CF65, BAM 1.
400
*
G000516
3 WB AE

[m] suspension
G000426 G000426
-325

5.70 Parabolic + air 6 1 3/4

0126.

76 201122
FA CF65, BAM 2.
1000 1700
G000420
WB AE
Wheelbase
[m]
Rear axle
suspension
I II III 3
G000426 G000426
-325

201122 77
FA CF65, BAM 3.
* 1700
G000421
WB AE
3

[m] suspension
G000426
-325 -325


78 201122
FA CF65, BAM 4.
900
96120404-336
WB AE
Wheelbase
[m]
Rear axle
suspension
I II III 3
-325 -325 -325

FA CF65, BAM 5.
1000 1050 1050
96120404-337
WB AE

pension
-326 -326 -326
201122 79
3.10 FA CF AND XF
FA CF75-85 and XF, BAM1.
400
*
96120404-338
3
WB AE

pension
-325
-324 -324
6.90 Parabolic + air 6/7 1 4

80 201122
FA CF75-85 and XF, BAM2.
* 1700
96120404-339
WB AE

3
pension
-325
-324 -324

6.90 Parabolic + air 4/5 4 4
FA CF75-85 and XF, BAM 3a.
1700
*
96120404-340
WB AE

pension
-325 -325
-324

201122 81
FA CF75-85 and XF, BAM 3b.
1700
*
96120404-341
WB AE
3 Wheelbase [m] Rear axle sus- I II III

pension
-325 -325
-324

FA CF75-85 and XF, BAM 4.
900
96120404-342
WB AE

pension
-325 -325 -325


82 201122
FA CF75-85 and XF, BAM 5.
1400 1050 1050
22032802-018
WB AE

pension
I II III
3
-326 -326 -326
3.11 FAR/FAS CF AND XF
FAR/FAS CF75-85 and XF, BAM 1.
400
*
96120404-344
WB WT AE

pension
-325
-324 -324

201122 83
* 1700
96120404-345
WB WT AE

pension
-325
-324 -324

FAR/FAS CF75-85 and XF, BAM 3a.
1700
*
96120404-346
WB WT AE

pension
-325 -325
-324


84 201122
FAR/FAS CF75-85 and XF, BAM 3b.
1700
*
96120404-347
WB WT AE

3
pension
-325 -325
-324

900
96120404-348
WB WT AE

pension
-325 -325 -325

201122 85
1400 1050 1050
22032802-020
WB WT AE
3 Wheelbase [m] Rear axle sus-

pension
I II III
-326 -326 -326
3.12 FAG CF
FAG CF75-85, BAM 1.
400
*
96120404-350
WT
WB AE

pension
-325
-324 -324


86 201122
FAG CF75-85, BAM 2.
* 1700
96120404-351
WT
WB AE

3
pension
-325
-324 -324

FAG CF75-85, BAM 3a.
1700
*
96120404-352
WT
WB AE

pension
-325 -325
-324

201122 87
FAG CF75-85, BAM 3b.
1700
*
96120404-353
WT
WB AE

pension
-325 -325
-324

FAG CF75-85, BAM 4.
900
96120404-348
WB WT AE

pension
-325
-324 -324


88 201122
FAG CF75-85, BAM 5.
1400 1050 1050
22032802-019
WT
WB AE

pension
I II III
3
-326 -326 -326
3.13 FAN LF
FAN LF55, BAM1.
* 1700
G000421
WB AE

pension
G000426
-325 -325
4.20 air 4 1 4
4.50 air 5 1 4
4.80 air 5 1 5
5.30 air 6 1 5
201122 89
FAN LF55, BAM 2.
* 1700
G000455
WB WT AE
3
pension
G000426 G000426
-325
4.20 air 2 2 4
4.50 air 2 3 4
4.80 air 2 3 5
5.30 air 2 4 5
(1) first and second consoles are always spring loaded, see 3.3: "First attachment point"

90 201122
FAN LF55, BAM 3.
* 1700
G000442
WB WT AE
3
pension
G000426
-325 -325
3.80 air 2 3 4
4.20 air 3 2 4
4.50 air 3 3 4
4.80 air 4 2 5
5.35 air 5 2 5
FAN LF55, BAM 4.
900
96120404-348
WB WT AE

pension
-325 -325 -325
4.20 air 4 1 4
4.50 air 5 1 4
4.80 air 5 1 5
5.30 air 6 1 5
201122 91
FAN LF55, BAM 5.
1400 1050 1050
22032802-020
WB WT AE
3 Wheelbase [m] Rear axle sus-

pension
I II III
-326 -326 -326
All air 1 2 2
3.14 FAN CF AND XF
FAN CF75-85 and XF, BAM1.
400
*
96120404-344
WB WT AE

pension
-325
-324 -324
4.20 air 4 1 3
4.40 air 4 1 3
4.80 air 5 1 3
6.10 air 7 1 4
6.65 air 8 1 4

92 201122
FAN CF75-85 and XF, BAM 2.
* 1700
96120404-345
WB WT AE

3
pension
-325
-324 -324
4.20 air 5 2 3
4.40 air 5 3 3
4.80 air 5 3 3
6.10 air 5 4 4
6.65 air 5 5 4
FAN CF75-85 and XF, BAM 3a.
1700
*
96120404-346
WB WT AE

pension
-325 -325
-324
4.20 air 3 4 3
4.40 air 3 4 3
4.80 air 4 4 4
6.10 air 5 4 4
6.65 air 6 4 5
201122 93
FAN CF75-85 and XF, BAM 3b.
1700
*
96120404-347
WB WT AE

pension
-325 -325
-324
4.20 air 3 2 2
4.40 air 3 2 2
4.80 air 4 2 2
6.10 air 5 2 2
6.65 air 6 2 3
900
96120404-348
WB WT AE

pension
-325 -325 -325
4.20 air 6 3 2
4.40 air 6/7 3 3
4.80 air 7 3 4
6.10 air 8 3 4
6.65 air 8 3 4

94 201122
1400 1050 1050
22032802-020
WB WT AE

pension
I II III
3
-326 -326 -326
All air 1 2 2
3.15 FAT CF AND XF
FAT CF75-85 and XF, BAM 1.
400
*
96120404-356
WT
WB AE

pension
-325
-324 -324
4.05 Leaf + air 4 1 3

4.55 Leaf + air 4 1 3
5.00 Leaf + air 5 1 3
5.55 Leaf + air 6 1 3
201122 95
*
1700
96120404-357
WT
WB AE

pension
-325
-324 -324
4.05 Leaf + air 5 1 3

4.55 Leaf + air 5 1 3
5.00 Leaf + air 5 2 3
5.55 Leaf + air 5 2 3
FAT CF75-85 and XF, BAM 3a.
1700
*
96120404-358
WT
WB AE

pension
-325 -325
-324
4.05 Leaf + air 3 5 4

4.55 Leaf + air 3 5 4
5.00 Leaf + air 4 5 4
5.55 Leaf + air 5 5 4

96 201122
900
96120404-359
WT
WB AE

pension
I II III
3
-325 -325 -325
4.05 Leaf + air 8 3 4

4.55 Leaf + air 8 3 4
5.00 Leaf + air 9 3 4
5.55 Leaf + air 9 3 4
1400 1050 1050
22032802-022
WT
WB AE

pension
-326 -326 -326
All Leaf + air 1 2 2
201122 97
3.16 FAC/FAX CF
FAC/FAX CF85, BAM 2.
* 1700
WD
WB WT AE
3 * See 3.3: "First attachment point".

97111801-011

pension
-325
-324 -324

FAC/FAX CF85, BAM 3a.
1700
*
WD
WB WT AE
97111801-008

pension
-325 -325
-324


98 201122
FAC/FAX CF85, BAM 4.
900
WD
WB WT AE
97111801-010

pension
I II III 3
-325 -325 -325

FAC/FAX CF 85, BAM 5.
1400 1050 1050
22032802-017
WD
WB WT AE

pension
-326 -326 -326
201122 99
3.17 FAD CF AND XF
FAD CF75 - 85 and XF, BAM 2.
* 1700
96120404-361
WD WT
3
WB AE

pension
-325
-324 -324
5.05 Leaf + air 5 2 2

5.70 Leaf + air 5 3 2/3
7.10 Leaf + air 5 4 4
FAD CF75 - 85 and XF, BAM 3a.
1700
*
96120404-362
WD WT
WB AE

pension
-325 -325
-324
5.05 Leaf + air 4 6 4/5

5.70 Leaf + air 5 6 4/5
7.10 Leaf + air 5 7 5

100 201122
900
96120404-363
WD WT
WB AE

pension
I II III
3
-325 -325 -325
5.05 Leaf + air 8 2 4

5.70 Leaf + air 9 2 4
7.10 Leaf + air 9 2 4
1400 1050 1050
22032802-021
WD WT
WB AE

pension
-326 -326 -326
All Leaf + air 2 2 2
201122 101
3.18 FAK CF AND XF
FAK CF85 and XF, BAM 2.
* 1700
96120404-345
WB WT AE
3 * See 3.3: "First attachment point".

pension
-325
-324 -324
4.70 Air 5 2 2
5.30 Air 5 3 2
FAK CF85 and XF, BAM 3a.
1700
*
96120404-346
WB WT AE

pension
-325 -325
-324
4.70 Air 4 6 4/5

5.30 Air 5 6 4/5

102 201122
900
96120404-348
WB WT AE

pension
I II III
3
-325 -325 -325
4.70 Air 9 3 4
5.30 Air 10 3 4
1400 1050 1050
22032802-022
WT
WB AE

pension
-326 -326 -326
All Air 2 2 2
201122 103

104 201122
Superstructures
SUPERSTRUCTURES
Superstructures
Page Date
4.1 Fixed body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 201122
4.2 Body with tail lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 201122
4.3 Vehicle loading cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 201122
4.4 Tipper bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 201122
4.5 Tankers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 201122
4.6 Concrete mixers and concrete pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 201122
4.7 Public utility vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 201122
4.8 Front mounted equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 201122
4.9 TRACTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 201122
201122 105
Superstructures

106 201122
Superstructures
4. SUPERSTRUCTURES
4.1 FIXED BODY
For all the superstructures described in this

section, also see section 3: "General
information on superstructures".
Body attachment method BAM 1 is generally
sufficient for the mounting of a fixed body or
demountable body with sub-frame.
The tie rods must be attached to the chassis side
members, if possible near or against the cross
members. At least one attachment plate must
always be fitted between the front and rear spring
brackets of the rear axle(s).
A sub-frame is not necessary but can be
G000276
4
fitted, in order to obtain the required wheel Fixed body with sub-frame, BAM 1
clearance. Also see the sections
dimensions" and 2.14: "Wheel clearance".
Minimum requirement is the fitting on the chassis
of a strip or angle brace, to which the cross
members of the body can be welded. For the
mounting of box bodies without a sub-frame
DAF recommends the fitting of a number of extra 96120404-404
cross members in the floor of the body above or Tie rod mounting, body without sub-frame (with
as close as possible to the vehicle axles. As a mounting strip)
result of chassis flexing, additional pulling and
pushing forces are exerted on the floor of the
body. However, the bodybuilder remains at all
times responsible for the soundness of a
construction and the strength of the self-
supporting bodywork.
96120404-405
Attachment plate, body without sub-frame (with

mounting strip)
(High-)volume body
For (high-)volume applications DAF has various
'Low-Deck' rigid truck chassis in its range with a
low frame (260 mm with continuous inner
reinforcement flitches). If required, some of these
vehicles - for instance, FA/S/R Low-Deck - can be
specified with lower suspension, in combination
with speed-dependent height control and tyre
compression compensation. These chassis
require additional strength and/or stiffness of the
superstructure. G000277
Fixed volume body with a sub-frame, BAM 3a
201122 107
Superstructures
A (semi-)self-supporting fixed or demountable

body, with or without a sub-frame, can be
mounted on these chassis. The superstructure
should be attached in accordance with body
attachment method BAM 1 or BAM 3a. The
choice is determined by the moment of inertia of
the sub-frame or the floor of the fixed body. The
same applies to the minimum required moment of
inertia of the floor of demountable bodies. For sub
frame dimensions see table.
Attachment according to BAM 1
Min. required body/sub-frame dimensions for chassis with 192 mm and 260 mm
high side members with continuous inner reinforcement flitches
Wheelbase Chassis rear Side member Sub frame profile dimensions; st52 [mm]
[m] overhang (AE) section
4
FA (4x2) FAR/S (6x2)
[m] (A)
WB > 5.40 - 192x66.5x4.5
AE 0.5 x WB U 180x60x6 not applicable
6.00 (2) + 180x47/62x4
260x75x6 + - U 200x70x7
WB 5.00 AE 0.6 x WB
245x65x5
260x75x6 +
WB 5.40 (1) AE 0.5 x WB U 100x60x6 not applicable
246x60x5
260x75x7 +
WB 5.90 AE 0.6 x WB U 80x50x6 U 220x80x8
245x65x5
WB 7.30 (1) 260x75x6 + U 180x60x6
AE 0.5 x WB not applicable
246x60x5
(1) FA LF45/55 and CF65 chassis. 260 mm high chassis longitudinal with continuous inner reinforcement profile up to first spring
hanger bracket of the rear axle.
(2) FA LF45
Attachment according to BAM 3a

Min. required body/sub-frame dimensions for chassis with 192 mm and 260 mm
high side members with continuous inner reinforcement flitches
Wheelbase Chassis rear Side member Sub frame profile dimensions; st52 [mm]
[m] overhang (AE) section FA (4x2) FAR/S (6x2)
[m] (A)
WB > 5.40 - 192x66.5x4.5
AE 0.6 x WB U 80x50x6 not applicable
6.00 (2) + 180x47/62x4
AE 0.6 x WB 260x75x7 + - U 100x65x6
WB 5.00
245x65x5
WB 5.40 260x75x6 +
(1) AE 0.6 x WB U 80x50x6 not applicable
246x60x5
260x75x7 +
WB 5.90 AE 0.6 x WB U 80x50x6 U 120x60x6
245x65x5
WB 7.30 260x75x6 +
(1) AE 0.6 x WB U 140x60x6 not applicable
246x60x5
(1) FA LF45/55 and CF65 chassis. 260 mm high chassis longitudinal with continuous inner reinforcement profile up to first spring
hanger bracket of the rear axle.
(2) FA LF45

108 201122
Superstructures
Wheel clearance at the rear

On versions with speed-dependent height control
and tyre compression compensation, the
minimum clearance required above the tyres of
the driven axle has been reduced to 10 mm with
the springs bottoming (metal to metal). Also see
section 2.14: "Wheel clearance".
Body with twist-locks
When mounting (demountable) bodies without
sub-frame, with twist-locks, directly to the vehicle
chassis, fit the twist-locks to the side of the
chassis frame, using at least 6 M16 flange bolts
for each of them.
For (self-supporting) demountable bodies which
bear evenly on the chassis over its entire length,
there are no specific requirements with respect to
the position of the twist-locks, and the dimensions
96120404-406
Attachment of twist locks

4
given below may be departed from.
The twist-lock bracket should be fitted near a
chassis cross member. If this is impossible, you
are referred to section 2.6: "Attachment of
However, if a demountable body is supported at
max. max.
only a few points, the twist-lock positions given A 1050
below must be adhered to. If the support points 22032802-012
are in other positions, e.g. as in the case of ISO
containers, DAF should be contacted.
Position of the twist locks:
A: 1000 (LF)
1400 (CF - XF)
max. max.
For the mounting of (demountable) bodies with A 1300
sub-frame in which the twist-locks are included, 22032802-023
BAM 1 is specified in most cases (without tail lift). Position of the twist locks
Make sure that demountable bodies rest on
the sub-frame or the chassis members, but in
no case directly on the twist-locks!
4.2 BODY WITH TAIL LIFT
Body with tail lift

The next table gives the minimum dimensions to
be adhered to for sub-frames of bodies with tail
lifts with capacities up to 2000 kg depending on
the type of vehicle, the wheelbase, the chassis
dimensions and the rear overhang length. For
tail lifts with a higher capacity than specified
in the table, DAF should be contacted. Tail lifts
with a capacity higher than 2500 kg always
require the fitting of vehicle support legs to b used
during loading and unloading. G000278
201122 109
Superstructures
For the mounting of the sub-frame for a

superstructure with tail lift, BAM 3b (CF75-85)
or BAM3 (LF / CF65) is specified in most
cases.
If according to DAF a sub-frame is not required
for structural strength or because of deflection
(see note 5)), a sub-frame in accordance wit BAM
1 may still be fitted, for example because of the
desired wheel clearance.
Take note of the effect of the tail lift on the vehicle
weight distribution in fully laden and partly laden
conditions. If necessary, refer to th TOPEC
calculations for axle load distribution of the partly
laden vehicle.
4 Attachment of the tail lift

With this type of superstructure, the tail lift
attachment can also be used to attach the sub-
frame to the chassis. In that case, the tail lift is
bolted to the chassis frame and bolted or welded
to the sub-frame.
96120404-409
Attachment of the tail lift in accordance with BAM

3b
Superstructure with post type tail lift

A post type tail lift must always be fitted to the
body. Consult the supplier of the post type tail lift
for the correct mounting instructions.
Sub-frame dimensions
The following table gives an overview of the

minimum dimensions required for sub-frames.

110 201122
Superstructures
Minimum sub-frame dimensions for tail lifts with capacities up to 2000 kg (1)
Vehicle type WB Chassis sections Maximum AE (5) Sub-frame (2)
[m] in rear overhang sections
4,30 U 120x60x6
FA LF45 (3) 192x66.5 x4.5
5,40 U 140x60x6
FA LF45 (4) 4,30 U 120x60x6
12 tonnes GVM 192x66.5x4.5+180x62x4
5,40 U 140x60x6
0.50xWB
4,20 U 80x60x6
FA LF55 5,35 U 120x60x6
260x75x6
FA CF65 6,30 U 160x60x6
7,30 U 180x60x6
FAN LF55 4,20
5,35
260x75x6 0.55xWB
U 180x60x6
U 200x60x6
4
260x75x7 U 160x60x6
4,90
310x75x7 U 80x60x6
FA CF75-85 260x75x7 U 160x60x6
0.50xWB
FA XF 5,70 310x75x7 U 100x65x6
260x75x7 + 245x65x5 U 100x65x6
6,90 310x75x7 U 120x60x6
5,35 310x75x7 + 295x65x5 U 80x60x6
FAG CF75-85 0.40xWB
6,60 310x75x7 + 295x65x5 U 140x60x6
260x75x7 + 245x65x5 U 100x60x6
3,80
310x75x7 U 160x60x6
FAS/R CF75 5,50 310x75x7 U 200x60x6
FAS/R CF85 4,20 310x75x7 + 295x65x5 U 100x65x6
FAS/R XF 0.55xWB
FAN CF75-85 4,80 260x75x7 + 245x65x5 U 180x60x6
FAN XF 5,30 310x75x7 + 295x65x5 U 160x60x6
5,90 260x75x7 + 245x65x5 U 200x60x6
6,10 310x75x7 + 295x65x5 U 200x60x6
(1) Consult DAF for tail lifts with a higher capacity, and for other combinations not mentioned in this overview.
(2) The determination of the sub-frame dimensions is based on the use of Steel 37 (Fe 360 B according to EN10025).
(3) Tail lift capacity 1000 kg.
(4) Tail lift capacity 1500 kg.
(5) Body length and AE to be determined on the basis of axle load calculation; consult TOPEC.
201122 111
Superstructures
WARNING! Vehicle stability during

operation of any superstructure
system is the responsibility of the
bodybuilder and the user. The user
should at all times make sure that
vehicle stability is guaranteed. It is
therefore important that clear
instructions for use of the
superstructure should be provided
by the bodybuilder on or supplied
with the vehicle.
For more information see:
1.3: "Verificaton of superstructure"
4.3 VEHICLE LOADING CRANES

4 The attachment method for a vehicle loading
crane depends upon the position of the crane:
- crane immediately behind cab: BAM 2, or
- crane at rear end of chassis: BAM 3a. or
BAM 3 (LF and CF65 series)
- crane in combination with more than 2 crane
supports: BAM 4.
Consult DAF for any position other than the
two above-mentioned crane positions, for
instance for cranes mounted amidships.
Vehicle series Side mem- Flitch dimen- Max. crane capacity Number of
ber dimensions crane sup-
Crane behind Crane at rear
sions [mm] cab. (1) [kNm] ports
overhang (1)
[mm]
[kNm]
FA LF45 192x66x4,5 (180x62x4,0) 100 75
(2)
FA CF65 260x75x6,0 (245x60x5,0)

FA / FAN LF55 (2)
150 100 2
FA CF75-85 260x75x7,0 -
FA XF
310x75x7,0 (295x65x5,0) 200 150
(2)
FAS/R FAG 260x75x7,0 245x65x5,0 250 170

FAN CF75-85 310x75x7,0 -
XF 2/4
310x75x7,0 295x65x5,0 300 200
310x75x8,5 292x65x8,5
FAC FAD 310x75x6,0 295x65x5,0
FAK FAX
310x75x7,0 295x65x5,0 400 250 4
CF85
XF 310x75x8,5 292x65x8,5
(1) Position of the crane; crane behind the cab, see Graph A, and crane at the rear overhang, see Graph B.
(2) Dependent of vehicle layout, see chassis drawing.

112 201122
Superstructures
Attachment of the crane base

The number of attachment bolts under the crane
base depends on the attachment method and the
maximum capacity of the crane. It should always
be determined by and under the responsibility of
the supplier of the crane. In any case, the part of
the sub-frame on which the vehicle loading crane
is to be mounted, must be attached to the chassis
frame of the vehicle with large attachment plates
and flange bolts.
96120404-411
Attachment of the crane base
Sub-frame dimensions 4
Always use a sub-frame when mounting a crane
superstructure on a chassis frame. For the
dimensions of the required sub-frame, refer to
one of the two graphs shown below. The
following information will help you to choose the
applicable graph:
The 2 graphs (A and B) can be used to determine
the sub-frame dimensions as follows. Graph A:
from a crane capacity of, for instance, 140 kNm,
draw an imaginary horizontal line to the right until
it crosses the vertical line of the side member, for max.
1700* 20061604-412
instance 260x75x6 (LF55). The reading for the

sub-frame dimensions is box section 160x80x8.
The dimensions of the chassis members
(possibly with flitches) in the indicated critical
zones (*; see figure) of the chassis can now be
read from the bodybuilders' drawings.
These drawings are available from DAF and they
can be found as digital files on the TOPEC CD-
ROM and the internet (www.daf.com).
Graph A: Crane immediately behind cab AE

Sub-frame material Fe 510 D, accord- 20061604-413 1700*
ing to EN 10025 (St 52-3 according to Critical zones for mounting of cranes
DIN 17100).
Graph B: Crane at rear end of chassis

Sub-frame material Fe 510 D, accord-
ing to EN 10025 (St 52-3 according to
DIN 17100).
Torsional stability
If a vehicle loading crane is fitted at the rear end
of the chassis, a torsional stiffener must be
provided in the rear overhang. The torsional
stiffening may be provided by the superstructure
itself or by a sub-frame stiffener; also see
'Torsional stability of the sub-frame' in section
3.1: "Superstructure with sub-frame". The
stability is determined by the vehicle, the load, the
201122 113
Superstructures
position of the support legs and the structure of

the surface under the support legs. Vehicles
with front leaf / rear air-suspension or full air-
suspension. During crane operation; deflating
the suspension of the vehicle and than lifting the
chassis using the crane support legs can lead to
damage to the air bellows. Therefore the ECAS
air-suspension should be equipped with the
function to deflate the air-suspension to low
residual pressure to protect the air-bellows. For
installation of this function, please contact DAF
Sales Engineering.
Vehicle stability during operation of any
the bodybuilder and the user. The user should
at all times make sure that vehicle stability is
4 guaranteed. It is therefore important that clear
should be provided on or supplied with the
vehicle.
Graph A
Minimum sub-frame dimensions for:
- crane immediately behind the cab,
- sub-frame material Fe 510 D.

114 201122
Superstructures
L (m)
G (kN)
2)
4
x
5 / 62
4, 47 6 6 5 5 5
x 5 5
5
x x x 7 x 7 x x
65 5 x 8,
66
,
18
0 75 x 75 x 65 65 x 6 5
x
x + x 75 x 75 x x 6 x 6
2 5 0
26 0 x
0 x
31 10 24
5
24
5 29 6 x
19 4, + 9 29
3
x 26 3 7
+
7
+ 6 +2 +
,5 x
4
x x 7 5
66 75 75 75 x 8,
x x 5 x
2 0
x
0
x
1 0 x7 5
19 26 31 3 10 x
7
3 0
31 Box profile
260x140x8
400
250x100x8
380
360 220x120x8
340
320 200x80x8
300 180x80x8
280
160x80x8
260
140x70x6
240 120x60x6
220 100x60x6
80x60x5
200
180
160
L
140
120
G 100
80 3)
GxL (kNm)
60
1)
40
G000304 Wx
1. Vehicle loading cranes, see section 4.3.
2. Chassis dimensions, see section
dimensions".
3. Superstructure with sub-frame, see
section 3.1: "Superstructure with sub-
frame".
Graph B
Minimum sub-frame dimensions for:
- crane at rear end of chassis,
- sub-frame material Fe 510 D.
201122 115
Superstructures
L (m)
G (kN)
2)
4
x
/ 62
,5 47 6 6 5 5 5 5
x4 x x 7 x 7 x x x 5 8,
6,
5 0 75 x 75 x 65 65 65 x x
18 x 75 x 75 x x x 65 6 5
x6 + 0 0 x 5 5 6 x x
19
2
4,
5 26 0 x 31 10 24 24 29 6 3
26 + + + 9
6 +2 29
4
x 3 7 7 +
,5 x x x 7 5
66 75 75 75 x 8,
x x x x 75 x
2 0 5
19 260 31
0
31 10
x
x
7
3 0
31
Box profile
250x100x8
220x120x8
200x80x8
250
180x80x8
225 160x80x8
140x70x6
200
120x60x6
100x60x6
175 80x60x5
150
L 125
100
G
75
3)
GxL (kNm)
1) 50
G000303 Wx
1. Vehicle loading cranes, see section 4.3.
2. Chassis dimensions, see section
dimensions".
3. Superstructure with sub-frame, see
section 3.1: "Superstructure with sub-
frame".

116 201122
Superstructures
Recovery vehicles and hydraulic platforms

The superstructure should always be attached to
the chassis with a sub-frame or a self-supporting
("pontoon-type") sub-frame construction. If the
latter type is used, it is generally not possible to
provide a rigid attachment because of the
unequal distribution of strength and stiffness
between the chassis and sub-frame and
consequently the location of the neutral line of the
assembly. If the vehicle chassis frame has to
contribute to the strength of the superstructure,
DAF should be contacted.
20061604-418
Recovery vehicle, BAM 4
20061604-419
Hydraulic platform with 'pontoon-type' sub-frame,

BAM 1
Vehicles with front leaf / rear air-suspension

or full air-suspension
During crane operation; deflating the suspension
of the vehicle and than lifting the chassis using
the crane support legs can lead to damage to the
air bellows. Therefore the ECAS air-suspension
should be equipped with the function to deflate
the air-suspension to low residual pressure to
protect the air-bellows. For installation of this
function, please contact DAF Sales Engineering.
with the vehicle.
201122 117
Superstructures
4.4 TIPPER BODIES
Attachment methods for tipper bodies

Tipper with front-end ram Version 1 BAM 3a
Tipper with central ram Version 2 BAM 3a
Three-way tipper Version 3 BAM 4 or BAM3a
Tipping demountable body Version 4 BAM 4
For the mounting of tipper bodies, the following

general guidelines always apply:
- Tipper bodies should preferably be fitted to
chassis with 310 mm high side members.
4 Depending on the application, tipper bodies

may, however, be fitted to chassis with 192
1
or 260 mm high side members; however, in

such cases the sub-frame will have to be of
a heavier design than when a chassis with
A B
310 mm high side members is used. G000300
- Vehicles with front leaf / rear air-
suspension or full air-suspension. During Tipper with front-end ram
tipping or body swop for demountables, the
air suspension should be lowered to bump-
stop. This option can be activated 2
automatically or manual, please contact DAF
Sales Engineering.
- It is not permitted to mount tipper bodies on
the FAN LF55, FAR chassis (6x2 vehicles B
with single wheels on the trailing axle) and G000299
the FAX chassis (8x2 vehicles with single Tipper with central ram
wheels on the trailing axle), because this
type of vehicles was not developed for this
application. If, for a certain application, a
tipper body must be used on such chassis, 3
consultation with DAF is required, on the one
hand for verification and on the other to be
certain that the conditions set can be met.
A B
In the table you will find the sub-frame data for G000298
various tipper versions and also the maximum Three-way tipper
distance (B) from pivot point to rear axle.
B
G000297

118 201122
Superstructures
Sub-frame dimensions
Data for tipper bodies and sub-frames
Vehicle GVM WB Chassis section Tipper A B Wx,min (1)
type max. [m] near rear axle type Max. Max. [cm3]
[tonne] [mm] [mm] [mm]
FA LF45 7.5-12 3.65 192x66,5x4.5 1,-,-,- 1000 1050 (2)
-,2,3,4 1000 1050 41.0

(2)
FA LF55 13-18 4.30 260x75x6 1,-,-,- 1000 1200
-,2,3,4 1000 1200 41.0
FA CF65 19 4.45 260x75x6 1,-,-,- 1200 1050 61.0
-,2-3-4 1200 1050 86.0
FA CF65 20.5 4.90 310x75x7 1,2,3,4 1200 1050 26.5
FA CF75-85
FA XF
1,2,-,- 1200 1300 41.0 4
FA CF65 20.5 4.90 260x75x7 1,2,3,4 1200 1050 61.0
FA CF75-85 1,2,-,- 1200 1300 86.0
FA XF
FAG CF75-85 28 5.90 310x75x7+ 1,2,3,4 1200 1050 85.0
295x65x5
1,2,-,-, 1200 1300 115.0
FAS CF75-85 28 4.20 310x75x7 1,2,3,4 1200 650 116.0
FAS XF 1,2,-,- 1200 800 (4) 150.0
FAN CF75-85
FAS CF75-85 28 4.80 310x75x7 + 1,2,3,4 1200 650 26.5
FAS XF 295x65x5
1,2,-,- 1200 800 (4) 41.0
FAN CF75-85
FAT CF75-85 28 5.55 310x75x7 + 1,2,3,4 1200 650 85.0
FAT XF 295x65x5 (3)
1,2,-,- 1200 800 115.0
FAT CF85 33 5.55 310x75x8.5 + 1,2,3,4 1200 650 85.0
FAT XF 292x65x8.5 (3)
1,2,-,- 1200 800 115.0
(6)
FAC CF85 34 5.70 310x75x7 + 1,2,3,4 1200 650 85.0
295x65x5
1,2,-,- 1200 800 (3) 115.0
(6)
FAC CF85 37 6.20 310x75x8.5 + 1,2,3,4 1200 650 85.0
292x65x8.5 (3)
1,2,-,- 1200 800 115.0
(6)
FAD CF85 34 6.40 310x75x7 + 1,2,3,4 1200 650 85.0
FAD XF 295x65x5
1,2,-,- 1200 800 (3) 115.0
(6)
FAD CF85 37 6.40 310x75x8.5 + 1,2,3,4 1200 650 85.0
FAD XF 292x65x8.5 (3)
1,2,-,- 1200 800 115.0
FAD CF85 44 (6) 6.40 310x75x8.5 + 1,2,3,4 1200 650 250
FAD XF 292x65x8.5 (3)
1,2,-,- 1200 800 285
(6) (5)
FAK XF 35.5 5.30 310x75x7 + 1,2,3,4 1200 1000 160
295x65x5
(1) Minimum required moment of resistance of one sub-frame side member.

(2) A sub-frame is not required for chassis strength or because of deflection, but can be mounted, for instance, to obtain sufficient
wheel clearance.
(3) Rear axles airsuspension B Max. is 1000 mm.
(4) FAS rear axles airsuspension B Max. is 1000 mm.
(5) Rear axles airsuspension.
(6) Independent chassis support in the rear overhang is recommended for increased stability during tipping operation.
201122 119
Superstructures
Attachment of ram and tipping pivot

Both the front-end ram and the central ram
should be attached in the sub-frame. Allowance
should be made for the space required for
driveline movements. The tipping pivot at the rear
of the tipper body should be attached to the sub-
frame.
96120404-424
4 Attachment of the front-end ram
20061604-425
Tipper with front-end ram
Attachment of guide plate

The sub-frame should be provided with guide
plates at the front end of the tipper body to
prevent lateral movement of the body. To prevent
torsion in the sub-frame, it is recommended to fit
a cross member in the sub-frame here, too.
96120404-426
Guide plate
20061604-427
Tipper with central ram

120 201122
Superstructures
Attachment of ball pivot (three-way tipper)

The tipper body pivot should be attached to the
sub-frame. Braces can be bolted into position
and, if they are attached to the sub-frame, they
will also serve as retainer plates.
96120404-428
Attachment of ball pivot
4
20061604-429
Three-way tipper
Attachment of the demounting system

Irrespective of the type of system, the
demounting system should be attached to the
sub-frame. If the sub-frame of the demounting
system is wider than the vehicle chassis frame,
consoles can be used to mount the demounting
system. The top of the consoles must be flush
with the top of the chassis frame. If DAF consoles 96120404-430
are used for this purpose, the locating edge at the Attachment of sub-frame with console
top of their rear wall should be removed. The
consoles can be welded to the sub-frame and
attached to the chassis with flange bolts; also see
section 3.2: "BAM's - body attachment methods".
20061604-431
Stability by torsional stiffeners

In all cases, torsional stiffeners should be fitted in
the sub-frame rear overhang; see: 'Stability by
torsional stiffening of the sub-frame' in section
3.1: "Superstructure with sub-frame". Stability
during tipping depends on a number of factors
and is positively influenced by:
- greater rigidity in the chassis (rear overhang)
and body,
- ram(s) positioned as far as possible to the
front (front-end ram),
201122 121
Superstructures
- shortest possible rear overhang and

favourable position of tipping pivot,
- Independent chassis support in the rear
overhang. This chassis support can be fitted
at the rearmost axle, however the axle load
must not exceed twice the maximum
technical axle load. Alternative the chassis
support can be fitted at the end off the
chassis and supporting on ground level.
- tipping stabiliser (scissors construction)
between body and chassis,
- skilled operation and firm level surface for
the vehicle to stand on.
Vehicle stability during operation of any
the bodybuilder and the user. The user should
4 at all times make sure that vehicle stability is
guaranteed. It is therefore important that clear
should be provided by the bodybuilder on or
supplied with the vehicle.
For more information see: 1.3: "Verificaton of
superstructure"
4.5 TANKERS
General
For torsionally rigid (self-supporting) body
constructions, including tanker superstructures,
console attachment can be opted for. However,
at certain vehicle speeds and under certain
conditions, such an attachment may lead to
annoying bending vibrations in the frame, which
may have a highly adverse effect on the driving
comfort. It is therefore important not to exceed
the indicated maximum positions of attachment
points on the frame.
In chapter 3 is shown how many consoles per
vehicle type and chassis segment are required. In
the event that less consoles per segment are
used, these consoles must be lengthened to have
a longer contact surface with the longitudinal. The
chassis load by the tanker support must be in
relation with the console dimension and
attachment.
The console attachment introduces a local
vertical point load which results in local
stresslevel in the chassis. Therefore the chassis
longitudinal must be reinforced with an innerliner,
in case there is no innerliner reinforcement a
subframe must be mounted.
The centre of gravity of the tanker body must be
as low as possible, in order to decrease the risc
for vehicle verturning.

122 201122
Superstructures
On trucks with tanker superstructures which are

to transport liquid goods, the need for lengthways
and crossways baffles must be considered.
The bodybuilder is free to make a choice from
the undermentioned body attachments,
depending on which construction (according
to his own insights and experience) is most
suitable for the superstructure in question. In
all cases, the bodybuilder remains
responsible for ensuring that the tank
construction is sufficiently strong for the
selected attachment and/or mounting method
of the tanker body.
Tanker body with sub-frame
Body attachment method BAM 1 should be
used for a tanker body with sub-frame. Take care
that the load is evenly distributed over the sub-
4
frame, by using sufficient tank brackets. Also see
the figure opposite.
A: 1000 (LF)
1400 (CF - XF)
20061604-432
Body with sub-frame
max. max.
A 600
22032802-015
Positions of superstructure attachment points
Tanker body on consoles (with or without

onboard weighing system)
The console attachment introduces a local
vertical point load which results in local stress in
the chassis. Therefore the chassis longitudinal
must be reinforced with an innerliner, in case
there is no innerliner reinforcement a subframe
must be mounted. The console attachment might
also introduce lateral torsion to the chassis
longitudinal. To eliminate this lateral torsion a
cross member must be present. Check section
consoles in 3.2: "BAM's - body attachment
methods".
201122 123
Superstructures
Console attachment, fixed

Body attachment method BAM 5 is used for
this. Fixed attachment of the tanker
superstructure is particularly suitable for two-axle
vehicles. Spacer bushes with a length of at least
30 mm should be used (see section 3.4: "Type of
superstructure/BAM matrix").
A: 1000 (LF)
1400 (CF - XF)
20061604-434
Console attachment
4
max. max. max.
A 1050 1050
22032802-014
Positions of consoles on two-axle vehicles
Console attachment, semi-flexible

Bodyattachment method BAM 5 is used for this.
Consoles with pressure springs are used at the
front. Spring pre-tension should be 3 kN per
spring. In relation with a vertical static console
load of 20 kN two pressure springs should be
used,the pre-tension of each spring should be 3
kN.The minimum spring rate per spring is 225 N/
mm. Fixed superstructure-to- console-
attachment is used at the rear. For this, use
spacer bushes with a length of at least 30 mm
(see section 3.4: "Type of superstructure/BAM
matrix").
96120404-436
Console with pressure springs
96120404-437
Console with fixed attachment

124 201122
Superstructures
Console attachment, all-flexible

this. Consoles with pressure springs are used at
both front and rear. At the rear, rubbers are
added. These rubbers must always rest directly
on the console and may never be placed on, for
example, spacers. The rubbers used must not be
compressed more than 1 mm under a static load.
The tank brackets on consoles with pressure
springs and rubber must have a provision for
fixation of the superstructure in the longitudinal
and transverse directions.
A: 1000 (LF)
1400 (CF - XF) 96120404-438
Console with springs and rubber
max. max. max.

A 1050 1050
22032802-013
Position of consoles on multi-axle vehicles
201122 125
Superstructures
Console attachment, three-point

(two-axle vehicles)
Body attachment method BAM 5is used for this.
The front mounting point of the tank is a spring-
loaded swinging unit. In relation with a vertical
static console load of 20 kN per side aspecified
spring tension can be seen from the graph. With
a given dimension 'a', representing the distance
between the console springs, the spring tension
should be 'P'.
20061604-440
The consoles placed in front of the rear axle have
pressure springs. Those placed behind the rear Three-point attachment on two-axle vehicles
axle have fixed attachment.
A: 1000 (LF)
1400 (CF - XF)
4
max. max. max.
A 1050 1050
22032802-014
Position of consoles
96120404-441
Oscillating unit
P N/mm
800
600 640
400 360
200 240
0
400 800 a mm
200 600 1000
96120404-442
Graph

126 201122
Superstructures
Console attachment, three-point

(multi-axle vehicles)
this. The front mounting point is a tank bracket
attached with rubbers and springs to a cross
member resting on consoles.
The spring force of the machine rubbers used
should be:
- vertical: 6 + 0.5 kN/mm, 20061604-443
- horizontal: 7 + 0.5 kN/mm. Three-point attachment on multi-axle vehicles
The consoles placed in front of the rear axle
centre have pressure springs. Those placed
behind the rear axle have fixed attachment.
A: 1000 (LF)
1400 (CF - XF)
4
max. max. max.
WARNING! Operation of any A 1050 1050
superstructure system is the 22032802-013
responsibility of the bodybuilder and
the user. It is therefore important Positions of consoles on multi-axle vehicles
that clear instructions for use of the
400 - 650 mm
with the vehicle.
96120404-444
Front mounting
96120404-445
Mounting of machine rubber
201122 127
Superstructures
4.6 CONCRETE MIXERS AND

CONCRETE PUMPS
A sub-frame should always be used for concrete

mixers, concrete pumps and combined concrete
mixer/pump superstructures. BAM 4 (fully rigid
attachment) should be used for the mounting of
this sub-frame.
Consult DAF for the selection of the sub-frame
section.
20061604-446
Concrete mixer superstructure
20061604-448
Combined concrete mixer/ concrete pump

superstructure
20061604-447
Concrete pump superstructure
Torsional stability
In all cases torsional stiffeners should be fitted in
the rear overhang of the vehicle, in accordance
with 'Torsional stability of the sub-frame' in
section 3.1: "Superstructure with sub-frame".
with the vehicle.

128 201122
Superstructures
4.7 PUBLIC UTILITY VEHICLES
There is a wide range of public utility vehicles of

advanced designs, often regarded as a machine
rather than a piece of transport equipment. The
customary attachment methods for the most
common superstructures are given below. In
case of doubt and/or if you have any technical
questions about necessary vehicle adaptations,
you should contact DAF.
Refuse collector bodies with a compactor at the
rear cause extreme high local load (more than 20061604-449
7500 kg) on the rear overhang of the chassis Refuse collector with sub-frame
frame. To support this high load in lateral
direction and for torsion, the rear end of the
chassis frame must be reinforced with a torsional
cruciform type stiffening. See an example of the
torsional cruciform stiffening in paragraph
4
'stability by torsional stiffening of the sub frame' in
chapter 3.1: "Superstructure with sub-frame".
NOTE: On special request, an
alternative preparation for the FAG
refuse collector chassis can be ordered
at DAF. This FAG frame, with short rear
overhang of 740, 920 or 1000 mm, has
a 310x75x7 mm frame with full chassis
inner reinforcement profile (295x75x5
mm) and is equipped with a heavy duty
cross member at the location of the rear
axle. For this alternative chassis is no
extra subframe or torsional stiffening
required.
G000517
Heavy duty cross member
201122 129
Superstructures
Refuse collector with sub-frame

Body attachment method BAM 1 is used for a
refuse collector superstructure with sub-frame.
Contact DAF if extremely torsionally rigid
constructions are used.
A: 1000 (LF)
1400 (CF - XF)
20061604-450
Console attachment
4
max. max. max.
A 1050 1050
22032802-024
Positions of consoles
Refuse collector on consoles (with or without

onboard weighing system)
The console attachment (BAM5) introduces a
local vertical point load which results in local
stress in the chassis. Therefore the chassis
longitudinal must be reinforced with an innerliner
and on multi-axle vehicles with rear compacter
also a heavy duty cross member is required, in
case that there are no inner reinforcements a
subframe must be mounted. The console
attachment might also introduce lateral torsion to
the chassis longitudinal. To eliminate this lateral
torsion a cross member must be fitted, on the
spot of the console, if not present. Check section
consoles in 3.2: "BAM's - body attachment
methods".

130 201122
Superstructures

this. In relation with a vertical static console load
of 20 kN two pressure springs should be used,
the pre-tension of each spring should be 3 kN.
The minimum spring rate per spring is 225 N/mm.
Consoles with pressure springs are used at the
front. Spring pre-tension should be 3 kN per
spring. Fixed superstructure-to-console-
attachment is used at the rear. For this, use
spacer bushes with a length of at least 30 mm
(see section 3.4: "Type of superstructure/BAM 96120404-452
matrix"). Console with pressure springs
96120404-453
Console with fixed attachment
Refuse collector with rotating drum

Always use a sub-frame and sufficient
attachment plates to mount the superstructure to
the chassis, in accordance with body
attachment method BAM 4.
20061604-455
Refuse collector with rotating drum
Road sweeper
The superstructure should always be fitted with a
sub-frame and in accordance with body
attachment method BAM 1. However, use BAM
3a for a tipping road sweeper superstructure. See
section 4.4: "Tipper bodies" for the required sub-
frame dimensions.
20061604-454
Road sweeper with sub-frame
201122 131
Superstructures
(Tipping) gully emptier

The superstructure should always be fitted with a
sub-frame and in accordance with body
attachment method BAM 1. Use BAM 3afor
tipping superstructure. See section 4.4: "Tipper
bodies" for the required sub-frame dimensions.
Torsional stiffening must be provided in the
chassis rear overhang (in accordance with:
'Torsional stability of the sub-frame' in section
3.1: "Superstructure with sub-frame".
bodybuilder and the user. The user 20061604-456
should at all times make sure that (Tipping) gully emptier

4 therefore important that clear
with the vehicle.
1.3: "Verificaton of superstructure" B
G000296
Position of tipper pivot point
4.8 FRONT MOUNTED EQUIPMENT
The front mounting equipment is commonly fitted

to a mounting plate according DIN 76060. The
vehicle front mounting area has two attachment
points on each chassis side member. The
attachment points at the chassis are:
- Upper part mounted to the towing lugs (one
on each side).
- Lower part mounted to two areas on the
FUP (Front Underrun Protection) beam
frontal surface.
For the upper part; LF and CF65 series, it is
advice to make the fixation with the towing eyes,
there must be no play due to the attachment pins.
CF75-85 and XF, It is advice to take the diameter G001192
dimensions of the fixation pen towing lug, as
supplied in the toolbox, to ensure a rigid and Example of installation of front mounting
close tolerance fit. For the lower part of the front equipment.
mounting construction, the reinforced sections on
the FUP beam must be used. These are the grey
marked areas (see illustration) directly in front of
the left and right hand leaf spring (or air
suspension) hanger bracket. Welding brackets or
studs onto the FUP is not allowed. Due to pulling
forces (i.e. towing) the fixation brackets should
preferably (partly) enclose the FUP beam at the
appointed fixation points.

132 201122
Superstructures
The maximum load and distance allowed for a

construction suspended as illustrated in the
image are:
G
G001266 4
Vehicle series Maximum load [kN] Maximum distance [mm]
LF 45 5 1200
LF 55 15 tonnes 7.5 1200
LF55 and CF65 18/19 tonnes 11.5 1200
CF75 - 85 and XF 15 1200
Snow plough equipment must be equipped with a

feature to reduce the transmission of shock
loadings in to the vehicle frame from striking
obstructions (sprung blades).
NOTE: The front mounting equipment
must comply with regulation ECE R61
and/or directive EC 92/114 external
protection of cabs. For equipment
supporting DIN brackets that have an
integrated towing lug construction the
maximum permitted weight of a towed
vehicle (including load) is 40 tons.
Towing may not take place at an angle
larger than 20 with the vehicle centre
line.
NOTE: All information applies to CF 75

- 85 and XF series produced from
respectively 2009 wk 49 and 2009 wk
21 onwards. Chassis produced before
these dates require a reinforced
support at the front (replacing the
standard) and an extra at the rear of the
FUP beam reaching towards the
chassis main longitudinal. Contact DAF
if in doubt.
201122 133
Superstructures
WARNING! Operation of any

superstructure system is the
the user. It is therefore important
with the vehicle.
4.9 TRACTORS
DAF offers a wide range of tractor models, see
4 chapter 1.9: "DAF vehicle range" for more detail.

These tractor models are specifically designed to
cope with the characteristics, load conditions,
brake forces and road holding performance
related to pulling a semi-trailer. Therefore, only
the dedicated production released tractors are
allowed for this application. A truck chassis
modification into a tractor chassis is only
permitted with a Letter Of No Objection issued by
DAF Trucks.
WARNING! Tractor chassis used in a
tractor/truck application (e.g. car
transporter chassis) are not allowed
in combination with a Vehicle
Stability Control system.
Fifth wheel
DAF tractor chassis are provided with angle
sections for simple fifth wheel mounting. For
optimum utilisation of tractor/semi-trailer
combinations, it is highly important that the
technical specifications of tractor chassis and
semi-trailer should be carefully matched. Only
then will it be possible to determine the correct
position of the fifth wheel (KA dimension) and the
correct fifth wheel mounting height (HK
dimension).
To ensure quality and durability of the entire
construction, only fifth wheels and base
plates released by DAF must be mounted.
Mounting height and freedom of movement
Because of the required freedom of movement
for the semi-trailer, the fifth wheel mounting
height is determined by a number of factors:
- A semi-trailer coupled to a tractor should, in
the straight-ahead position, have enough
freedom of movement to move 6 forwards,
7 backwards and 3 to each side (taken
from ISO standard R 1726).

134 201122
Superstructures
- When turning, the front corners of the semi-

trailer must not touch the rear wall of the cab.
Swing clearance should be at least 200 mm.
This minimum clearance is highly dependent
on components on the rear wall of the cab,
such as the air intake system, the exhaust
and accessories that have been fitted. To
meet the minimum requirement, it may be
necessary to relocate the bracket for lighting
and air connections.
- During manoeuvring, the semi-trailer must
not touch any parts of the tractor chassis,
such as mudguards, brackets or lamps. The
minimum fifth wheel mounting height above
the chassis is also determined by the height
of the tyres above the chassis with the
springs bottoming (metal on metal). In the
case of FTS, FTP and FTG tractors, the
wheel clearance of the lifted rear steered
4
axle or second axle should also be taken into
account. Also see section 2.14: "Wheel
clearance".
- On high-volume semi-trailers used in
combination with low-fifth wheel tractor
chassis, there should always be a clearance
of at least 160 mm between the top of the
chassis side members and the underside of
the semi-trailer to allow manoeuvring at
loading bays, etc. If 3-piece rear mudguards
are fitted, it may be necessary to remove the
central sections when coupling up the semi-
trailer.
For further references concerning the
freedom of movement for the semi-trailer,
also see ISO standard R 1726: 1989 E.
3 3
G000305
Required freedom of movement

D value of fifth wheel
The D value is defined as the theoretical
reference value for the horizontal force between,
in this case, the tractor and the semi-trailer and is
therefore taken as a basis for the maximum load
under dynamic conditions. The formula below
(from directive EC 94/20) can be used to
determine the minimum D value required for the
fifth wheel.
201122 135
Superstructures
where:
0, 6 GT x G A [kN]
GA = Maximum permitted mass (tonnes) D= g x
GT + G A - F
of the semi-trailor.
GT = Maximum permitted mass (tonnes) SE0004
of the tractor.
F = Maximum permitted verti- (tonnes)
cal mass on the fifth wheel.
D = D value on the fifth wheel. (kN)
g = Gravitational acceleration. ( 10 m/s2)
Fifth wheel and base plate

The following guidelines apply to the mounting of
the fifth wheel and base plate:
- For the mounting of the fifth wheel, only use
a fifth wheel base plate released by DAF,
4 which has been tested as a part of the
vehicle and is mentioned as such in the MAX.305
vehicle certificate. Various separate base MIN. 1
plates are also available from DAF. See
section 13.13: "Miscellaneous parts" for the
availble DAF part numbers'. MAX.45
- The pre-drilled base plates should be fitted to G000292
the angle sections on the chassis, using at Mounting of the base plate
least 12*bolts. Only the use of M16x2 flange
bolts(property class 10.9) is permitted. The
bolt heads should point downwards to
enable visual inspection. The holes in the
pre-drilled angle sections have a pitch of 50
mm. Turning the DAF base plate through
180 (see section 13.13: "Miscellaneous
parts" for the availble DAF part numbers),
gives fifth wheel position adjustment steps of
25 mm. As a result, simple adjustment of the
fifth wheel position (within the maximum and
minimum KA dimension) is possible, within
the limits of the maximum permitted axle and
or chassis loads.
- * To a maximum fifth wheel load of 20
tonnes. For the 12 mm base plate the
use of 8 bolts is sufficient up to a
maximum fifth wheel load of 15 tonnes.
- The maximum permissible mounting height
of fifth wheel and base plate is H = 305 mm
- To prevent the bolts working loose, two
attachment bolts should be used at each of
the four corners of the base plate. If base
plates are used on which only one
attachment bolt can be fitted at each corner,
40 mm spacer bushes (combined with longer
flange bolts) must be fitted under the bolt
heads.
- The maximum distance between the outside
of the chassis frame and the attachment
bolts in the (non-pre-drilled) angle sections is
45 mm
- The minimum clearance between underside
of the base plate and the top of chassis side
member flanges is always 1 mm.

136 201122
Superstructures
- Preferably use two-piece base plates for

applications involving frequent manoeuvring
and off-the-road operation.
- The DAF base plates with a height of 80 and
120 mm are therefore two-piece plates as
standard.
- The fifth wheel should be fitted in
accordance with the supplier's instructions.
bolts, see the table in section
2.6: "Attachment of components to the
chassis".
Catwalk
If a catwalk is fitted, it must be attached to the
chassis frame with rubber mounts. Make sure
that sufficient clearance is left for the semi-trailer
under all circumstances.
4
WARNING! Operation of any pump
or superstructure system is the
the user. It is therefore important
with the vehicle. 96120404-460
For more information see: Mounting of catwalk

201122 137
Superstructures

138 201122
Cab information
CAB INFORMATION
Cab information
Page Date
5.1 Cab modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 201122
5.2 Maximum permissible additional cab weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 201122
5.3 Accessories mounting positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 201122
5.4 Setting the roof spoiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 201122
201122 139
Cab information

140 201122
Cab information
5. CAB INFORMATION
5.1 CAB MODIFICATION
No modifications must be made to the cab

design, the cab location or the cab suspension
without prior written permission from DAF.
Because of the special hardening process used,
no welding is allowed on the main chassis
members of the cab.
If holes have to be drilled in the chassis, make
sure they are free from burrs, that rust prevention
measures are taken and that the holes are
adequately blanked with grommets or sealer.
WARNING! The truck cab must
always first be fully tilted forward (up
to the mechanical lock) before work
is carried out under it. In all other
cases, the bodybuilder should
provide a separate locking device 5
using a support.
5.2 MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE

ADDITIONAL CAB WEIGHTS
Information about the maximum weight that may

be added to a cab, and about any consequences
of adding weight, is given below for the different
vehicle series. For additions of higher weights,
please consult DAF.
DAF LF Series
Maximum additional cab weight [kg]
Location of added weight Day cab Sleeper cab
On the roof, supported on the M8 welded nuts 40 40
On the roof, supported on the cab walls 150 150
(see also subject "Mounting of top sleeper on LF Series cab"
below)
Evenly distributed over the under-bunk storage compartments - 50
Evenly distributed over the bunk - 125 (1)
In the storage compartments over the windscreen 5 (2) 5 (2)
(1) Static situation and stationary vehicle.

(2) Total weight distributed over the total storage surface of the compartments.
201122 141
Cab information
Mounting of top sleeper on LF Series cab

40 kg
The existing cab suspension is designed for cab
versions with spoilers and other approved cab
accessories. If the mounting of a top sleeper is 5 kg
required a chassis with reinforced mechanical
cab suspension should be ordered ex-factory. 125 kg
The reinforced cab suspension prevents
excessive cab movements if additional load is
added to the cab roof and the cab tilt angle will be
limited to 45. 50 kg
Maximum bunk load

For the sleeper cab, the maximum permitted load
on the bunk during driving is 25 kg. Consult DAF
if this rule has to be departed from.
22032802-054
DAF CF Series
5 Maximum cab weight [kg]

Location of added weight Day cab Sleeper cab SpaceCab
On the roof, distributed over the 4x/6x M10 welded 150 150 40
nuts provided (1)
In the storage compartments over the windscreen 15 15 15
In the storage compartments in the SpaceCab roof 20
Evenly distributed over the bunk 150 150
Evenly distributed over the under-bunk storage 50 50
compartments (cab with high bunk position)
In the storage compartments left and right of the 2 x 25 2 x 25
engine hump
On second bunk, if fitted (stationary vehicle) 100 100
On second bunk, if fitted (bunk folded up and vehi- 50 50
cle moving)
(1) The SpaceCab roof does not have welded nuts. The positions of 8 aluminium blocks are indicated by depressions.

142 201122
Cab information
40 kg
50 kg
150 kg
20 kg 100 kg
15 kg 15 kg
150 kg 150 kg
50 kg 50 kg
25 kg 25 kg
25 kg
(2x) (2x)
(2x)
G000563 G000564 5
Load on CF SpaceCab Load on cabs of CF series
Setting the coil springs

The coil springs can be re-set in four steps, the
front coil springs in 9 kg steps per coil spring, the
rear coil springs in 13.5 kg steps per coil spring.
Remove the bumper before re-setting the coil
springs at the front.
WARNING! When load is added to
the cab, the height of the coil-sprung
cab must be checked and, if
necessary, the coil springs must be 327 mm
re-set.
20081102-004
Cab suspension of CF75-85 Series, front
201122 143
Cab information
279 mm 285,5 mm
22032802-010
Suspension of CF75-85 series sleeper/day cab,

rear
Mounting of top sleeper on CF Series cabs
5 If the mounting of a top sleeper pod on a sleeper
cab is required, DAF should be contacted before
the vehicle is ordered. To restrict the cab
movements in such a case, all the springs of the
cab suspension system have to be replaced or
the right version has to be supplied ex-works. For
part numbers, see section 13.1: "Mountings".
Setting the coil springs for extra load is described
above.
DAF XF Series
Maximum additional cab weight (1) [kg]
Location of added weight Comfort cab SpaceCab Super SpaceCab
On the roof, distributed over the 4x M10 65 65 65
welded nuts provided
Distributed over the XF storage compart-
ments above the windscreen 2 x 15 25 + 40 + 15 15 + 50 + 15
Maximum load in the XF open storage
compartment under the centre compart-
ment above the windscreen - - 10
Evenly distributed in the XF storage com-
partments above each door - - 10
Evenly distributed over the lower bunk 150 150 150
In the under-bunk storage compartments 200 200 200
Evenly distributed over the upper bunk 100 100 100
Maximum additional weight
Coil-sprung cab suspension 300 235 200
Air-sprung cab suspension 480 390 300
(1) Adding more weight to the cab than indicated in the table may reduce the driving comfort.

144 201122
Cab information
65 kg
100 kg
150 kg
200 kg
G000565
5
Load on cabs of XF Series
Setting the coil springs
The coil springs can be re-set in four steps, the
front and rear coil springs in 18 kg steps per coil
spring. Remove the lower grill to access the coil
springs at the front.
WARNING! When load is added to
the cab, the height of the coil-sprung
cab must be checked and, if
necessary, the coil springs must be
re-set.
201122 145
Cab information
500 mm
G000542
Cab suspension of XF series, front

5
279 mm
96120404-508
Cab suspension of XF series, rear
5.3 ACCESSORIES MOUNTING

POSITIONS
The undermentioned positions may be used for

accessories supplied by DAF.
The hole pattern for the XF shown here enables
all accessories to be mounted. The holes F and G
for aerials are provided as standard.
On all CF and XF cab roofs, the four, six or eight
positions (A) for the mounting of the roof spoiler
are indicated by dimples in the roof surface.
Under these dimples, on the inside of the roof,
there are M10 welded nuts or aluminium blocks
(CF SpaceCab). For the mounting of spotlights,

146 201122
Cab information
M8 welded nuts or aluminium blocks are fitted on

the inside of the roof in the indicated places.
However, only the lower four holes are indicated
by dimples in the roof surface. The CF SpaceCab
roof and the XF Super SpaceCab roof do not
have dimples at the front.
The LF cab roof panels always have dimples on
the outside (only on the top) to indicate welded
nut positions, but the welded nuts themselves are
not always fitted. The following applies if the
chassis number is lower than 0L232487: before
drilling, always check whether the roof spoiler
and/or sun visor mounting frame has been fitted
to the inside of the cab roof panel. If this is not the
case, the frame should be mounted. The sun
visor mounting frame on the inside of the cab roof
panel is not fitted as standard. When retrofitting a
sun visor, this frame should always be mounted.
If in doubt, consult DAF.
201122 147
Cab information
LF day and sleeper cabs

1249
1088
1084
(Sl)
A A
(Sl)
(d) (d)
A A
(d)
880
(d)
A A
1056
623
693
(Sl+d)
A 88 (Sl+d)
A
G(3x) G(3x)
180
(Sl) A (Sl+d)
E (Sl+d)
A (Sl)
A
7
F A H
125
D 2x 3x120
B B
49
5 B B 60
908 C
1280
1315
1475 130
B B
D
80
G001270
A: roof spoiler mounting points (4x or 6x M8 welded nut). (SL = sleeper cab; d = day cab)
B: mounting points for sun visor or other accessories (6x M8 welded nut).
C: roof spoiler mounting frame + 2x extensions for sleeper cab (mounted as standard as from chassis
number: 0L232487)
D: centrally positioned mounting frame for sun visor
Note:
There are no dimples in the roof panel to indicate the positions of the welded nuts for the sun visor
mounting frame; the drilling points can be determined by mounting M8 bolts to the sun visor mount-
ing frame on the interior side of the cab.
E: radio aerial
F: telephone aerial (1)
G: beacon (1)
H: CB aerial (1)
(1) dimples only; no welded nut nor reinforcement plate on inside of roofpanel. Additional dimples at the G (lefthand side only) and
H location are to be used for wire lead trough.

148 201122
Cab information
CF day and sleeper cabs
155
A A
155
A
885
894
A A
439
A A
940
55
540 30
1480
20090503-020
A: roof spoiler mounting points (4x or 6x M10
welded nut)
201122 149
Cab information
CF Space cab
80x35x8 (8x)
940 410
A A
90
A A
375
95
505
A A
A A
312
113 115
12 17
56
B
0
0
12
12
3x
3x 9,7
130
5
98
80 17
40 C P
86,3
270 50
540
4x M8
P-P
G001155
A: roof spoiler mounting points (8x
aluminium block).
B: flashing beacon mounting points
righthand side (mirror image for left hand
side mounting.
C: spotlight bracket mounting points.
NOTE: No dimples at front of

SpaceCab roof.
NOTE: Distances for mounting frame

for DAF sun visor and spotlights are
measured from the edge at the front of
the SpaceCab.

150 201122
Cab information
XF Comfort cab
430
A A
E 140
200
D
1120
160
100 30
C C
185
403
A A
G B F
45
130
5
1110
1800
220
57
31
H 33
J 600
38
870
G000396
LHD version drawn

A: roof spoiler
B: wire lead-through hole for rotating
beam (1)
C: air hose lead-through hole for air horn (1)
D: satcom aerial (satellite communication)
E: aerial (MAUT - Toll Collect) (1) (2)
F: combi aerial (Radio & GSM & GPS) (1) (2)
G: combi aerial, (Radio & GSM & GPS) (1) (2)
H: spotlights (1)
J: CB aerial (2)(against cab rear wall)
(1) RHD mirror image

(2) Hole = rectangular cut out of 15 x 15 mm (from May 2004
onwards)
201122 151
Cab information
XF Space cab
430
A A
E 140
200
D
1120
110
160
C
C
100
242
447
70
G A A F
100
5 1110
1640
40
220
H
32,5
600
38
J
870
G000397
LHD version drawn

A: roof spoiler
B: wire lead-through hole for rotating
beam (1)
C: air hose lead-through hole for air horn (1)
D: satcom aerial
(satellite communication)
E: aerial (MAUT - Toll Collect (1) (2)
F: combi aerial (Radio & GSM & GPS) (1) (2)
G: combi aerial (Radio & GSM & GPS) (1) (2)
H: spotlights (1)
J: CB aerial (2) (against cab rear wall)
(1) RHD mirror image

(2) Hole = rectangular cut out of 15 x 15 mm (from May 2004
onwards)

152 201122
Cab information
5.4 SETTING THE ROOF SPOILER
To improve the aerodynamics of a vehicle which 1

has a superstructure higher or wider than the cab, /2 X
DAF developed roof spoilers with extensions and
P
rear air foils for all its vehicles.
X
The use of these spoilers can reduce fuel
consumption considerably, but the quantity of fuel
saved is highly dependent on the number of A
aerodynamic aids fitted, the shape of the
superstructure and the driving conditions.
A correct roof spoiler height is always essential. It
can be established as follows:
- Determine the symmetry line of the vehicle.
Place a slat on the roof of the superstructure.
It should protrude from the superstructure
roof in the direction of the cab.
5
20090503-026
- Place a second slat, as a tangent, on the top P
edge of the roof spoiler (P). It should point in
the direction of the superstructure. B
- The intersection point of the two slats should
be at the middle of the distance between the
roof spoiler edge and the front end of the
superstructure.
P
This setting procedure applies to roof spoilers X
with and without extensions and also to the basic
roof spoiler, the larger part of which has an open
construction.
A
The desired roof spoiler height can be set using
setting device (B). See the table below for the
setting range of the roof spoilers for the various
cab versions.
Setting range for 'aerodynamic' roof spoiler [mm]
22032802-026
(1)
LF CF XF
540 - 770 760 - 1040 nvt Day cab
540 - 770 760 - 1060 630 - 810 Sleeper Cab (LF-CF) Comfort Cab (XF)
- 215 - 340 370 - 515 Space Cab
(1) Distance measured between the top edge of the roof spoiler (P) and the vehicle centre line on the cab roof panel.
Adjustments can be made in steps of:

- 45.5 mm (7x) for CF day/sleeper cab
- 26 mm (5x) for the CF SpaceCab
- 36 mm for the XF cab (4x for SpaceCab, 5x
for Comfort cab).
201122 153
Cab information
The non-adjustable aerodynamic roof spoilers for

the day and sleeper cabs of the LF vehicle series
have a fixed height of either 600 mm (day cab
only), 900 mm or 1100 mm.
Basic roof spoiler
Setting range for basic roof spoiler [mm]

Series Day and sleeper cabs (1)
LF 560 to 800
CF 525 to 775
(1) Distance measured between the top edge of the roof

spoiler (P) and the vehicle centre line on the cab roof
panel.
Mounting instructions are supplied with the DAF

roof spoilers or can be found in the RAPIDO
documentation system.
5 Shape of the superstructure

In addition to the improvement that can be
achieved with aerodynamic aids on the cab, a
substantial reduction in air drag can be realised
by a superstructure with rounded corners (A) and/
or side skirts.
The reduction in air drag results from a 'better'
flow of air from roof spoiler and/or rear air foils to
the front of the superstructure, and also from a
reduced vacuum at the rear of the superstructure
(provided there are rounded corners there, too).
The feasible reduction in fuel consumption is
always dependent on the (aerodynamic) shape of
the superstructure and the vehicle's driving
conditions.

154 201122
PTO and other energy consumers
PTO AND OTHER ENERGY CONSUMERS

Page Date
6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 201122
6.2 Power take-offs (PTO's) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 201122
6.3 PTO specification, general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 201122
6.4 Clutch-independent PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 201122
6.5 Clutch-dependent PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 201122
6.6 First PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 201122
6.7 Second PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 201122
6.8 Transfer box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 201122
6.9 PTO operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 201122
6.10 Compressed air system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 201122
6.11 Air feed, tipper preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 201122
6.12 Heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 201122
201122 155

156 201122
6. PTO AND OTHER ENERGY CONSUMERS
201122 157
6.1 GENERAL
The vehicles of the DAF range can be supplied with the following gearboxes.
Overview of ZF (1) gearboxes
Type Ratios LF45 LF55 CF65 CF75 CF85 XF105
S5-42 4.65 - 0.77
5.72 - 0.76
6S700 6.02 - 0.79
6S800 6.58 - 0.78
6S1000 6.75 - 0.78
6AS700 6.02 - 0.79
6AS800 6.58 - 0.78
6AS1000 6.75 - 0.78
9S1110 12.73 - 1.00
9.48 - 0.75
9S1310 9.48 - 0.75
8S1620 13.80 - 1.00
6 16S1620
8S1820
16.41 - 1.00
11.54 - 0.84

16S1820 13.80 - 0.84
16S1920 16.41 - 1.00
16S2020 16.41 - 1.00
8S2220 11.54 - 0.84
16S2220 13.80 - 0.84
16S2320 16.41 - 1.00
16S2520 13.80 - 0.84
12S2150 15.57 - 1.00
12S2330 15.57 - 1.00
12S2830 15.57 - 1.00
12AS1220 12.79 - 1.00
12AS1420 12.79 - 1.00
10.37 - 0.81
12AS1620 10.37 - 0.81
12AS1630 15.86 - 1.00
12AS1930 15.86 - 1.00
12.33 - 0.78
12AS2130 15.86 - 1.00
12.33 - 0.78
12AS2330 15.86 - 1.00
12.33 - 0.78
12AS2530 12.33 - 0.78

158 201122
Overview of ZF (1) gearboxes

12AS2540 15.86 - 1.00
12.29 - 0.78
16AS2630 14.12 - 0.83
(1) Criteria for selecting the gearbox are the type of vehicle, engine output, rear axle (ratio) and possibly the specific application.
ZF offers several versions, which on the basis of these criteria are used in DAF's different vehicle series. Always check what
specific gearbox version is fitted and what range of ratios it has, for instance by referring to the type indication plate on the
gearbox.
Overview of gearboxes
ALLISON gearbox
2500 Series 3.51 - 0.74
3000 Series 3.49 - 0.75
3.49 - 0.65
3200 Series 3.49 - 0.75
3500 Series
3.49 - 0.65
4.59 - 0.75

6
4.59 - 0.65
EATON gearbox
6309 12.57 - 1.00
8309 12.57 - 1.00
NOTE: On the vehicles of the LF, CF

and XF series,the centre line of the
gearbox coincides with the centre line
of th vehicle.
NOTE: The description used in Sprint

differs from the description used by the
gearbox suppliers.
ZF gearboxes
The first digit(s) indicate the number of gears, 6 -
8 - 9 - 12 or 16 speed
The following letter(s) indicate S = manual
gearbox, and AS = AS-Tronic gearbox.
The remaining four digits indicate the gearbox
series
Eaton gearboxes
The first two digits indicate the gearbox series.
The last two digits indicate the number of gears,
6 or 9 speed
Allison gearboxes
5-speed automatic with overdrive ratio 0.75:1
201122 159
6-speed automatic with overdrive ratio 0.65:1
6.2 POWER TAKE-OFFS (PTO'S)
When energy required for the superstructure is

taken from the vehicle, a PTO is used in most
cases. Furthermore, there are various
possibilities for connections to, for instance, the
electrical system of the vehicle. DAF vehicles can
ex-works be supplied with provisions for various
extra energy consumers. The following
provisions are supplied by DAF or can after
delivery be added by the bodybuilder.
2b 8
3a 7 6
6 + -
1 2a 3b 4 5
G000293
1 = Front-end PTO, direct (LF series only)
2a = Front-end PTO, indirect, crankshaft pulley
2b = Front-end PTO, indirect, generator-driven
2c = Front-end PTO, indirect, for hydraulic pump
2d = Front-end PTO, indirect, coolant pump pulley
3a = DAF engine PTO
3b = Flywheel PTO (ZF)
4 = Gearbox PTO
5 = Transfer case PTO
6 = Electrical system connection
7 = Compressed air system connection
8 = Engine cooling system connection
NOTE: For electrical system

connections, see chapter 9: "Electrical
system LF series".
Type of superstructure/energy supply matrix

Energy suppliers
Application 1 2a 2b 2c 2d 3a 3b 4 5 6 7 8
Air conditioning
Vehicle loading crane
Concrete mixer

160 201122
Energy suppliers
Application 1 2a 2b 2c 2d 3a 3b 4 5 6 7 8
Concrete pump
Bulk compressor
Demountable body system
Generator (alternator)
High-pressure pump
Hydraulic platform
Compactor
Tipper
Refrigerated/deep-frozen transport
Gully emptier
Tail lift
Winch
Air consumers
Superstructure heating
Tanker (for example milk tanker)
Water tender (fire service) 6
1 = Front-end PTO, direct (LF series only)
2a = Front-end PTO, indirect, crankshaft pulley
2b = Front-end PTO, indirect, generator-driven
2c = Front-end PTO, indirect, for hydraulic pump
2d = Front-end PTO, indirect, coolant pump pulley
3a = DAF engine PTO
3b = Flywheel PTO (ZF)
4 = Gearbox PTO
5 = Transfer case PTO
6 = Electrical system connection
7 = Compressed air system connection
8 = Engine cooling system connection
6.3 PTO SPECIFICATION, GENERAL
When selecting a PTO, the operating conditions,

such as the torque to be transmitted, the engine
speed, the direction of rotation of the engine, the
duration and frequency of operation, play an
important role, as do the occurrence of fluctuating
(peak) loads, vibrations and high initial torques.
Another important criterion is whether or not the
PTO can or may be clutch-dependent. For
gearbox PTO's are often preferred because of
their price, location and the large number of
ratios, which makes them suitable for many
applications. DAF also offers engine-dependent
PTO's, with connections to the crankshaft on the
front (front-end PTO), or to the flywheel housing
201122 161
at the rear (DAF engine PTO or ZF/NMV). An

engine-PTO is clutch-independent and is
mostly used to drive auxiliary units that are
operated during driving or shunting. In this
section, both PTO types will be dealt with.
If the auxiliary consumer requires high torques, it
should be checked whether the engine is capable
of delivering the power required at the speed
specified. The loss of efficiency between the
engine and the auxiliary consumer should also be
taken into account.
Finally, various versions are available with an
output DIN flange or a pump connection, suitable
for direct mounting of a hydraulic pump according
to ISO standard 7653 (type D).
WARNING! Engine and driveline
must not be impeded in their
movements as a result of the
installation of a PTO and the
auxiliary consumers driven by it.
Conditions for use

6 Engaging of in particular gearbox PTO's should
be done while the vehicle is stationary and the
engine running at idling speed. After depressing
the clutch pedal, wait about 2 to 3 seconds until
the gearbox countershaft has fully stopped
moving, before engaging the PTO. Gear wheel
rattle should always be avoided. After engine
speed has been increased to 1000 rpm, you can
slowly release the clutch pedal. Minimum engine
speed, MX and PR, during PTO operation: 800
rpm, FR and GR engines 1000 rpm.
Vehicles with an AS-Tronic gearbox have an
electronic controlled (automatic) engaging
procedure which operates according a factory or
customer defined parameter setting (software).
Permissible power take off for engine PTOs in
combination with an AS-Tronic gearbox is 10% of
the engine power with a maximum of 32kW. For
engine PTOs in combination with AS-Tronic Lite
gearboxes, DAF Sales Engineering should be
consulted.
As soon as the PTO and pump have definitively
been selected, the maximum power take-off can
be calculated on the basis of the torque and
power calculation. PTO's can roughly be divided
into three classes, namely light, medium and
heavy, for short-lasting or intermittent use to
continuous operation. See the table below.

162 201122
Class Nominal torque Periods of use (1)

T [Nm]
Light T < 400 Intermittent
Medium 400 < T < 1000 Continuous
Heavy T > 1000 Continuous
(1) See PTO tables
On the basis of the power requirements and the

effective PTO operating time, the PTO selected
should be a medium-class PTO (rather than a
light-class PTO) if one of the following factors
applies:
- Periods of prolonged use; allow for the
possibility of gearbox oil temperatures
running up too high.
- Shock loads (generally caused by incorrect
operation); risk is reduced when a hydraulic
drive is used.
- Vibrations; a correct PTO drive can keep
vibrations within reasonable limits.
- Extremely high initial torques, due, for
example, to the mass inertia of the driven
6
equipment.
Protection
The maximum take-off torques specified for the
PTO's supplied by DAF, are based on uniform
(vibration-free, non-shock) loads without the
occurrence of axial forces. The maximum initial
torques must never be higher than 2 times the
value specified in the gearbox PTO
specifications. For the engine PTO a 15%
torque increase is accepted.If higher torques
may occur, an overload protection device must
be mounted in the driveline, in the form of a
slipping clutch or a security flange. Furthermore,
the clutch should have extra protection to prevent
the PTO from being engaged too early. With such
protection, the clutch pedal must be fully engaged
before PTO operation is enabled. According to
the cut-in conditions of the VIC (see section 7.21:
'PTO control/protection'), the VIC only checks
whether the clutch pedal has been 'touched' or
not. If an N/10 PTO is ordered ex-works, the full
clutch protection is always included. N/10 PTOs
as available on ZF gearboxes fitted to LF & CF65
do not have the feature of Clutch Protection
available. Further information can be obtained
from DAF.
For the ZF gearbox PTO's the maximum
torque specifications in the overviews have
been calculated at a PTO speed of 1500 rpm
for a nominal service life of 500 hours.
201122 163
Oil temperature
During prolonged PTO operation, the gearbox oil
temperature must not rise above 110C.
Temperatures up to 130C are permissible for
brief periods (max. 30 minutes). If necessary
(check to be sure!), an extra oil cooler should be
fitted on the gearbox. In such cases, consult DAF.
Torque and output calculation
- PTO selection
To be able to select the right PTO, it is necessary
to calculate the drive torque (I) on the basis of the
desired PTO speed (II) and the required effective
output (III), assuming that these data of the driven
equipment are known:
- Pump selection
For the selection of the right pump for a hydraulic
drive, it is first important to determine the effective
pump output (Pe) on the basis of the required
pump delivery (IV), the system operating
pressure (V) and the efficiency (III).
Subsequently, the PTO drive torque (I) can be
calculated for the selection of the PTO on the
6 basis of the above-mentioned data:

Where:
npto = rpm of power take off unit [min-1]

nen- = rpm of truck engine [min-1]
gine
rev = revolution of hydraulic pump shaft
i = PTO reduction ratio [-]
M = PTO drive torque [Nm]
Pn = calculated nominal output [kW]
Pe = required effective output [kW]
C = specific pump capacity [cm3/
rev]
Q = actually required delivery [l/min]
p = hydraulic system operating pres- [bar]
sure
= efficiency: = 1x 2x 3x...etc. [-]
Speed Factor
If the calculated load is higher than the maximum
permissible load, sometimes a lower-capacity
pump is specified. By using a higher-speed PTO
with a higher speed factor, and/or a higher engine
speed, in general the same delivery and power
take-off can be realised, however at a
proportionally lower PTO drive torque.

164 201122
Direct pump mounting

For all gearbox PTO applications where the pump
is flange-mounted on the PTO, the following
limitation applies, unless stated otherwise in the
PTO overviews:
The static moment resulting from the pump M = S x G = max. 30 Nm.
weight on the both pump connections on the N.../
10 PTO mating surface should in general not
exceed 30 Nm. For the ZF PTO, types NL/1c, NL/
10c, NH/1c, NL/4c and NH/4c the maximum
permissible static moment is 50 Nm.
The static moment for the Hydrocar P2264 and
81Z2 PTO's is 50Nm, for the P2264 the static
monent is 20Nm.
The maximum static moment resulting from the S
pump weight on the DAF PR and MX Engine PTO
mating surface is 40 Nm. Allison gearboxes the G 96120404-606
maximum allow a static moment of 40 Nm. For
Maximum torque on direct pump connection
the LF and CF65 Series the bending moment on
the engine PTO housing should not exceed 45
Nm.
6
If the PTO device generates a larger bending
moment than allowed it should be supported by
additional mounting brackets or remote mounted
elsewhere and driven by a carden shaft.
In some cases, the pump dimensions prove to be
restricted by the diameter of the drive flange in
combination with the location of the countershaft
in the gearbox (which determines the location of
the PTO). The clearance between pump and
drive flange (or shaft) should therefore always be
checked.
WARNING! Incorrect use of the
hydraulic system (for instance at
unduly high revs) may cause
damage to the hydraulic pump and
subsequently to the gearbox.
WARNING! The pump shaft should

therefore be provided with a high
temperature-resistant double seal,
with a bleed hole between the two
seals, to prevent gearbox oil being
sucked in or hydraulic oil getting
into the gearbox. Note: this is one of
the reasons why DAF no longer uses
ZF PTO type N/2c!
In some cases the mounting of a so-called pump

adapter is recommended. This adapter is
provided with a separate PTO seal and a bleed
hole (take note of the higher static moment). The
ZF N../4 PTO has a separate pump bearing, so
that in that case the mounting of an adapter is not
necessary. At any rate, the pump supplier's
instructions should always be consulted.
201122 165
Drive shafts
The angles formed by the drive shaft couplings
between PTO and auxiliary consumer should be
equal to each other and should not exceed the
following maximum values:
- maximum of 6 degrees for front-end 1
PTO's
- maximum of 8 degrees for all other PTO's
The shafts must be installed in such a way that 2
uniform running of the driven equipment is

ensured. This calls for a Z or W arrangement of 96120404-602
the shafts. Excessively large drive shaft angles or
PTO drive resonance may cause serious Z arrangement
vibration far above the calculated (nominal)
torques. In case of doubt, tests should always be
made before a particular application can be
guaranteed.
1
When the shaft angles (1 and 2) differ from
each other, non-uniformity ( R) will be higher
than in the optimum situation, when 1= 2. Non-
uniformity can be calculated with the formula: 2
6 R =
2
1
2
2
96120404-605
SE0008
W arrangement
where R (permissible) 3.
The tools represented by the opposite drawings

can be used for the correct alignment of the drive
shafts. The sliding joint of the drive shaft on the
gearbox should permit a forward movement of at
least 8 mm and a rearward movement of at least 96120404-603
5 mm.
WARNING! Ensure that freely 96120404-604
accessible drive components are
always carefully screened off.
Rotating shafts may cause serious
injury! Switch OFF the engine before
starting operations on the PTO or
the PTO drive.

166 201122
- PTO connections
6 + 0,2
8,1
- 0,2 (4x)
1,8
47h6
74
90
20070604-032
6
9 -0,5
+ 0,2
2,3-0,2 12,1 (8x) M12 (4x)*
80*
90h7 80*
130 SPLINES 8 x 32 x 36 ISO 14
150 ISO 7653
* G000451-1
G001268
Position of engine in the chassis

The angle at which the engine is positioned in the
chassis in relation to the chassis side members,
designated as: in the opposite figure, should
be:
- LF45/55 and CF65 Series: = 3.5
- CF75/85 Series: = 4.5
- XF Series: = 4.5
96120404-624a
201122 167
Direction of rotation of the engines

The direction of rotation of the crankshaft of DAF
and Cummins engines is always anti-clockwise,
viewed looking towards the rear of the engine.
6.4 CLUTCH-INDEPENDENT PTO
Front-end PTO, direct
The table below shows the most relevant data

with regard to the direct front-end PTO for the
LF45 and LF55 vehicle series.
Specifications for front-end PTO, direct
LF45 LF55
Angle of engine in relation to chassis 3.5 3.5
side members
Maximum angles of drive shaft 2 x 6 2 x 6
Maximum transmitted torque 250 Nm 250 Nm
Maximum transmitted power 40 kW 40 kW
6 Maximum added mass inertia

Maximum unbalance
0.2 kgm2
100 gmm/kg
0.2 kgm2
100 gmm/kg
WARNING! Any modifications made

to bumper or cab tilting system to
enable a pump to be mounted, are
subject to approval from DAF.

168 201122
W arrangement of drive shaft
Z arrangement of drive shaft

Installation dimensions, front-end PTO, direct
Based on SAE J1946
D
Flange location, front-end PTO, direct 6

E
Dimensions: LF45 LF55 LF55
(see figure) 14 - 16t 18 - 19t
C
Dimension V A 1275 1325 1375
F
,, A (1) 446 496 636
(2)
536 586 636
,, B 932 982 1032
(1)
,, C 91 131 136 A
(2)
96 136 136 B
,, D 145 145 145 VA
C
,, E 170 x 170 x 170 x L
150 150 150 96120404-611
Flange location dimensions, front-end PTO,

,, F 120 160 160 direct
3.5 3.5 3.5 3
3.5 3.5 3.5 80 4
80
(1) FR engines
(2) GR engines
60,38
60,33
16
3/8 UNF
(4x)
G000290
Flange dimensions, front-end PTO, direct, LF

Series
201122 169
Front-end PTO, indirect

Specifications for front-end PTO, indirect
Vehicle series LF and CF75 CF75 CF85
CF65 with airco and XF
Maximum power take-off via coolant
pump [kW]:
- at engine idling speed - - 2.2 -
- at maximum engine speed - - 6 -
Maximum power take-off 15 50 50 50
via crankshaft pulley [kW]
Maximum added mass inertia 0.2 0.03 0.03 0.05
[kgm2]
Maximum unbalance [gmm/kg] 100 125 125 125
Maximum distance between most for- 150 180 180 200
ward pulley and front of cylinder block
[mm]
Misalignment (max. 4 mm) 1:120 1:120 1:120 1:120
Any modifications made to engine and

chassis are subject to approval from DAF.
6 - Crankshaft pulley (SELCO 6624)
A twin-belt pulley on PR engine or triple belt
pulley on MX engine for driving a compressor,
alternator or hydraulic system pump can be fitted
to the crankshaft by the bodybuilder. A drawing of
the pulley is available from DAF. When this pulley
is fitted, the fan will in most cases be moved
forward. This should be compensated for. A twin
belt pulley is available to all FR engines and GR
220 engine ex-factory.
96120404-615
Positions of power take-offs
LF45 - LF55 - CF65 CF75 CF85

Pulley diameter 310 mm 300 mm 265 mm
Number of grooves 2 x SPA / XPA 2 x DIN7753-AV13 3 x DIN7753-AV13

170 201122
Before a crankshaft pulley is fitted, the mounting

face on the vibration damper must be completely
flat and clean. So any traces of paint should be
removed. The belt pull must not run parallel to the
motion of the pistons but must be in the area left
and right of the engine indicated in the drawing
below.
- Coolant pump pulley
On CF75-85 and XF vehicles without air
conditioning system, one coolant pump pulley is
available for the drive of an auxiliary user. For
maximum power take-offs, see the overview.
- Preparation for generator
In particular for temperature-controlled transport,
the LF55, CF65, CF85 and XF Series can be
prepared ex-works for the use of a generator.
In the case of the LF55 and CF65 (SELCO 0590-
17kW, SELCO 0591-24kW), the vehicle has:
- an extra crankshaft pulley
- uprated engine mounts, air compressor
outlet pipe and air dryer pipe to give
clearance to a generator
- driven pulley, belt, tensioner and generator
mounting brackets (loose supplied)
6
- modified anti roll bar with the 24 kW
generator
In case of the CF85 and XF Series (SELCO

6723), the vehicle has:
- an extra crankshaft pulley,
- an adapted oil sump to make room for a
generator and
- two shorter oil filters instead of the standard
oil filter.
Within the room available, a drive ratio of 1:2 can
be realised. This results in a maximum generator
capacity of 24 kVA. Because of the wide variety G001290
of generators and cooling motors, DAF does not Generator preparation for LF55 and CF65
supply the complete equipment. The bodybuilder
will therefore have to complete the equipment,
taking account of the following guidelines:
- V-belt tension: 500 - 600 N for CF85 and XF
Series, 600 - 700 N for CF75 Series (per belt)
- extra vibration dampers must be fitted, using
the existing hole pattern on the engine
bracket.
If this option is not ordered ex-works, the vibration
damper mounting hub must be replaced.
LF - CF65 Series CF75 CF85 - XF Serie
Pulley diameter 280 mm 300 mm 265 mm
201122 171
LF - CF65 Series CF75 CF85 - XF Serie

Number of grooves 2 x SPA / XPA 3 x SPA / XPA
Recommended V-belt Poly V-belt OPTIBELT SPA - 13 OPTIBELT SPA - 13
or or
OPTIBELT XPA - 13 OPTIBELT XPA - 13
- Preparation for hydraulic pump (SELCO

9543)
For the PR and MX engine, an engine bracket
with a standard ISO pump connection is available
for the fitting of a hydraulic pump. The bracket is
provided with a pulley and a belt tensioner. The
pulley is driven from a pulley on the crankshaft.
Technical data:
- Maximum power take-off: 50kW
- Reduction ratio: 1 : 1
- Belt tension first assembly: 1500N.
Belt tension to be checked after 30 min.
750N min. - 950N max.
- Pump connection according ISO 7653,
splines according ISO14 - 8x32x36
6 - Modified oil sump 20090503-037
Engine PTO
The DAF engine PTO for the LF and CF series is
a clutch-independent PTO. It was specially
developed to drive superstructure equipment
which require low-medium output (LF and CF65),
and medium-high outputs (CF75 and CF85) and
is used for most of the driving hours and/or for a
high number of operating hours when the vehicle
is stationary.
The tables show the specifications and the
locations for connecting this PTO. The engine
PTO protrudes above the chassis members. So
make sure that the PTO itself, the drive shafts
and the hydraulic pump do not get in the way of
parts of the chassis, the sub-frame or the
superstructure.
Engine PTO specification
Maximum Service
Direction of ro-
Vehicle type Speed factor torque life
tation
[Nm/min-1] [Hrs]
< Prod. week
300 / 1500 (2) 1100
LF and CF 65 Se- 2011.17
Anti- clockwise
ries 1.00 (1) > Prod. week
400 / 1500 (2) 1100
with GR engine 2011.17
200 / 1500 (2) 5500
(1) Viewed looking towards the rear of the engine

(2) The engine PTO does not contain a torque limiting fail safe device. If the PTO device fitted to the engine is likely to exceed 400
Nm in a failure condition, a fail safe device such as a shear pin should be incorporated into the PTO device.
(3) The engine PTO does not contain a torque limiting fail safe device. If the PTO device fitted to the engine is likely to exceed 500
Nm in a failure condition, a fail safe device such as a shear pin should be incorporated into the PTO device.

172 201122
Engine PTO specifications
Vehicle type Speed factor Maximum torque Maximum output
Anti- clock- Clockwise (1) [Nm] PTO revs [kW] PTO revs
wise (1) [min-1] [min-1]
CF75 Series - 0.932 990 1600 150 2300
1.412 - 660 1600 150 2300
CF85 Series - - - -
1.20 - 800 1500 150 1800
(1) Viewed looking towards the rear of the engine
The speed data under 'Maximum torque' and

'Maximum output' refer to the engine speed.
With released clutch a torque of about 13Nm will
remain on the PTO output due to internal friction.
Only applicable for the MX engine PTO.
Switch on conditions CF85 engine PTO:

The switch on/off conditions are controlled by the
6
BBM
Max. power 85kW
Min. engine speed: 650 RPM
Max. engine speed: 1000 RPM
Vehicle speed under 50 km/h
- +
Y
280
H
CL CRANKSHAFT L Z +
-
L VEHICLE
x
C
G001137
201122 173
Locations for engine PTO connections

Vehicle Series Connection Location
X Y Z H L
LF 45 Series Direct pump connection 517 290 376
LF 55 Series Direct pump connection 467 329
166 258
LF 55 Series Direct pump connection 417 329 415
19T /
CF 65 Series
CF75 series Flange 651 367
40 493 347
Direct pump connection 593 372
CF85 series Flange 653 339
139 450 320
Direct pump connection 612 343
Engine PTO connections

The engine PTO is available with:
- DIN 120 flange, 8-hole, CF75/85 Series
- DIN 100 flange, 6-hole, CF75/85 Series
6 - ISO 7653 (direct) pump connection. LF - CF

Series. It is a dry connection, there is no oil
feed from the engine. The splines should be
lubricated with grease and serviced in line G001142
with the PTO device supplier's requirements.
Shaft length from mounting face nominal
55mm, 70mm max., te ensure correct spline
engagement.
The maximum moment of inertia (incl.drive shaft)
for this DAF engine PTO is 0.025 kgm2. In case
this value is exceeded a flexible coupling is 22032802-042
required.
When a drive shaft is used , the own frequency of
the complete system must be at least 250Hz.
PTO devices should be secured to the REPTO
housing using M10 bolts with a minimum thread
engagement of 20mm with an assembly torque of
46Nm
Engine PTO control
Engine PTO control, including a safeguard
against engaging the PTO while the engine is
running, is available on request (CF75/85 only).
Engine PTO on LF and CF65 Series is without
control, so continuously running.
WARNING! The CF75 engine PTO
must only be engaged when the
engine is NOT running.
WARNING! The MX engine PTO

should be ordered without clutch,
when used for concrete mixer
application, in order to prevent the
PTO to be disengaged in case of low
air pressure.

174 201122
Flywheel PTO (NMV) only available with POV

Vehicle Gearbox PTO types Speed fac- Maximum Flange location Note
series tor torque X Y Z
[Nm]
CF75 16S1800 TO (1) (2) (3) (
0.98 2000 4)
913 38 304
(1) (4) (5)
NMV221 1.55 1300
CF85 16S2200 TO 0.98 2000 (1) (2) (4)
16S2500 TO 1032 38 294 (1) (4) (5)
1.55 1300
(1) Flange, diameter 150 mm, 8-hole, 130 mm pitch

(2) Service life of PTO at maximum torque: approx. 2000 operating hours
(3) Maximum initial speed 2000 rpm
(4) Maximum torque during continuous operation at engine speed of 1500 rpm
(5) Service life of PTO at maximum torque: approx. 1500 operating hours
- An operating speed between 800 and 1000 - +

RPM requires a minimum moment of inertia
of 0,3 Kgm.
- In case the moment of inertia is unknown the
X
operating engine speed should be over 1200
RPM.
-
-
Permitted initial torque: Ts = 1600 Nm.
Switch on revs. max. 2000 RPM for iNMV = 6
0,98 and max. 1300 RPM when iNMV = 1,55
- Max. moment of inertia at 1200 RPM at the
output flange: 1 kgm2 for iNMV = 1,55 and 3
kgm2 when iNMV = 0,98
G000291
Location of flange of flywheel PTO.
Direction of rotation is anti-clockwise, viewed

looking towards the rear of the gearbox. During
prolonged heavy use of the flywheel PTO, the
gearbox oil temperature must not rise above
110C. To ensure that this condition is met, an air
cooler or oil cooler may be necessary.
The flywheel PTO can be engaged and
disengaged by using a multiple disc clutch
(fitted as standard) while the engine is
running.
When this PTO is disengaged, a residual torque
of approx. 11 Nm (engine speed 1300 rpm and oil
temperature 40C) continues to act on the drive
shaft. If necessary, a disc brake can be fitted on
the drive shaft.
201122 175
6.5 CLUTCH-DEPENDENT PTO
Overview of PTO locations on ZF gearboxes1)
G000448
1) The designations of the PTO locations (indicated by large black dot) and the direction of rotation refer
to the mounting location of the PTO in the vehicle, viewed looking towards the rear of the gearbox.
These designations have to be used when ordering these PTO's: Z=Centre, R=Right, U=Under,
O=above and L=Left in relation to the countershaft in the gearbox.

176 201122
PTO flange position on gearbox

VA -
X
VA X
+
+
+
Z
Y +
+
CH Z -
G000642
Y
CH
- G000643
PTO flange locations (X, Y and Z dimensions) on gearboxes: VA = front axle centre line / CH = chassis
centre line.
6.6 FIRST PTO
For availability of PTO's ex-factory please see the 6

appropriate information sources.
For PTO reference numbers on Ecosplit 3
gearboxes see BBG version 2009.19
ZF Manual gearbox - 6 speeds - Overdrive
Gearbox 6S700 ( 6.02 - 0.79 )
Type Selco Loc. Gear Speed Max. RAPIDO reference Notes
ratio factor torque PTO Fitting Kit
[Nm]
NL/1b 4844 1609527 1701416 1, 7, 9
Z - 0.57 600
NL/1c 4846 1609528 1701343 2, 7, 9
NL/4b 6327 1609529 1701390 1, 8, 10
U 32 / 25 0.73 350
NL/4c 6328 1609530 1742233 2, 8, 10
1. PTO type b, with flange diameter 90 mm, 4-hole

2. PTO type c with direct pump connection, ISO 7653
7. Direction of rotation clockwise
8. Direction of rotation counter clockwise
9. Duration of operation, continuous
10. Duration of operation, < 30 min.

Gearbox 6S800 ( 6.58 - 0.78 ) and 6S1000 (6.75 - 0.78)
ratio factor torque
PTO Fitting Kit
[Nm]
NH/1b 4844 800 ( 1609500 1701416 1, 7, 9
NH/1c 6S800)
Z - 0.53
4846 1000 1609519 1701343 2, 7, 9
(6S1000)
201122 177

Gearbox 6S800 ( 6.58 - 0.78 ) and 6S1000 (6.75 - 0.78)
ratio factor torque
PTO Fitting Kit
[Nm]
NH/4b 6327 1609520 1701390 1, 8, 10
U 32 / 25 0.67 350
NH/4c 6328 1609522 1742233 2, 8, 10


Gearbox 6S1000 (6.75 - 0.78)
Type Loc. Gear Speed Max. RAPIDO reference Notes
[Nm]
6
NL/10b 50 / 22 1.19 480 2, 4, 8,
or c 55 / 17 1.70 320
10
O
58 / 17 2.03 270 only on

POV
+ NL/1 Z - 0.53 600 1, 2, 7, 9
1,2, 8,
+NL/4 32 / 25 0.67 350
10

4. PTO type b with flange diameter 100 mm, 6-hole
ZF Manual gearbox - 9 speeds - Direct drive

Gearbox 9S1110 ( 12.73 - 1.00 )
Gear Speed Maximum RAPIDO reference
Type Selco Loc. ratio factor torque No ZF-Intarder Notes
[Nm]
NH/1b 4844 1425376 1, 7, 9
Z - 0.72 800
NH/1c 4846 1425399 2, 7, 9

178 201122
ZF Manual gearbox - 9 speeds - Direct drive

Gearbox 9S1110 ( 12.73 - 1.00 )
Gear Speed Maximum RAPIDO reference
Type Selco Loc. ratio factor torque Notes
No ZF-Intarder
[Nm]
NH/4b 6327 32 / 25 0.92 1425404 1, 8, 10
U
6558 27 / 30 0.65 1425409
4963 32 / 25 0.92 1425400
R
6329 27 / 30 0.65 430 1425402
NH/4c 6328 32 / 25 0.92 1425405 2, 8, 10
U
6575 27 / 30 0.65 1425410
4964 32 / 25 0.92 1425401
R
6342 27 / 30 0.65 1425403
N109/10b 9642 O 44 / 36 0.88 630 1672130 4, 8, 9
9641 48 / 32 1.08 530 1672129
9640 53 / 27 1.42 410 1672128
N109/10c 9644 O 44 / 36 0.88 630 1672132 2, 8, 9
9643 48 / 32 1.08 530 1672131
6

Gearbox 9S1110 and 9S1310 ( 9.48 - 0.75 )
Gear Speed Maximum RAPIDO reference Notes
Type Selco Loc. ratio factor torque No ZF-Intarder
[Nm]
NH/1b 4844 1425376 1, 7, 9
Z - 0.97 800
NH/1c 4846 1425399 2, 7, 9
NH/4b 6327 32 / 25 1.24 1425404 1, 8, 10
U
6558 27 / 30 0.87 1425409
4963 32 /25 1.24 1425400
R
6329 27 / 30 0.87 430 1425402
NH/4c 6328 32 / 25 1.24 1425405 2, 8, 10
U
6575 27 / 30 0.87 1425410
4964 32 / 25 1.24 1425401
R
6342 27 / 30 0.87 1425403
N109/10b 9642 O 44 / 36 1.19 630 1672130 4, 8, 9
9641 48 / 32 1.45 530 1672129
9640 53 / 27 1.90 410 1672128
201122 179

Gearbox 9S1110 and 9S1310 ( 9.48 - 0.75 )
Gear Speed Maximum RAPIDO reference Notes
Type Selco Loc. ratio factor torque
No ZF-Intarder
[Nm]
N109/10c 9644 O 44 / 36 1.19 630 1672132 2, 8, 9
9643 48 / 32 1.45 530 1672131

2. PTO type c, with direct pump connection, ISO 7653
4. PTO type b, with flange, diameter 100 mm, 6-hole
Allison Automatic Gearbox 3000, 3200 ( 3.49 - 0.75 and 3.49 - 0.65) and 3500 ( 4.59 - 0.75 and 4.59
- 0.65)
Type Selco Loc. Gear Speed Maximum RAPIDO Notes

ratio factor torque [Nm] reference
6 277XGFJP-D5XY 8501
R
31 / 41 1.03 405 / 285 1339954 2, 8
277XSFJP-D5XX 8500 39 / 33 1.61 335 / 235 1339952 4, 8
859XGFJP-D5AC 2476 24 / 43 0.76 780 / 550 1604963 4, 8
Permitted maximum torque for intermittent / continuous use (any duty cycle longer than 5 minutes is
classed as continous)
Permitted maximum torque for fir brigade application is 80% of the intermittent rating
2. Direct pump connection, ISO 7653

4. Flange, diameter 100 mm, 6-hole
ZF Manual gearbox Ecosplit 4 - 8 speeds - Direct drive

Gearbox 8S1620 ( 13.80 - 1.00)
RAPIDO reference
Type Selco Loc. Gear Speed Max. With Notes
ratio factor torque No
ZF-Intarder
[Nm] ZF-Intarder
3
NH/1b 4844 1801647 1801611 1, 7, 9
Z - 0.91 1000
NH/1c 4846 1801645 1801609 2, 7, 9
NH/4b 6327 U 32 / 25 1.17 1801666 1801625 1, 8, 10
6558 27 / 30 0.82 1801668 1801627
4963 R 32 / 25 1.17 1801674 1801633
6329 27 / 30 0.82 430 1801676 1801635
NH/4c 6328 U 32 / 25 1.17 1801661 1801621 2, 8, 10
6575 27 / 30 0.82 1801663 1801623
4964 R 32 / 25 1.17 1801670 1801629
6342 27 / 30 0.82 1801672 1801631

180 201122

Gearbox 8S1620 ( 13.80 - 1.00)
RAPIDO reference
Type Selco Loc. Gear Speed Max. Notes
With
ratio factor torque No
ZF-Intarder
[Nm] ZF-Intarder
3
N221/10b 4851 U 37 / 30 1.13 870 1801659 1801617 4, 8, 9
4848 40 / 27 1.35 730 1801657 1801617
4849 44 / 23 1.75 560 1801355 1801615
4850 46 / 21 2.00 470 1801653 1801613
N221/10c 6285 O 37 / 30 1.13 870 1801684 1801643 2, 8, 9
6262 40 / 27 1.35 730 1801682 1801641
6217 44 / 23 1.75 560 1801680 1801639
8504 46 / 21 2.00 470 1801678 1801637

8.
9.
10.
Direction of rotation counter clockwise
Duration of operation, continuous
Duration of operation, < 60 min.
6
ZF Manual gearbox Ecosplit 4- 8 speeds - Overdrive
Gearbox 8S1820, 8S2220 ( 11.54 - 0.84 )
Gear Speed Max. RAPIDO reference Notes
Type Selco Loc. ratio factor torque With
[Nm] No
ZF-Intard-
ZF-Intarder
er 3
NH/1b 4844 1801647 1801611 1, 7, 9
Z - 1.09 1000
NH/1c 4846 1801645 1801609 2, 7, 9
NH/4b 6327 U 32 / 25 1.40 1801666 1801625 1, 8, 10
6558 27 / 30 0.98 1801668 1801627
4963 R 32 / 25 1.40 1801674 1801633
6329 27 / 30 0.98 430 1801676 1801635
NH/4c 6328 U 32 / 25 1.40 1801661 1801621 2, 8, 10
6575 27 / 30 0.98 1801663 1801623
4964 R 32 / 25 1.40 1801670 1801629
6342 27 / 30 0.98 1801672 1801631
N221/10b 4851 U 37 / 30 1.35 870 1801659 1801619 4, 8, 9
4848 40 / 27 1.62 730 1801657 1801617
4849 44 / 23 2.09 560 1801655 1801615
4850 46 / 21 2.40 470 1801653 1801613
201122 181
ZF Manual gearbox Ecosplit 4- 8 speeds - Overdrive

Gearbox 8S1820, 8S2220 ( 11.54 - 0.84 )
Type Selco Loc. ratio factor torque
With
[Nm] No
ZF-Intard-
ZF-Intarder
er 3
N221/10c 6285 O 37 / 30 1.35 870 1801684 1801643 2, 8, 9
6262 40 / 27 1.62 730 1801682 1801641
6217 44 / 23 2.09 560 1801680 1801639
8504 46 / 21 2.40 470 1801678 1801637


6 Gearbox 12S2100, 12S2300 and 12S2800 ( 15.57 - 1.00 )
ratio factor torque
With
[Nm] No
ZF-Intarder
ZF-Intarder
3
NH/1b 4844 1801647 1801611 1, 7, 9
Z - 0.81 / 1.03 1000
NH/1c 4846 1801645 1801609 2, 7, 9
NH/4b 6327 U 32 / 25 1.04 / 1.32 1801666 1801625 1, 8, 10
6558 27 / 30 0.73 / 0.93 1801668 1801627
4963 R 32 / 25 1.04 / 1.32 1801674 1801633
6329 27 / 30 0.73 / 0.93 430 1801676 1801635
NH/4c 6328 U 32 / 25 1.04 / 1.32 1801661 1801621 2, 8, 10
6575 27 / 30 0.73 / 0.93 1801663 1801623
4964 R 32 / 25 1.04 / 1.32 1801670 1801629
6342 27 / 30 0.73 / 0.93 1801672 1801631
N221/10b 4851 U 37 / 30 1.00 / 1.27 870 1801659 1801619 4, 8, 9
4848 40 / 27 1.20 / 1.53 730 1801657 1801617
4849 44 / 23 1.55 / 1.98 560 1801655 1801615
4850 46 / 21 1.78 / 2.26 470 1801653 1801613

182 201122

Gearbox 12S2100, 12S2300 and 12S2800 ( 15.57 - 1.00 )
ratio factor torque
With
[Nm] No
ZF-Intarder
ZF-Intarder
3
N221/10c 6285 O 37 / 30 1.00 / 1.27 870 1801684 1801643 2, 8, 9
6262 40 / 27 1.20 / 1.53 730 1801682 1801641
6217 44 / 23 1.55 / 1.98 560 1801680 1801639
8504 46 / 21 1.78 / 2.26 470 1801678 1801637
6193 U 37 / 30 1.00 / 1.27 870 1801651
6119 40 / 27 1.20 / 1.53 730 1801650
9213 44 / 23 1.55 / 1.98 560 1801649
2630 46 / 21 1.78 / 2.26 470 1801648

8.
9.
10.
6
Gearbox 16S1620, 16S1920, 16S2020, 16S2220 and 16S2320 ( 16.41 - 1.00 )
ratio factor torque With
[Nm] No
ZF-Intarder
ZF-Intarder
3
NH/1b 4844 1801647 1801611 1, 7, 9
Z - 0.77 / 0.91 1000
NH/1c 4846 1801645 1801609 2, 7, 9
NH/4b 6327 U 32 / 25 0.98 / 1.17 1801666 1801625 1, 8, 10
6558 27 / 30 0.69 / 0.82 1801668 1801627
4963 R 32 / 25 0.98 / 1.17 1801674 1801633
6329 27 / 30 0.69 / 0.82 430 1801676 1801635
NH/4c 6328 U 32 / 25 0.98 / 1.17 1801661 1801621 2, 8, 10
6575 27 / 30 0.69 / 0.82 1801663 1801623
4964 R 32 / 25 0.98 / 1.17 1801670 1801629
6342 27 / 30 0.69 / 0.82 1801672 1801631
N221/10b 4851 U 37 / 30 0.95 / 1.13 870 1801659 1801619 4, 8, 9
4848 40 / 27 1.14 / 1.35 730 1801657 1801617
4849 44 / 23 1.47 / 1.75 560 1801655 1801615
4850 46 / 21 1.68 / 2.00 470 1801653 1801613
201122 183

Gearbox 16S1620, 16S1920, 16S2020, 16S2220 and 16S2320 ( 16.41 - 1.00 )
ratio factor torque
With
[Nm] No
ZF-Intarder
ZF-Intarder
3
N221/10c 6285 O 37 / 30 0.95 / 1.13 870 1801684 1801643 2, 8, 9
6262 40 / 27 1.14 / 1.35 730 1801682 1801641
6217 44 / 23 1.47 / 1.75 560 1801680 1801639
8504 46 / 21 1.68 / 2.00 470 1801678 1801637
6193 U 37 / 30 0.95 / 1.13 870 1801651
6119 40 / 27 1.14 / 1.35 730 1801650
9213 44 / 23 1.47 / 1.75 560 1801649
2630 46 / 21 1.68 / 2.00 470 1801648

6 8.
9.
10.
ZF Manual gearbox Ecosplit 4 - 16 speeds - Overdrive

Gearbox 16S1820, 16S2220, 16S2520 and 16S2720 ( 13.80 - 0.84 )
ratio factor torque With
[Nm] No
ZF-Intard-
ZF-Intarder
er 3
NH/1b 4844 1801647 1801611 1, 7, 9
Z - 0.91 / 1.09 1000
NH/1c 4846 1801645 1801609 2, 7, 9
NH/4b 6327 U 32 / 25 1.17 / 1.40 1801666 1801625 1, 8, 10
6558 27 / 30 0.82 / 0.98 1801668 1801628
4963 R 32 / 25 1.17 / 1.40 1801674 1801633
6329 27 / 30 0.82 / 0.98 430 1801676 1801635
NH/4c 6328 U 32 / 25 1.17 / 1.40 1801661 1801621 2, 8, 10
6575 27 / 30 0.82 / 0.98 1801663 1801623
4964 R 32 / 25 1.17 / 1.40 1801670 1801629
6342 27 / 30 0.82 / 0.98 1801672 1801631
N221/10b 4851 U 37 / 30 1.13 / 1.35 870 1801659 1801619 4, 8, 9
4848 40 / 27 1.35 / 1.62 730 1801657 1801617
4849 44 / 23 1.75 / 2.09 560 1801655 1801615
4850 46 / 21 2.00 / 2.40 470 1801653 1801613

184 201122
ZF Manual gearbox Ecosplit 4 - 16 speeds - Overdrive

Gearbox 16S1820, 16S2220, 16S2520 and 16S2720 ( 13.80 - 0.84 )
ratio factor torque
With
[Nm] No
ZF-Intard-
ZF-Intarder
er 3
N221/10c 6285 O 37 / 30 1.13 / 1.35 870 1801684 1801643 2, 8, 9
6262 40 / 27 1.35 / 1.62 730 1801682 1801641
6217 44 / 23 1.75 / 2.09 560 1801680 1801639
8504 46 / 21 2.00 / 2.40 470 1801678 18016370
6193 U 37 / 30 1.13 / 1.35 870 1801651
6119 40 / 27 1.35 / 1.62 730 1801650
9213 44 / 23 1.75 / 2.09 560 1801649
2630 46 / 21 2.00 / 2.40 470 1801648

8.
9.
10.
6
AS-Tronic - 6 speeds - Overdrive
Gearbox 6AS700 (6.02 - 0.79 )
[Nm]
NL/1b 4844 1609527 1701416 1, 7, 9
Z - 0.57 600
NL/1c 4846 1609528 1701343 2, 7, 9
NL/4b 6327 1609529 1701390 1, 8, 10
U 32 / 25 0.73 350
NL/4c 6328 1609530 1742233 2, 7, 10


ZF Gearbox 6AS800 (6.58 - 0.78) and 6AS1000 (6.75 - 0.78)
[Nm]
NH/1b 4844 800 ( 1609500 1701416 1, 7, 9
NH/1c 6AS800)
Z - 0.53
4846 1000 1609519 1701343 2, 7, 9
(6AS1000)
201122 185

ZF Gearbox 6AS800 (6.58 - 0.78) and 6AS1000 (6.75 - 0.78)
ratio factor torque
PTO Fitting Kit
[Nm]
NH/4b 6327 1609520 1701390 1, 8, 10
U 32 / 25 0.67 350
NH/4c 6328 1609522 1742233 2, 8, 10


ZF Gearbox 6AS1000 (6.75 - 0.78)
[Nm]
6
NL/10b 50 / 22 1.19 480 2, 4, 8,
or c 55 / 17 1.70 320 10
O
only on
58 / 17 2.03 170 POV
+ NL/1 Z - 0.53 600 1, 2, 7, 9
1, 2, 8,
+NL/4 32 / 25 0.67 350
10

AS-Tronic - 12 speeds - Direct drive

ZF Gearbox 12AS1220 and 12AS1420 ( 12.83 - 1.00 )
Type Selco Loc. Gear Speed Max. RAPIDO Notes
NH/1b 4844 1671921 1, 7, 9
Z - 0.80 800
NH/1c 4846 1671922 2, 7, 9
NH/4b 6327 U 1780518 1, 8, 10
4963 R 1780516
32 / 25 1.02
NH/4c 6328 U 1780519 2, 8, 10
4964 R 1780517
430
NH/4b 6558 U 1671925 1, 8,10
6329 R 1671923
27 / 30 0.72
NH/4c 6575 U 1671926 2, 8, 10
6342 R 1671924

186 201122

ZF Gearbox 12AS1220 and 12AS1420 ( 12.83 - 1.00 )
Type Selco Loc. Gear Speed Max. RAPIDO Notes
NM AS/10b 4851 37 / 30 0.99 590 1671980 4, 8, 9
4848 U 40 / 27 1.18 510 1671982
4849 44 / 23 1.53 420 1671984
NM AS/10c 6285 37 / 30 0.99 590 1671978 2, 8, 9
6262 O 40 / 27 1.18 510 1671976
6217 44 / 23 1.53 420 1671974
1. PTO type b, with flange diameter 90 mm, 4-holes

2. PTO type c, with direct pump connection, ISO 7653
4. PTO type b, with flange diameter 100mm, 6-holes
Note: with two active PTO's, NMAS/10b+c, the maximum allowed torque on the lay shaft is reduced to
800Nm. The pump connection is always in the upper and flange connection is in the lower position. 6
ZF Gearbox Gearbox 12AS1420 and 12AS1620 ( 10.37 - 0.81 )
Type Selco Loc. Gear ratio Speed Max. RAPIDO
factor torque reference Notes
[Nm]
NH/1b 4844 1671921 1, 7, 9
Z - 0.99 800
NH/1c 4846 1671922 2, 7, 9
6327 U 1780518 1, 8, 10
NH/4b
4963 R 1780516
32 / 25 1.27 430
6328 U 1780519 2, 8, 10
NH/4c
4964 R 1781517
NH/4b 6558 U 1671925 1, 8, 10
6329 R 1671923
27 / 30 0.89 430
NH/4c 6575 U 1671926 2, 8, 10
6342 R 1671924
NM AS/10b 4851 37 / 30 1.22 590 1671980 4, 8, 9
U
4848 40 / 27 1.47 510 1671982
4849 44 / 23 1.89 420 1671984
NM AS/10c 6285 37 / 30 1.22 590 1671978 2, 8, 9
O
6262 40 / 27 1.47 510 1671976
6217 44 / 23 1.89 420 1671974

201122 187

Note: with two active PTO's, NMAS/10b+c, the maximum allowed torque on the lay shaft is reduced to
800Nm. The pump connection is always in the upper and flange connection is in the lower position.

ZF Gearbox 12AS1930, 12AS2130, 12AS2330 and 12AS2530 ( 12.33 - 0.78 )
ratio factor torque
No With
[Nm] ZF-Intarder ZF-Intarder
NH/1b 4844 1448298 1809375 1, 7, 9
Z - 1.35 1000
NH/1c 4846 1448299 1809376 2, 7, 9
NH/4b 6558 U 1448306 1809374 1, 8, 10
6329 R 1448302 1809373
27 / 30 1.22 430
NH/4c 6575 U 1448307 1809368 2, 8, 10
6 6342 R 1448303 1809367
NAS/10b 8994 U 35 / 32 1.48 710 1448219 1809436 4, 8, 9
8996 32 / 25 1.73 580 1448218 1809435
8995 35 / 22 2.15 490 1448217 1809433
NAS/10c 8989 O 29 / 38 1.03 730 1613796 1809437 2, 8, 9
8987 32 / 35 1.24 720 1613797 1809438
2713 U 29 / 38 1.03 730 1685788 1809453
2716 32 / 35 1.24 720 1685789 1809454
NAS/10b + U 29 / 28 1.40 600 2, 4, 8, 9
8977 1613800 1809442
NAS/10c O 29 / 38 1.03 730
NAS/10b + U 32 / 25 1.73 580 2, 4, 8, 9
9878 1613799 1809440
NAS/10c O 32 / 35 1.24 720
NAS/10b + U 35 / 22 2.15 490 2, 4, 8, 9
8979 1613798 1809439
NAS/10c O 35 / 32 1.48 710

Note: with two active PTO's, NAS/10b+c, the maximum allowed torque on the lay shaft is reduced to
1000Nm. The pump connection is always in the upper and flange connection is in the lower position.

188 201122

ZF Gearbox 12AS1630, 12AS1930, 12AS2130, 12AS2330 and 12AS2540 ( 15.86 - 1.0 )
ratio factor torque No With
NH/1b 4844 1448298 1809375 1, 7, 9
Z - 0.82 1000
NH/1c 4846 1448299 1809376 2, 7, 9
NH/4b 6327 32 / 25 1.05 1448304 1809372 1, 8, 10
U
6558 27 / 30 0.74 1448306 1809374
4963 32 / 25 1.05 1448300 1809369
R
6329 27 / 30 0.74 1448302 1809373
430
NH/4c 6328 32 / 25 1.05 1448305 1809366 2, 8, 10
U
6575 27 / 30 0.74 1448307 1809368
4964 32 / 25 1.05 1448301 1809365
R
6342 27 / 30 0.74 1448303 1809367
N AS/10b 6751 37 / 20 1.51 430 1448210 1809426 4, 8, 9
6750 U 40 / 17 1.93 400 1448209 1809425
N AS/10c
6679
6922
41 / 16
37 / 30
2.10
1.01
360
690
1448208
1613792
1809424
1809429 2, 8, 9
6
6915 O 40 / 27 1.21 670 1613791 1809428
6803 41 / 26 1.29 630 1613790 1809427
8243 37 / 30 1.01 690 1685784 1809452
2633 U 40 / 27 1.21 670 1685783 1809451
2705 41 / 26 1.29 630 1685782 1809450
NAS/10b+ U 37 / 20 1.51 430 2, 4, 8, 9
6965 1613795 1809432
NAS/10c O 37 / 30 1.01 690
NAS/10b+ U 40 / 17 1.93 400 2, 4, 8, 9
6964 1613794 1809431
NAS/10c O 40 / 27 1.21 670
NAS/10b+ U 41 / 16 2.10 360 2, 4, 8, 9
6960 1613793 1809430
NAS/10c O 41 / 26 1.29 630

4. PTO type b with flange diameter 100mm, 6-hole
1000Nm.The pump connection is always in the upper and flange connection is in the lower position.
201122 189

ZF Gearbox 16AS2630 ( 14.12 - 0.83 )
Type Selco Loc. ratio factor torque No With
NH/1b 4844 1448298 1809375 1, 7, 9
Z - 1.11 1000
NH/1c 4846 1448299 1809376 2, 7, 9
NH/4b 6558 U 1448306 1809374 1, 8, 10
6329 R 1448302 1809373
27 / 30 1.00 430
NH/4c 6575 U 1448307 1809368 2, 8, 10
6342 R 1448303 1809367
NAS/10b 8994 U 35 / 32 1.21 710 1448219 1809436 4, 8, 9
8996 32 / 25 1.42 580 1448218 1809435
8995 35 / 22 1.77 490 1448217 1809433
NAS/10c 8989 O 29 / 38 0.85 730 1613796 1809437 2, 8, 9
8987 32 / 35 1.02 720 1613797 1809438
NAS/10b + U 29 / 28 1.15 600 2, 4, 8, 9
6
8977 1613800 1809442
NAS/10c O 29 / 38 0.85 730
NAS/10b + U 32 / 25 1.42 580 2, 4, 8, 9
8978 1613799 1809440
NAS/10c O 32 / 35 1.02 720
NAS/10b + U 35 / 22 1.77 490 2, 4, 8, 9
8979 1613798 1809439
NAS/10c O 35 / 32 1.21 710

1000Nm.The pump connection is always in the upper and flange connection is in the lower position.
Autoshift - 6 speed - Overdrive

Eaton Gearbox 6AH8306 (7.05 - 0.78)
[Nm] only on
[9.] / [10.] POV
442KLJKX-A3XY
0.99 240 / 340
Chelsea RHS
30E8 Hydrocar


190 201122

Manual - 9speeds - Overdrive

Eaton Gearbox FS6309, FS8309 (12.57 - 1.00)
ratio factor torque PTO Fitting Kit only on
[Nm] POV
P2264Q740b 1, 7, 10
R/U
P2264Q742b 1.48 300 4, 7, 10
P2264Q294c 2, 7, 10
P2266Q740b 1, 7, 10
P2266Q742b R/U 25 / 18 1.07 400 4, 7, 10
P2266Q294c 2, 7, 10
81Z2Q15740b 1, 8, 10
81Z2Q15742b Z - 0.77 590 4, 8, 10
81Z2Q15204c 2, 8, 10
6
6.7 SECOND PTO
Second PTO for CF75 - CF85 and XF Series

12AS1220 12AS1220
NM AS/10 12AS1420 12AS1420
in 12AS1620
combination
with 12.83 - 1.00 10.37 - 0.81
Type Selco Loc. Gear Speed Speed PTO

ratio factor factor reference Notes
NL/1b 4853 1399245 3, 7, 9

Z - 0.80 0.99
NL/1c 4855 1399246 2, 7, 9
NL/4b 1817 O 27 / 30 0.72 0.89 1801537 3, 6, 8, 10
1825 32 / 25 1.02 1.27 1801539
6174 U 27 / 30 0.72 0.89 1399304
4996 32 / 25 1.02 1.27 1399250
201122 191
12AS1220 12AS1220
NM AS/10 12AS1420 12AS1420
in 12AS1620
combination
with 12.83 - 1.00 10.37 - 0.81
Type Selco Loc. Gear Speed Speed PTO

ratio factor factor reference Notes
NL/4c 1872 O 27 / 30 0.72 0.89 1801541 2, 6, 8, 10

1873 32 / 25 1.02 1.27 1801545
6538 U 27 / 30 0.72 0.89 1399305
4997 32 / 25 1.02 1.27 1399251

3. Flange diameter 75mm, 6-hole
6. Mounting position O in combination with NM AS/10
U, mounting position U in combination with NM AS/
10 O
9. Duration of operation, continuous at max. torque
6 10.
600Nm
Duration of operation, < 60 min. at max. torque
430Nm
Note: with two active PTO's the maximum allowed torque on the lay shaft is reduced to 800Nm, for the
NMAS/10b+c and to 1000Nm for the NAS/10b+c
8S1620 8S1820 16S1820 16S1620

N221/10 8S2220 16S2020 16S1920
in 16S2220 16S2020
combination 16S2520 16S2220
with 16S2720 16S2320
13.80-1.0 11.54-0.84 13.80-0.84 16.41-1.0

Type Selco Loc. Gear Speed Speed Speed Speed PTO
ratio factor factor factor factor refer- Notes
ence
NL/1b 4853 1399245 3, 7, 9
Z - 0.91 1.09 0.91 /1.09 0.77 / 0.91
NL/1c 4855 1399246 2, 7, 9
NL/4b 6174 U 27 / 30 0.82 0.98 0.82 / 0.98 0.69 / 0.82 1399304 3, 6, 8,
10
4996 32 / 25 1.17 1.40 1.17 / 1.40 0.98 / 1.17 1399250
6155 R 27 / 30 0.82 0.98 0.82 / 0.98 0.69 / 0.82 1399252
4965 32 / 25 1.17 1.40 1.17 / 1.40 0.98 / 1.17 1399247
NL/4c 6538 U 27 / 30 0.82 0.98 0.82 / 0.98 0.69 / 0.82 1399305 2, 6, 8,
4997 32 / 25 1.17 1.40 1.17 / 1.40 0.98 / 1.17 1399251 10
6173 R 27 / 30 0.82 0.98 0.82 / 0.98 0.69 / 0.82 1399302
4966 32 / 25 1.17 1.40 1.17 / 1.40 0.98 / 1.17 1399249

192 201122

3. Flange diameter 75mm, 6-hole
6. Mounting position R in combination with N221/10 U,
mounting position U in combination with N221/10 O
9. Duration of operation, continuous at max. torque
600Nm
10. Duration of operation, < 60 min. at max. torque
430Nm
6.8 TRANSFER BOX
Transfer case PTO

Re-location of the tachograph speed sensor from
outputshaft gearbox to outputshaft transfercase
(to rear-axle) is required.
Also new tachograph calibration is mandatory.
In case the transfercase does not have a 1:1 ratio
between input shaft speed and output shaft
speed (to rear axle) also new vehicle system
software is required.
For the use of PTO's on transfer cases or for the
use of the transfer case as a PTO, you should
6
always contact DAF.
6.9 PTO OPERATION
The cable harnesses of all DAF series are as

standard prepared for PTO control wiring from
the rear of the dashboard central console to the
BBM (for LF Series to VIC) unit and from the BBM
(for LF Series from VIC unit to the bulkhead lead-
through. In the CF and XF series, the wiring from
the bulkhead lead-through to the relevant
electrical connection in the chassis upto the
gearbox i also provided. On LF vehicles, the PTO
switch can be mounted in the dashboard and
directly connected, but on CF and XF vehicles a
switch and a cable harnes is required. All
switchable PTO's are controlled by an electrical
switch on the dashboard, interlock conditions in
the BBM (for LF Series in the VIC) an electric/
pneumatic valve in the chassis and a status
return switch. On vehicles ex-works supplied with
PTO preparation (except for LF and CF65 Series
vehicles equipped with Allison Automatic
Gearboxes), the PTO switch and wiring to BBM
(for LF Series to VIC) is fitted in the reserved
place in the dashboard and also additional wiring
from gearbox to E/Pvalve and the E/Pvalve itself
are fitted.
For PTO control and protection, see chapter
9.11: "LF series PTO control / protection",
10.18: "CF series PTO control / protection", or
11.16: "XF series PTO controls / protection".
201122 193
Dashboard switches are available as accessories

from DAF Parts; for the part numbers concerned
see chapter 13: "Part numbers".
The vehicles of the LF and CF65 Series are
prepared for PTO1 operation only, which is
controlled and checked via the VIC.
The CF65 Serie does have the cab preparation
for two PTO's via VIC, the chassis wiring loom
however is only suitable for one PTO control and
status return.
For the CF75/85 and XF Series, the operating
system for at most 2 PTO's can be supplied ex-
works, although three PTO switch positions are
provided i the dashboard. They can be used, for
instance:
- for a first PTO on the gearbox,
- for a second PTO on the gearbox and
- for an engine-dependent PTO.
For positions reserved for PTO switches, see
chapters 9.1: "LF series cab switch and
connector locations" , 10.1: "CF series cab switch
6 and connector locations", 11.1: "XF series cab
switch and connector locations".
The range of available PTO's is linked to a
specific PTO switch as is shown in the following
table:
PTO1 switch PTO2 switch
Engine PTO --
Engine PTO N../1 or N../4
Engine PTO N../10
Engine PTO Chelsea
-- N../10
N../1 or N../4 N../10
N../1 or N../4 --
NAS/10 b or c --
-- Chelsea
NAS/10 b NAS/10c
For N../10 PTO's, always the version with clutch

protection must be specified.
If an N221/10 PTO is fitted at a later stage, the
electrical system should be adapted (relay G259
should be added).
The N../10 PTO and a Chelsea PTO are always
operated by the PTO2 switch and VIC interlocks.
For further information, consult DAF.

194 201122
6.10 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM
Modifications to the vehicle brake system must

NOT be made without the prior written permission
of DAF.
WARNING! Mechanical damage to
the components of the brake
system, in whatever form, should
always be avoided.
All vehicle series

Air consumers can be connected an unused port
of the air distribution unit (A) of circuit 4 of the
CF75/85 and XF Series (this unit is connected to
port 24 of the APU valve and is located on the left-
hand side of the cab, behind the entrance steps).
The air distribution unit on the FT CF and XF
Series, WB 3.60m and 3.80m only, is located at
the left side of the chassis in between the flanges 28 24
of the K-crossmember.
The LF and CF65 Series, except when equiped 20070604-019
with air suspension or ASR, have an air pipe in Port for connection of air consumers to APU
the right hand side member sealed with a red valve
bung, which should be replaced with a standard
DAF fitting to suit the feed required. Air could also
6
be taken from the auxiliary circuit, port 28, by
removing the blanking plug and fitting an M12
adapter.
201122 195
Various tee couplings and other (L-V) Voss232

NG12 couplings are available for CF75/85 and
XF Series through DAF Parts. Only Voss 232
connectors should be used and only port 2 or 3
can be used. For the part numbers, see the DAF
Parts product range documentation and section
13.11: "Adapters air system".
WARNING! The minimum system
pressure is 8.80.2bar, the maximum
system pressure is 10.40.2bar for
LF, CF and XF Series.
6
R601303
Circuit 4 air distribution unit on tractors 4x2

(CF75/85 and XF Series)

196 201122
General remarks
Before the APU valve and in system circuit 4,
there is no supply of compressed air therefore it
is essential that external air consumers should
only be supplied with air when the vehicle engine
is running.
Furthermore, it is highly important that,
irrespective of circumstances and the volume of
supplied air, the cut-out pressure of the governor
is periodically reached (at least 6 times per hour)
to allow the air dryer element to regenerate while
the compressor is running unloaded.
The regeneration cycles of the air dryer should
always be adhered to, to avoid the possibility of
degeneration of the crystals in the air dryer filter
element as a result of unduly frequent and
prolonged presence of moisture, and also to
prevent freezing in periods of frost.
R601304
Maximum permitted average air consumption

If the compressor is used in accordance with the
method described above, the maximum
permitted average air consumption on CF75-85
and XF vehicles is 70 l/min* (continuous
operation) at engine speeds = 1200 rpm (XF,
CF85) or = 1400 rpm (CF75). The maximum
average air consumption on LF and CF65 Series
is 35 l/min* at 1200RPM
* Air volume at atmospheric pressure.
To guarantee the full compressor service life time
and also meet the statutory requirements for
compressed air systems for trucks, it is important
that:
- the 25% limit of loaded compressor
operation during the load cycle of the air
compressor should not be exceeded. This
means that during any period of 10 minutes
the compressor must not run longer than 2.5
minutes without a break;
- after installation and/or during use of the
external air consumption system, the vehicle
should fully comply with the ECE-R13/09
(EBS brake system) and 98/12EC
(conventional brake systems) directives.
201122 197
If the limit values of the compressor load cycle are

exceeded frequently and/or for longer periods,
this will lead to increased oil consumption and a
shorter service life of the air compressor, the air
dryer/element and the governor valve (APU).
If any of the above-mentioned conditions cannot
be met, the fitting of a second (external)
compressor, combined with a twin-chamber air
dryer, is recommended. The second compressor
can be driven by a PTO or have its own drive unit.
Depending on vehicle type, air system capacity
and vehicle options, extra air tanks can be used
in combination with increased air dryer capacity.
Extra air consumers in the cab
The coupling for extra air consumers in the cab
CF
of CF and XF vehicles is shown in the opposite
C
drawing. The air pipes can directly be connected
to the unused ports. For reasons of safety, it is not C D DD
allowed to connect air consumers at other points XF
of the compressed air system. C
C DDED
6
C= 8 mm
D= 6 mm
E= 4 mm
G000308
Horn
All CF and XF cabs, including Space Cab
versions, are provided with a non-connected 6
mm pipe, running from underneath the driver's
seat via the B pillar to the mounting place for a
horn on the cab roof above the door on the
driver's side.
6.11 AIR FEED, TIPPER

PREPARATION
By ordering the option "air feed/tipper

preparation" Selco 4331, the cab will be prepared
with six air pipes and an indication light, thus
preventing unnecessary opening of the cab
interior panels.
The air pipes wil be positioned from underneath

the floor covering under the driver seat, via the
threshold and a-pillar through the cab floor next to
the steering column. The air pipes will have an
outside diameter of 6mm and protrude appr. 1
meter outside the cab.

198 201122
The tipper indication light will be positioned in the

panel at the LHS of the steering wheel, for LHD
vehicles. Pin 2 and 3, in the black 12 pole
application connector for spare wires for body
functions A103, positioned behind the right front
mudguard can be used to switch on the indication
light.
6.12 HEATING SYSTEM
A heating system for the load area may be

connected to the engine cooling system. Its
effectiveness depends on the amount of residual
heat produced by the engine at that moment. If a
heating system is connected to the engine
cooling system without any further provisions,
this may have an adverse effect on the capacity
of the cab heater. An engine which does not
reach its operating temperature uses more fuel
and, in the longer term, additional engine wear
may occur. Critical factors for the engine
temperature are a low load collective (low GVM/
GCM, level load) and low ambient temperatures. 6
Conditions:
- Use of a system with a thermostat must
ensure that the engine temperature cannot
fall below the minimum operating
temperature, measured before the
thermostat. This body thermostat, if fitted in
the supply line, should open at most 5C
earlier than the engine thermostat.
- The present DAF thermostats meet the
following criteria:
LF and CF65 Se-

CF series XF series
ries
Minimum operating temperature 82C 87C 79C
Opening tem- direct coolant return 85C - 88C 85C - 88C
parture indirect coolant return 82C - 90C
(Automatic transmission 81C - 84C 81C - 84C
or ZF-Intarder)
- Closing temperature 2 to 3C lower than

opening temperature.
- No more than 10 litres, 5 litres for the LF and
CF65 series, may be added to the engine
coolant circuit, in view of the available
capacity of the header tank (not in the case
of transmission cooling).
- The connection to the engine cooling system
on CF75/85 and XF series must be made
parallel to the existing circuit, using pipes
with an inside diameter not exceeding 20
mm. The engine cooling system is supplied
201122 199
with external "indirect" coolant line for all

superstrucure versions. This coolant line
contains a 1 1/4" BSP connection, just before
the thermostat house, which can be used for
connection of supply line for the additional
cooling system of the body builder. The
return line of this system has to be connected
to the coolant pump suction line. In the case
of the CF75 series, DAF should be
consulted.
- The connection to the engine cooling system
on LFand CF65 series must be made
parallel to the existing circuit, using pipes
with an inside diameter not exceeding 15
mm. The coolant feed can be taken from the
coolant port on the engine cylinder head, just
before the thermostat housing. The return
line of this system has to be connected to the
coolant pump suction line.
A connection to the existing heater circuit of the

engine is advised against in all cases because
the (already limited) heater flow will then again be
6 divided, as a result of which line resistance will be

increased and the capacity of both systems will
be reduced.
- The flow through the superstructure circuit is
max. 60 l/min., 30 l/min. for LF and CF65
Series. The nominal capacity of the coolant
pump averages between 400 and 500 l/min,
and around 200 l/min. for LF and CF65
Series, depending on line resistance and
pressure.
- Under these conditions, the drop in engine
temperature (Tengine,av) must not exceed
6C!
- Pipes should, where possible, be fitted in a
straight line, without sagging. Bleed nipples
should be provided at the highest points in
the system. The complete system must
remain positively de-aerating, and must not
trap air.
- If desired, the heating system may be
supplemented with an auxiliary heater. In
that case, an extra header tank should be
added to the system (see general
arrangement drawing). this auxilliary heater
must be controlled such that it cannot
increase the cooling load of the vehicle
radiator.

200 201122
System designs must always be submitted to

DAF for verification!
6
4 5 10
3 9
7
1
7
8
2
97122901-008
Example of a heating system with extra heating unit

1 = engine thermostat
2 = coolant pump
3 = radiator
4
5
6
=
=
=
vehicle header tank
superstructure thermostat
extra heating unit
6
7 = non-return valves
8 = heat exchanger
9 = heater valve
10 = superstructure header tank
201122 201

202 201122
Electrical system general
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM GENERAL

Page Date
7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 201122
7.2 Safety instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 201122
7.3 Circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 201122
7.4 Earth connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 201122
7.5 Wire cross-section and fuse sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 201122
7.6 Charging batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 201122
7.7 Peak voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 201122
7.8 EMC compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 201122
7.9 Maximum load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 201122
7.10 Quiescent current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 201122
7.11 Additional batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 201122
7.12 Additional alternator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 201122
7.13 Connection points and permitted power loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 201122
7.14 DAF dashboardpanel switches and indication lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 201122
7.15 Automated and automatic gearboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 201122
7.16 Electrical retarders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 201122
7.17 Taillift preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 201122
7.18 Axle load monitoring (ALM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 201122
7.19 Guideline for the Customer Parameter Change Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 201122
7.20 Hybrid system LF45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 201122
201122 203

204 201122
7. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM GENERAL

7.1 GENERAL
In many cases, the bodybuilder will connect the

electrical system of the vehicle and that of the
body, together. It is therefore essential that the
following general guidelines be accurately
followed, because the slightest disruption could
result in failure of the complete system or parts of
the system, as a consequence of which the entire
vehicle may cease to operate.
WARNING! It is strictly forbidden to
make an electrical connection to the
wiring of the vehicle, except via the
connection points indicated as such,
by DAF. For suitable connection
points in the cab and on the chassis,
see a description later in this
section.
7.2 SAFETY INSTRUCTION
Electrical equipment added to the electrical
7
system of the chassis may not behave in such a
way that the standard system of the chassis, or
safety in general, is negatively affected.
Under all circumstances, first disconnect the
positive terminal of the battery, when working
on the electrical system.
NOTE: For welding work, follow the
instructions laid down in section
2.3: "Welding on the chassis"
7.3 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
For the electrical (circuit) diagrams for DAF

vehicles refer to the Sales Engineering
department at DAF. Also the local DAF dealer
has electrical diagrams available in the workshop
manuals.
If applicable, the bodybuilder should make
additional circuit diagrams available, which must
be added to the other documentation required to
be kept in the vehicle. In the event of breakdown
and/or repair, this permits more efficient working.
Marking of wiring
The marking system consists of a numerical and
a colour coding system, according to which the
wiring is clearly classified, and connection and
manufacturing errors are avoided.
201122 205
The numerical coding consists of four figures, the

first figure of which refers to the main group and
the colour.
Main group
Power supply (red)
1000 upto 1099 Voltage generation
1100 upto 1199 Power supply before contact
1200 upto 1499 Power supply after contact
Lighting (yellow)
2000 upto 2099 Direction and alarm lighting
2100 upto 2599 External vehicle lighting
2600 upto 2999 Internal vehicle lighting
Warning and control functions (blue)

3000 upto 3399 Engine functions
3400 upto 3999 Vehicle functions
Consumers (black)
4000 upto 4499 Start, stop, engine and glowing functions
7 4500
5500
upto
upto
5499
5999
Vehicle functions
Automatic gearboxes
6000 upto 6999 Special version (not ex-production line; ex-
factory)
Earth (white)
Not marked
9000 upto 9499 Test and signal earth

206 201122
LF, CF & XF105 series

SAE J 1939 / ISO 11898 I-CAN wiring (twisted)
3565 Dedicated Vehicle Controller-Dash Display CAN-L (yellow)
3566 Dedicated Vehicle Controller-Dash Display CAN-H (grey)
SAE J 1939 / ISO 11898 V-CAN wiring (twisted)
3780 Vehicle CAN bus 1 CAN-L (yellow)
3781 Vehicle CAN bus 1 CAN-H (red)
3700 Vehicle CAN bus 2 CAN-L (yellow)
3701 Vehicle CAN bus 2 CAN-H (blue)
SAE J1939 / ISO 11898 FMS-CAN wiring (twisted)
3782 D-CAN CAN-L (yellow)
3783 D-CAN CAN-H (green)
ISO 11992/2 EBS-CAN wiring (twisted)
3558 Dedicated EBS Trailer connection CAN-L (white)
3559 Dedicated EBS Trailer connection CAN-H (blue)
BB-CAN or CANopen
3810 BB-CAN CAN-L (yellow)
3811 BB-CAN CAN-H (orange)
ISO 11992/3 Truck Trailer interfacing (not for LF)
3812
3813
Dedicated TT-CAN (truck-trailer) connection (1)
Dedicated TT-CAN (truck-trailer) connection (1)
CAN-L (white/brown)
CAN-H (white/green)
7
(1) TT-CAN is prepared but not yet released.
7.4 EARTH CONNECTIONS
There are two main ground point locations on a

truck. One is located outside the cabin on the
flywheel housing and one is located inside the
cabin on the bulkhead panel. The main ground
wiring is routed from the batteries to the starter
motor (or very nearby;flywheel housing). From
this point the power ground to the cabin is
connected as follows:
1. The ground point on the flywheel housing
may only be used for grounding electrical
consumers that consume large electrical
currents (>20A) and have no connections to
the CAN network.
2. The ground point on the bulkhead lead
through must be used for grounding all CAN G000460
systems and all other "low current" (<20A) or
cabin (max40A) systems. If more power then
40A in the cabine is needed an extra ground
wire must be routed between flywheel
housing and cabin.
201122 207
WARNING! It is not permitted to

make a connection (splice) to the
white wiring with numerical coding
9000 to 9500. This is the central
signal grounding system for all DAF
electronic components in the
vehicle.
WARNING! It is not allowed to

connect any ground wires to other
points than the 2 main ground points
(e.g. directly on the chassis or cabin
body). This is to avoid any ground
loops or interference with DAF
systems.
WARNING! Grounding directly on

the battery ground terminal should
also be avoided for the same reason
as mentioned above.
7.5 WIRE CROSS-SECTION AND

FUSE SIZES
Each wire in the truck should be protected by a
7
fuse that is matching its wire size otherwise
melting isolation could occur as a result of
overload or short circuit.Seperate fuses are
needed to avoid result damage when a fuse
blows (avoiding loss of system functions that did
not cause the fuse to blow). If clustering can not
be avoided, the additional function loss must be
weighted. As a general rule, clustering is only
allowed for simular functions and accessories
(not for drive line- and CAN systems).The
minimum cross-section of cables is shown in the
following table. Above all for higher currents, the
cable length should be kept as short as possible.
Cross-section wiring in relation to (continuous) current strength [amp.]
Wire cross-section < 3 m. < 6 m. < 9m. > 9 m.
[mm2]
1 9 5 4 -
1.5 22.5 13.5 7.5 6
2.5 37.5 22.5 12.5 10
4 60 36 20 16
6 90 54 30 24
10 150 90 50 40
16 240 144 80 64
25 375 225 125 100
35 525 315 175 140
50 750 450 250 200
70 1050 630 350 280

208 201122
Cross-section wiring in relation to (continuous) current strength [amp.]

Wire cross-section < 3 m. < 6 m. < 9m. > 9 m.
[mm2]
95 1425 855 475 380
120 1800 1080 600 480
The minimum wire cross-section for the

connection cable between the starter motor and
the batteries depends on the length of the cables.
Because for the starter motor cabling, the high
current levels are of a short duration only, the
permitted current per length category may be
increased by a factor of 1.5.
The cable used should be of automotive quality
and have temperature resistance upto 120C
minimum.
7.6 CHARGING BATTERIES
When charging the batteries, both battery cables

must be disconnected. Then first connect the
'positive clamp' of the charger to the 'positive
terminal' of the battery. Then connect the
'negative clamp' to the 'negative terminal'.
Only use a 'quick charger' if the batteries are
7
disconnected from the vehicle. During 'normal
charging' (< 28.5 volt charge voltage), the battery
clamps may remain connected.
Also ensure a well ventilated environment, and
avoid sparks and open flames. Following
charging, first switch off the charger. On then
remove the 'negative clamp' followed by the
'positive clamp'.
WARNING! The battery cables may
not be removed with the engine
running.
First allow frozen batteries to

defrost, before charging.
Electronic components are

extremely sensitive to overloading
of the electrical circuit. High
voltages or long-term overloading
can damage the built-in fuses and
subsequently the components in
such a way that the components
require replacement.
NOTE: If assisted starting is considered

please consult on beforehand the
appropriate procedure as described in
the drivers manual .
201122 209
7.7 PEAK VOLTAGES
Peak voltages
All power consumers to be added must be +
protected against inductive peak voltages.
A diode protection system according to the a
following circuit diagram may be installed.
Inductive peak voltages at a minimum of 50 Hz
may not exceed 40 V. Above this level, the
electrical system may be damaged. The b
protection diode should be positioned as close as
min.
possible to the power consumer causing the peak 50 Hz
voltages.
c
See the following circuit diagram
a = fuse d
max.
b = switch 40V
c = diode
d = power consumer
96120404-640
7.8 EMC COMPATIBILITY
Electromagnetic compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) should be
7 taken to mean the degree of insensitivity of
electrical systems to electromagnetic
interference (EMI). EMI interference can be
broken down into the following classifications:
1. Interference caused by magnetic fields
which are in principle present close to all
electrical appliances. Major sources of
interference include transmission masts (e.g.
for radio, television and mobile telephony)
and electricity pylons.
2. Electromagnetic radiation generated by
components in the vehicle itself. Major
sources of interference are the generator,
electromagnets, motors for electrical window
operation, etc. and electronic units.
3. The influence of the systems upon one
another, caused by switching signals.
In order to minimise the influence of
electromagnetic interference, the bodybuilder
should take account of the following points of
departure:
- electronic systems added to the DAF chassis
must be certified according to EMI legislation
2004/104/EEC;
- for every system, a separate power supply
wire and earth should be used. Only the
power supply points and earths should be
used, as described in the DAF After Sales
system manuals (see various info in this
section);

210 201122
- the wiring should be positioned as close as

possible to the DAF cable harness in the cab
and in the chassis; always install the cable
harness on the inside of the chassis, in order
to prevent external radiation from
electromagnetic fields, as far as possible;
- the wiring for components sensitive to EMI
(consult with suppliers) must be twisted;
- excessively long wiring must be shortened,
and the use of loops must be avoided; by
carefully tying the cable harness, sensitivity
can be reduced.
Generally speaking, portable telephones and
transmitting equipment without an external
antenna should not be used in the cab. The
extremely high field strengths generated by these
appliances in the cab can result in irregular
behaviour or failure of electronic systems. Such
equipment can also be harmful to health,
because of the high electromagnetic fields.
Installation should therefore be carried out by
approved installation stations, whereby the
correct connection of the external antenna must
be verified.
The use of handheld portable telephones close to
a vehicle with the contact switched on must be
7
avoided.
For 27MC, 2m band and satellite communication
equipment, the same applies as for portable
telephones.
NOTE: Minimum currents for input and
output signals of 8mA is required. The
recommended value is 20 mA. This to
ensure that no disturbance due to
environmental conditions occurs.
Also in case of lower currents used, an
error detection due to too low load on
the wire connected can occur
(depending on the application)
NOTE: Digital input signals comply to

IEC1131-2 type 2 inputs, unless
otherwise stated.
PNP only
Level0 U<5V
Level1 U>11V
NOTE: Digital output signals comply to

specification below, unless otherwise
stated.
PNP only
Level0 U<2V
Level1 U>11V
Max power see system or application
specification
201122 211
7.9 MAXIMUM LOAD
The electrical system may be additionally loaded

to the following values:
Maximum extra (continuous) load for electrical system in watts
Chassis type Alternator 80A/24V Alternator 100A/24V
LF series 35A/840W 45A/1080W
CF series 30A/720W 40A/960W
XF series 15A/360W 25A/600W
The vehicles are equipped with two series-

connected batteries. Additional power
consumers can be connected at a number of
points in the electrical system. In the event of brief
high peak loads of the electrical network (>100A),
it is recommended that a 2nd battery set be
installed. At peak loads of more than 150A, a 2nd
battery set must be installed. See section
7.11: "Additional batteries".
WARNING! Additional power
consumers must at all times be fitted
with a separate fuse. See the
sections 9.1: "LF series cab switch
and connector locations", 10.1: "CF
7 series cab switch and connector
locations" and 11.1: "XF series cab
switch and connector locations".
7.10 QUIESCENT CURRENT
The required battery size is mainly determined by

2 factors:
1. The vehicle quiescent current
2. The required battery lifetime (which is very
much depending on the amount of electrical
consumers that are mounted on the vehicle.
The quiescent current is the electrical current that
is drawn from the batteries when the vehicle is
parked with all the electrical systems shut off.
According to the DAF standards it must be
possible to start the vehicle at -20C with 50%
discharged batteries. It is also a standard that a
vehicle should start after 3 weeks standstill (when
parked with fully charged batteries). This means
that the maximum total quiescent current for a
vehicle is depending on the battery size,
configuration and the maximum battery charge
level. On a vehicle the maximum reachable
charge level is about 85% of the rated capacity.
The table below gives an overview for most
batteries that are used.

212 201122
Battery type Maximum quiescent current

140Ah SHD (1) 97 mA
175Ah SHD 122 mA
225Ah SHD 156 mA
(1) Super Heavy Duty
7.11 ADDITIONAL BATTERIES
The parts required for connecting additional

batteries (for example for a tail lift) can be
supplied by DAF Parts. Before additional
batteries are installed, ensure that the alternator
capacity is sufficient to charge all batteries. If this
is not the case, a heavier-duty or additional
alternator can be installed. The dividing relay
should be positioned as close as possible to the
additional batteries. The fuse for the additional
power consumer will depend on the load.
Minimum wire cross-section to second battery is
50 mm2.
LF/CF/XF
a = control relay c VIC
7
b = dividing relay C42
c = diode 30 86
d = fuse a
e = power consumer 87 85
250A
d
24V 24V
G000283
VIC C42 = engine running signal.

The 'engine running' signal is used for controlling
the dividing relay. This signal can be found in the
table 'Bulkhead lead-through for body functions'
(see section 'Cab connection points' of the LF, CF
or XF series).
On LF wire 3003 on all models
On CF wire 3157 on all models
On XF wire 3157 on all models
201122 213
7.12 ADDITIONAL ALTERNATOR
It is desirable that the additional alternator has

the same capacity as the original alternator, as
well as an integrated voltage regulator.
Differences in voltage regulation and capacity
can result in a shorter service life of one of the two
components.
Mechanical damage to electrical components or
wiring, in whatever form, must at all times be
avoided. Use original cable thickness and
connectors.
LF, CF and XF series
Signal VIC D28 ( LF series) or D29 (CF and XF 1000
series) is the L-signal from the alternator (wire 1010
number 1020). This wire is also located in the 10A 5A
bulkhead lead-through. E143 E279
NOTE: This signal also contains 1234 3084

diagnosis information from the
alternator voltage regulator. The signal L L
is therefore not always 'high' when the B+ W 15 B+ W 15

engine is running. This makes it less (B)S (B)S
suitable for protection purposes. DFM DFM
Moreover, at most one extra mini-relay
(150mA 24V) can be connected to it.
7 B-
1020
B- VIC
D29
M diode 1A
G001265
7.13 CONNECTION POINTS AND

PERMITTED POWER LOADS
Permitted loads
In the different application connectors power and
ground connections for the body builder are
available. These power and ground connections
are protected by fuses. The power and ground
connections in these application connectors can
be combined with one and the same fuse. These
fuses are used not only for the application power
but also for the different vehicle systems. Thats
why the netto power available for applications is
less than the power on the fuse.To protect the
electrical installation of the vehicle it is very
important to know the maximum allowed total
netto power that can be disapated via the
different power connections. In the table below an
overview of all the power connections in the
different application connectors is made together
with the fuses were they are connected to:

214 201122
Power connections KL30

fuse power wire application connector pin nr. Total
Power
(netto)
E048 15A 1113 A001 (connector Trailer 7-pole) 4 12A
A058 (connector trailer 15-pole 9
A070 (connector application superstructure 8-pole) 1
A095 (connector application garbage truck) 5
A117 (connector trailer 13-pole) A
E043 25A 1119 A004 (connector trailer ABS/EBS 7-pole) 1 20A
E036 15A 1103 A007 (connector accessoiries 24V 2-pole) 2 12A
E431 5A 1131 A011 (connector accessoiries 12V 2-pole) 2 4A
E168 40A 1175 A038 (connector accessories 40A 2-pole) 1 32A
E142 25A 1154 A095 (connector application garbage truck) 9 16A
A102 (connector body builder 8-pole) 1
A105 (connector body builder open CAN 7-pole) 1
A106 (connector CAN-cab 9-pole) 1
E084 10A 1101 A097 (connector FMS 21-pole) 11 8A
A097 (connector FMS 21-pole) 17
A100 (connector HD-OBD diagnosis) 16
A140 (connector extra camera 1-pole) 1
E145 15A 1163 A108 (connector diagnosis AGC-A) B 12A
Power connections KL15

7
fuse power wire application connector pin nr. Total Pow-
er (netto)
E053 10A 1229 A100 (connector HD-OBD diagnosis) 1 8A
E091 15A 1240 A043 (connector driver seat 2-pole) 1 12A
A068 (connector ESC - chassis) 12
4C (connector ESC Cabin) 12
E163 25A 1258 A088 (connector Tailift ) 4 16A
A102 (connector body builder 8-pole) 2
A123 (connector Hydraulic Platform) 12
A125 (connector Hydraulic Platform feed through) 7
12D (connector body builder 21-pole) 21
NOTE: Minimum currents for input and

output signals of 8mA is required. The
recommended value is 20 mA. This to
ensure that no disturbance due to
environmental conditions (EMC See
7.8: "EMC compatibility") occurs.
In case of lower currents used, an error
detection due to too low load on the
wire connected can occur (depending
on the application).
201122 215
NOTE: Digital input signals comply to

IEC1131-2 type 2 inputs, unless
otherwise stated.
PNP only
Level0 U<5V
Level1 U>11V
NOTE: Digital output signals comply to

specification below, unless otherwise
stated.
PNP only
Level0 U<2V
Level1 U>11V
Max power see system or application
specification
7.14 DAF DASHBOARDPANEL

SWITCHES AND INDICATION
LIGHTS
The panel switches for the LF, CF and XF series

are exchangeable. (the header shelf switches on
LF series are not exchangeable with dashboard
panel switches)
Switches are available which also have a function
7 indication (LED) in the switch.For an overview of

available switch part numbers and symbol
glasses, see section 13.9: "Switches".
For more information about the location of the
cab switches see the here listed sections:
- Section 9.1: "LF series cab switch and
connector locations" for the LF cab
- Section 10.1: "CF series cab switch and
connector locations" for the CF cab
- Section 11.1: "XF series cab switch and
connector locations" for the XF cab
NOTE: Current series LF, CF and XF
have all amber LED illumination as
search light. This is not suited as
function indication.
NOTE: For indication lamps, a lamp

holder with two lamps (24V) is
available, in the shape of a switch.
Additional indication lamps can
therefore be placed in the dashboard, in
design style. Identical symbol glasses
as used with the switches can be used
here.
Next to this a LED indication (single red
LED) in similar housing is available.
See section 13.8: "Indication lamps" .

216 201122
7.15 AUTOMATED AND AUTOMATIC

GEARBOXES
LF series and CF65

The LF series and CF65 offer both automated
and automatic transmissions. These gearboxes
do not have an application connector as
standard.
CF75 and CF85 series
Vehicles fitted with an Allison automatic gearbox,
are as standard equipped with an 2-pole
application connector (connector code 175C) in
the central box in the cab.
There will be three executions available;
1. Refuse collector application
2. Fire brigade application
3. Standard application
REFUSE COLLECTOR APPLICATION
Software package 126.
Specific features are :
- Auto neutral-auto drive function for Stop&Go
- Shifting form forward to reverse or reverse to
forward gear only enabled at vehicle speed below
3km/h and engine speed below 900 RPM.
- 6 speed setup
7
STANDARD APPLICATION
Specific features are:
- For all application not being refuse or fire
brigade
- Shifting form froward to reverse or reverse to
forward gear only enabled at vehicle speed below
3km/h and engine speed below 900 RPM
- 6 speed setup
FIRE BRIGADE APPLICATION
Specific features are:
- Auto neutral function
- Shifting form froward to reverse or reverse to
forward gear only enabled at vehicle speed up to
8km/h and engine speed below 900 RPM
- No auto drive function
- 5 gear setup
The following functions are prepared as standard,

ex-factory:
1. Automatic neutral with PTO
2. Automatic neutral when stationary and PTO
3. Foot board protection (combined with Vmax
application)
201122 217
AUTOMATIC NEUTRAL WITH PTO

This facility is standard on all vehicles with a PTO
controlled via the Body Builder Module (BBM),
and is intended for fire engines.
To prevent pumping being carried out whilst the
transmission is in "DRIVE", the transmission is
forced into neutral. To shift back to "Drive", the
driver must first switch off the PTO, the engine
speed must be below 900 rpm, and "D" must be
pressed on the shift selector.
If this function is required (refuse vehicle), it has
to be enabled in the BBM using DAVIE XD for
programming customer parameters. The function
can be enabled for PTO1 and PTO2 separately.
AUTOMATIC NEUTRAL WITH ESC
controlled via the Body Builder Module (BBM),
and is intended for fire engines.
To prevent pumping being carried out whilst the
transmission is in "DRIVE", the transmission is
forced into neutral. To shift back to "Drive", the
driver must first switch off the PTO, the engine
speed must be below 900 rpm, and "D" must be
7 pressed on the shift selector.

programming customer parameters.
AUTOMATIC NEUTRAL WITH PARKBRAKE
controlled via the Body Builder Module (BBM).
To prevent heating up the torque converter or
pumping being carried out whilst the transmission
is in "DRIVE", the transmission is forced into
neutral. To shift back to "Drive", the driver must
first switch off the PTO, the engine speed must be
below 900 rpm, and "D" must be pressed on the
shift selector.
programming customer parameters.
AUTOMATIC NEUTRAL POSITION WHEN
STATIONARY (and operating PTO)
This option is not available ex-factory, but is
prepared. If this function is required (refuse
vehicle), it has to be enabled in the BBM using
DAVIE XD for programming customer
parameters.
Ensure that this function cannot be used in
combination with the function AUTOMATIC
NEUTRAL WITH PTO.

218 201122
The function is intended for refuse vehicles. It

provides for the selection of neutral if the PTO is
operated, the brake pedal is operated and the
vehicle is stationary. The transmission remains in
neutral until "DRIVE" is selected.
FOOT BOARD PROTECTION
The foot board switch (EN1501) can be
connected to the transmission control system. If
this is done, the transmission can only be set to
neutral or first gear.
This functionality is available only in combination
with the option "Refuse prepared" (see chapter
10.19: "Refuse preparation CF75 - CF85
Series").
The maximum vehicle speed must be set in the
engine management system (Vmax application
see chapter 10.13: "CF65 series ESC system").
PTO OPERATION PARAMETERS
If the transmission is fitted with a switchable (on/
off) PTO on the transmission, the PTO operation
is controlled by a number of parameters, which
together constitute the cut-in and cut-out
conditions as used within the ALLISON control
unit. Next to this the interlocks in the BBM are
valid. See chapter 10.18: "CF series PTO control
/ protection". 7
Overview of cut-in and cut-out conditions for PTO's
Parameter Standard setting Limit values Notes
Maximum engine speed for 1163 rpm 500 - 1940 rpm PTO protection < (1400
PTO (1) cut-in rpm/PTO ratio)
Maximum drive shaft speed for 250 rpm 60 - 5000 rpm
PTO cut-in
Maximum engine speed during 4000 rpm 380 - 4000 rpm
(2)PTO operation
Maximum drive shaft speed 1500 rpm 60 - 5000 rpm

during PTO operation
(1) The PTO can only be switched on if both the engine speed and the drive shaft speed are lower than the pre-programmed
parameter value.
(2) The PTO is automatically switched off if either the engine speed or the drive shaft speed exceed the pre-programmed parameter.
INCREASED ENGINE SPEED

If the engine is operating at an increased engine
speed, and the vehicle is stationary, the
automatic gearbox should be in neutral. This
means that the activation of an increased engine
speed should also be passed on to the
transmission control system.
To make sure this happens we advise to activate
the "Enable engine speed control" or " Enable
N_variable" with wire 5149 in connector 4D (see
chapter 12.6: "Connector 4C ESC system").
201122 219
Note: In fire engine application the use of this

function may differ from that in other vehicle
applications.
For all other applications, the selection of
increased engine speed must be passed on to
the transmission control system. This is for two
reasons:
1. When the engine is running at increased
speed, and the vehicle is stationary, the
transmission must be in neutral.
2. If the vehicle is required to drive with
Nvariable, N1, N2, or N3 active, it is
necessary that the transmission briefly
interrupts the increased engine speed when
switching from neutral to "DRIVE". This is not
possible at engine speeds higher than 900
rpm.
re1) ESC in neutral position
To ensure that the neutral position is selected
when the ESC functions are activated,
re2) ESC during "DRIVE"
This function is possible, but can result in serious
problems.
7 If additional braking is required, because a lower
speed than creep speed is required, the
interlocks of the ESC function will cause the ESC
to be disabled. Re-engagement will be
necessary. On the other hand, there is also a risk
of overheating the transmission oil, if the engine
speed is too high in relation to speed. The
MAXIMUM limit applicable here is 1000 rpm for a
MAXIMUM of 60 sec. If this becomes relevant,
activation of the function AUTOMATIC NEUTRAL
POSITION WHEN STATIONARY is always
recommended.
If one the standard settings does not agree with
the desired application please consult DAF.
XF series
The XF series is only available with automated
AS-Tronic gearboxes. For control, protection and
settings, see section 11.16: "XF series PTO
controls / protection".
7.16 ELECTRICAL RETARDERS
The installation of an electrical retarder on the

gearbox or in the driveline requires a 'statement
of no objection' from DAF. The installation
drawing (to be submitted in duplicate) should
show the following details:
- position of the retarder,
- position and angles of the driveline,

220 201122
- power supply,
- freedom of movement,
- suspension of the retarder on the chassis,
- performance of the retarder,
- retarder cooling, if applicable,
- shielding of heat-sensitive components
(such as pipes).
WARNING! On vehicles with EBS
braking system it must be
investigated how the installation can
be done in such manner that the
service braking system is not
influenced. Always contact DAF for
support.
For the installation of non-electrical retarders,

DAF should also be consulted. Software
modifications will very likely be necessary.
Contact DAF for support.
NOTE: The software needed to achieve
desired functionality may not be
available yet, but is released on
demand.
This means that leadtime may be upto
6 weeks. Please make your enquiries in
time!
7
7.17 TAILLIFT PREPARATION
As an option a preparation for connecting a taillift

is available for LF/CF and XF. By ordering the
option (2597), Application connector taillift, the
vehicle will be equipped with chassis wiring and
cab electrics, including starter interrupt when
taillift is open, off/standby switch and 2 indication
lamps on a switch position.
Application
The connector has been defined by the VEHH.
The VEHH is a group of European Taillift
manufacturers, which consists of participants:
AMF, Br, Behrens, Dautel, Dhollandia, MBB,
Meiller and Srensen. See the illustrations in
sections 9.3: "LF and CF65 series chassis
connections" or 10.3: "CF75 and CF85 series
chassis connections" for the location of the 7-pole
connector.
WARNING! The starter interrupt
wiring is always available when
selco 2597 is ordered but starter
interrupt functionallity is only
available when the A088
connections are made according the
VEHH standard which is
responsibility of the taillift
manufacturer.
201122 221
Check section 12.29: "Connector A088 taillift

system 7-pole" for additional information on
pinning and wire numbers within this connector
used.
Check section 12.11: "Connector 12D body
builder" for additional information on pinning and
wire numbers within this connector used.
7.18 AXLE LOAD MONITORING (ALM)
General
Axle Load monitoring is an option on CF75/85
and XF series (not available on the CF65 Series).
This system allows you to read the actual axle
loads. The system uses pressure sensors that
are mounted in the air bellows and that convert
the pressure into tons. The weight of the load can
be determined on the basis of these axle loads.
The information menu on the master display
shows the actual axle load for each axle. The axle
load is only shown when the ignition is turned on
and the vehicle is stationary.
Axle load information
FT vehicles
7
In the menu, select 'axle load information' to
display the axle loads. The displayed axle load
(A) is the overall weight on the axle (load + own
weight). The displayed axle load (A) on a vehicle
with a leaf-sprung front axle is calculated by the
system.
If a small arrow (B) is shown in the bottom right-
hand corner of the display, the menu selection A
switch can be used to retrieve information on the
semi-trailer.
4.0 2.0
(x 1000Kg)
D001150
Semi-trailers
In order to display the axle loads on a semi-trailer,
the following conditions have to be met: The
semi-trailer must have an EBS brake system or
air suspension that supports axle load B +0
monitoring.
On semi-trailers with axle load monitoring, all
C A
individual axle loads are shown.
On semi-trailers without axle load monitoring but
with EBS, only the overall axle load of all axles is
shown in the display.
2.0 2.0 2.0
On semi-trailers with neither EBS nor axle load (x 1000Kg)
monitoring only the axle load of the prime mover D001154
is shown.
If a small arrow (C) is shown in the bottom left-
hand corner of the display, the menu selection
prime mover.

222 201122
FA vehicles
When the 'axle load information' function is
selected in the menu, a number of axle loads (A)
are either or not shown, depending on the vehicle
configuration. The value (B) which is displayed in +0.0 B
the vehicle, indicates the weight of the load.
It depends on the type of the vehicle whether or
not the axle load values are shown. For instance, A C
the axle load on a leaf-sprung front axle is not
shown. All the axle loads on a fully air suspended 3.5 3.0 3.0
prime mover are always shown. (x 1000Kg)
If a small arrow (C) is shown in the bottom right- D001151
semi-trailer.
Trailer
In order to display the axle loads on a trailer, the
following conditions have to be met: The trailer
must have an EBS brake system or air
suspension that supports axle load monitoring. B +11.0
On a trailer with axle load monitoring, all
individual axle loads are shown.
On a trailer without axle load monitoring but with
C A
EBS, only the overall axle load of all axles is
shown in the display.
On a trailer with neither EBS nor axle load
8.0 8.0
(x 1000Kg)
7
monitoring only the axle load of the prime mover
is shown. D001155
If a small arrow (C) is shown in the bottom left-

prime mover.
Reset loading weight
When the 'reset loading weight' function is
selected, the actual axle load (A) will be used as
a reference.
In this way it can be determined how much weight
has been added or removed. Reset will put the +0.0 B
loading weight (B) on 0.0. When the vehicle is
loaded or unloaded, the indicate loading weight
will increase or decrease.
A C
3.5 3.0 3.0
(x 1000Kg)
D001151
Axle overload warning

When the maximum load for an axle is exceeded,
a warning will be shown on the master display.
This warning can be suppressed by pressing the
menu selection switch.
Each time the warning is suppressed by means of
the menu selection switch, the value for the
maximum load is increased by 500 kg.
It is advised to set the value for the maximum axle
load somewhat below the legal maximum axle
load.
201122 223
The DAF Service dealer can set the value for the
maximum axle load.
7.19 GUIDELINE FOR THE

CUSTOMER PARAMETER
CHANGE FORM
This information highlights the existence and purpose of the customer parameter change form(s) that can
be used by bodybuilders to inform a DAF dealer of changes that have to be made in the customer param-
eter list in order to effectively store this information. Please note that the parameter change forms list only
a few of the Customer Parameter ID's available within the different ECU units. Contact the DAF Dealer
for more information.
Demonstrated in the illustration at the end of this section is that by completing the ID-cart change proce-
dure all changed parameter information will be stored in the DAF After Sales RAPIDO parts file system.
Purpose of the parameter change form

The customer parameter change form aims to support the communication between bodybuilder and DAF
Dealer by providing a standardised form wherein all wishes and implemented changes can be document-
ed and made ready for easy archiving into the After Sales RAPIDO parts file system.
Using the customer parameter change form is strongly advised to ensure that the
service settings of these parameters are not lost and always available for the com-
plete DAF service network.
7 Work method
DAF dealers, being the actual ECU programmers via the DAVIE-XD service analyzing tool, receive the
completed parameter change form from the bodybuilder/customer. The here mentioned issues are to con-
sidered before submitting the form:
- Choose the right parameter change form for the vehicle series at hand as both forms list different
customer parameter ID's and ECU designations. The empty tables at the end of the parameter
change form can be used for expanding the list of changes if needed.
The parameter change forms can be downloaded from the "Information Sheet' webpage that is part
of the Bodybuilder webpages.
(The Internet URL for the corporate DAF website is: www.daf.com -> follow the main menu item:
"Products" -> Bodybuilder guidelines webpage -> Information Sheet webpage).
- All parties involved should sign the parameter change form to confirm correct communication and
programming of the ECU units and preferably store a copy of it at the dealership, the bodybuilder
and in the serviced vehicle itself.
- It is strongly advised to add a detailed description of the changes that are proposed to enable better
understanding of the chosen parameter settings/values by all parties. Important: DAF headquarters
can archive your settings but will not evaluate the created parameter configuration; this remains at
all time the responsibility of the DAF dealer and bodybuilder/customer.
- Enabling specific functionality may require changed values/settings for several customer parameters
simultaneously within the same or possibly another ECU unit.
- Please use the symbol to clearly indicate your choices.
ID-card change procedure

The changed parameter settings can be communicated to DAF headquarters by the DAF Dealer with the
MESSAGE form that is part of the After Sales RAPIDO parts file system. The submitted MESSAGE form
will initiate the RAPIDO database file update and distribution to the DAF dealer network.

224 201122
Important:
- Changed customer parameter settings/values that are communicated to DAF will be stored in free text
fields within the RAPIDO parts file system and DO NOT REPLACE the factory default parameter set-
tings within the database file itself.
- During reprogramming of a ECU unit a choice must be made whether to overwrite all (changed and
unchanged) customer parameters present in the ECUs with the default values as they were ex-fac-
tory or only the unchanged ones.
7.20 HYBRID SYSTEM LF45
WARNING! Hazardous Voltage; You

may be severely injured or killed if
you do not follow this procedure.
Components marked with the High
Voltage sign or the High Voltage
HYBRID
Orange cables should be avoided.
Interfering with these components,
including disconnecting the High
Voltage Orange cables must only be
performed by DAF certified
technicians.
WARNING! Servicing of Hybrid V301401
related system components is only

allowed to be carried out by DAF
certified technicians.
7
5
4
3
2
V301403
201122 225
General component description of the hybrid

LF45
In comparison to a conventional LF a large
number of components remained unchanged
while other components have dissapeared or
changed for the hybrid system.
To qualify as a hybrid the vehicle has two sources
of power
- The first is a conventional system made up of
the diesel engine in combination with an
Eaton automated transmission.
- The second is a Motor/Generator that can
either drive the transmission or assist the
diesel engine.
The LF Hybrid has a conventional FR engine,
electronically controlled clutch (ECA), motor/
generator (4), and an Eaton UltraShift
transmission (3).
The Motor/Generator (4) can either act as a
motor to drive the vehicle or as a generator during
deceleration (regenerative braking).
Similar to any electric motor, a power supply will
be needed.
The hybrid system has a power electronics
carrier (PEC) (1) which stores the high voltage
batteries and relays.
7 The batteries store and discharge DC current.

An inverter (2) is needed to convert DC and AC
voltage as it is discharged back and forth from the
batteries and the motor/generator (4).
The motor/generator (4) uses 3-phase AC current
to operate, and generates 3-phase AC current
regenerative braking.
Therefore, the inverter (2) is fitted in between the
motor /generator (4) and the power electronics
carrier (PEC) (1) to handle this requirement.
The motor/generator (4) and inverter (2) need to
be cooled to keep the temperature within certain
levels.
For this a cooling system which functions
separately from the vehicle's cooling system is
fitted.
It has also no connections with the cooling circuit
of the vehicle, and uses a seperate cooling pump
and headertank (5).
Most of the Hybrid system's fuses and relays are
fitted in the relaybox (6).

226 201122
Extra warning notes and safety guidelines

WARNING! Hazardous Voltage; You
may be severely injured or killed if
you do not follow the procedure.
Components marked with the High
Voltage sign or the High Voltage
HYBRID
Orange cables should be avoided.
Interfering with these components,
including disconnecting the High
Voltage Orange cables must only be
performed by DAF certified
technicians.
WARNING! It is only allowed by the V301401
DAF certified technicians to service

Hybrid system related components.
WARNING! The DAF certified Hybrid

technician is responsable for the
Hybrid vehicles in the workshop.
This means that:
- The Hybrid certified technician makes sure

that non certified technicians can perform
work on non-Hybrid components.
- The Hybrid certified technician is responsible
for all work related to the Hybrid system.
- The Hybrid certified technician is responsible
for a safe enviroment around the vehicle as
long as it is in the workshop.
7
- The Hybrid certified technician has informed
and instructed collegeus about do's and
dont's.
- The Hybrid certified technician has informed
and instructed the driver about do's and
dont's
NOTE: Because there is no certified
technician in the workshop of the
bodybuilder, the bodybuilder should
ask a certified dealer about the different
items mentioned above.
WARNING! For high voltage

systems in general, special
requirements have to be taken into
account. These legal requirements
are:
- Europe: ECE R100
- Germany: BG, VDE, ZDK
WARNING! Working on non Hybrid

components by the bodybuilder is
allowed however it is recommended
that the High Voltage system is
isolated from the vehicle by
ensuring the red Service Button on
the PEC is pressed fully in.
201122 227
WARNING! Under no circumstances

should the High Voltage orange
cables be painted. It is a legal
requirement that High Voltage
cables remain coloured orange.
WARNING! Under no circumstances

should the engine be run when the
High Voltage orange cables are
disconnected and the electrical
connector on the Hybrid motor is
unprotected.
NOTE: A hybrid vehicle with an isolated

High Voltage system can be recognized
by a pushed in Service Button (red
button item number 1) and secured by
the lockout service bracket. 1
NOTE: However, even when the Power

Electrics Carrier (PEC) is isolated from
the vehicle the motor/generator will
generate a high voltage if the input
shaft of the gearbox is turned.
Therefore a running engine in
combination with a closed clutch will
lead to high voltage generation by the
motor/generator.
7 NOTE: It is not allowed to (dis) G001292
assemble any component of the hybrid PEC unit without locking block over isolation
system or to tap into its water cooling button
system. Hybrid system components
and their (high voltage) wiring are
subject of specific guidelines; therefore
always contact a certified DAF dealer.
1
NOTE: Special requirements are in
place related to painting the LF45
chassis and components; see chapter:
1.8: "Painting the chassis and
components".
NOTE: The red coloured service switch

located on the side of the PEC unit must
always be accessible in order to shut
down the electric system (e.g. isolating
of the high voltage). If such situation
occurs a comprehensive Emergency G001291
Shutdown procedure is to be adhered PEC unit with locking block over isolation button
to.

228 201122
NOTE: In case of welding the chassis,

cab or superstructure follow the
guidelines as mentioned in chapter
2.3: "Welding on the chassis". If
welding work has to be carried out on a
Hybrid vehicle the 24V batteries have to
be disconnected from the chassis
ground. The connections of the hybrid
system should remain fitted whilst
welding.
Welding on the Hybrid vehicle is
preferred when the high voltage system
is isolated from the vehicle by ensuring
the red Service Button on the PEC is
pressed fully in.
201122 229

230 201122
Data communication systems
DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

Page Date
8.1 Data communication CAN SAE J1939 / ISO 11898 (including FMS) . . . . . . . . 233 201122
8.2 Data communication CANopen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 201122
8.3 Data communication ISO 11992/2 & 11992/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 201122
8.4 Body Builders' Module (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 201122
8.5 CVSG type gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 201122
8.6 Body Builders' CAN J1939 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 201122
201122 231

232 201122
8. DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

8.1 DATA COMMUNICATION CAN
SAE J1939 / ISO 11898
(INCLUDING FMS)
In the LF, CF and XF series, in addition to the

already known systems, a number of new
systems are used. These systems are intended
to further increase ease of use, effectiveness and
safety of the vehicle. The components including
these systems are generally installed in the cab.
Examples of these new systems (with
appropriate abbreviations) are the following:
- Vehicle Intelligence Centre (VIC-3)
- DAF Instrument Pack (DIP-4)
- Engine management FR and GRPACCAR-
Cummins engines (ECS-DC5)
- Engine management MX and PR engine
(DMCI)
- Body Builders' Module (BBM)
- Controller Area Network (CAN databus)
VIC/DIP
The VIC-3 is the central processing unit from
where all information is co-ordinated. The
function of the VIC-3 includes converting the
information received from vehicle systems,
switches, sensors, etc. into protocols for the
various vehicle systems, and subsequently
passing on this information, in coded form. For
example, in this way all information is exchanged 8
with the instrument panel. Together with the
protocols, messages are placed on the CAN
network (CAN databus) in order of importance. At
DAF, use is made of multiple CAN networks,
namely the V(ehicle)-CAN 1 and 2, the
I(nstrument)-CAN, the D(iagnosis)-CAN and the
B(ody)B(uilder)-CAN . The VIC is connected to
the vehicle system via the V-CAN, and the
electronic instrument panel (DIP-4) via the I-CAN.
The V-CAN-2 and BB-CAN are not in the
architecture of the LF series electronics.
CAN-bus
The CAN databus is in principle a distribution
network of various electronic signals. The pulsed
digital signals represent coded messages. These
can be transmitted, received and processed by all
systems connected to the network. Each system
takes up the information it requires, from the
network. In this way, a signal which is generated
by one system can also be used by other
systems. In addition, each network consists of
two lines: CAN-H (high) and CAN-L (low). The
wires for these two lines are twisted (without
201122 233
shielding) in order to prevent magnetic influence

from one another and from outside. CAN wiring is
therefore always recognisable, by the twisting
and the colour; see also "Marking of wiring" in
section 7.3: "Circuit diagram".
In the automotive industry, a worldwide standard
has been selected for communication (coded
messages) between electronic systems:
- SAE J1939/21 (Society of Automotive
Engineers) - cabling + network
Engineers) - messages + protocol handling
ISO 11898 is the European equivalent of the SAE
J1939 standard. DAF has opted for the 250kB
CAN 2.0B protocol application.
In addition, there is a further CAN connection for
the EBS system, which operates according to the
ISO 11992 standard.
Also at DAF, these international agreements are
complied with. For the bodybuilder, there is a
further possibility of using the existing CAN
network, if the electrical system of the body
operates using the same message structure and
CAN communication. The V-CAN information is
optionally available (via the CAN Connection
Unit) in the 21-pin body connector, in the
bulkhead lead-through or in the application
connector for the superstructure in the chassis.
8 See also the sections 9.2: "LF series bulkhead
connections"', 10.2: "CF series bulkhead
connection overview", 11.2: "XF series bulkhead
connection overview" and 8.4: "Body Builders'
Module (Optional)".
For more information relating to message
structure and accessibility of the V-CAN, contact
DAF.
The alteration of existing cable harnesses in the
vehicle, other than indicated in the bodybuilding
guidelines, is not permitted! There is a possibility
that the CAN network will thus be weakened or
interrupted, resulting in possible unsafe, but
certainly at least in unreliable situations.

234 201122
WARNING! Direct connection to

CAN bus system for the purpose of
retrieving operating data or with
other purposes is not allowed since
it can interfere with the correct
functionality of the truck systems,
for example engine or brakes. In
case of a direct connection DAF
reserves the right to withdraw any
warranty on the product or to
consider it null and void. At the same
time DAF shall not be subject to
product liability arising from any
direct connection made by a third
party.
FMS Standard
FMS stands for Fleet Management Systems. The
main chassis manufacturers, including DAF,
have together agreed on the DATA to be
universally provided for these FMS systems via
the CAN link. Up to date information can be found
on the internet at www.fms-standard.com. See
chapters 9.12: "LF series FMS system" and
10.17: "CF75 - 85 series FMS / DTS system" for
more information.
Important:
Any information (functions/data) supplied must
be compiled in accordance with the definitions of
the FMS standard.
If functions/data are not available, they should be
passed on as 'not available' (NACK).
8
NOTE: Since the CAN data is
depending on which systems are in the
vehicle, and again the CAN data is
depending on the specification week
(software status) of the vehicle, please
contact DAF for exact information on
the CAN data available on a specific
vehicle.
For general information on CAN
messages and signals available as
options FMS or BB-CAN are chosen,
please contact DAF.
NOTE: In case the number of CAN

messages in the FMS preparation ex-
factory are not sufficient, an extended
package can be supplied via DAF After
Sales. Please contact DAF in those
cases the extended package is
required.
201122 235
8.2 DATA COMMUNICATION

CANOPEN
In the CF & XF series, in addition to the already

known systems, a number of new systems are
used.
CAN-bus
section 7.3: "Circuit diagram").
8 Engineers) - messages + protocol handling
CANopen uses the same interface hardware, but
also a complety different sofware protocol. Since
a lot of devices on CANopen are available ( from
chemical proces industry) on 24V power supply,
applications can be expected on short term .
The CF75/85 & XF105 series are prepared for
CANopen applications. Application is pending on
standardisation of the protocol.
Information on the protocols can be found at the
Internet, CAN in Automation website www.can-
cia.de.
structure and accessibility of CANopen, contact
DAF.

236 201122
8.3 DATA COMMUNICATION ISO

11992/2 & 11992/3
In the CF and XF series, in addition to the

already known systems, a number of new
systems are used. These systems are intended
to further increase ease of use, effectiveness and
safety of the vehicle.
The CF and XF series are prepared for
ISO11992/3 applications.
CAN-bus
section 7.3: "Circuit diagram").
8
Engineers) - messages + protocol handling
In addition, there is a further CAN connection for
the EBS system, which operates according to the
ISO 11992 standard.
Also at DAF, these international agreements are
complied with. For the bodybuilder, there is a
further possibility of using the existing CAN
network. The ISO 11992/3 CANbus is one of
these system options.
The CF & XF105 series are prepared for 11992/3
applications. Application is pending on
standardisation of the protocol.
Infomation on the protocols can be found at the
internet, International Standards Organisation
website www.iso.org.
structure and accessibility of the 11992/3 Truck-
Trailer CANbus, contact DAF.
201122 237
8.4 BODY BUILDERS' MODULE

(OPTIONAL)
Bodybuilders have expressed a strong wish for a

clearly separated vehicle/body interface, which is
also highly standardised.
With the advent of network structures in the LF,
CF and XF Euro 4/5 series, and the
accompanying increased complexity, the limiting
conditions according to which bodybuilders and
end users must comply in respect of the
interfacing of their systems from and to the
vehicle, have further changed.
WARNING! Partly as a consequence
of ever increasing reliability
requirements, unmonitored working
on existing vehicle systems is
absolutely undesirable! E502263
DAF responded to this demand by developing the

Body Builder Module (BBM).
Using these systems, for example, the following
functions can be offered:
- Icons and warnings displayed on a DOT
matrix screen (dashboard).
- PTO-2 hour counter (only available via
CAN).
Only one PTO counter available for the LF
Series (which counts PTO1 and PTO2 hours
8 -
together).
Improved accessibility to various signals
(including engine speed and vehicle speed
signal).
- Various temperature signals.
- Tailor-made engine speed control functions.
- Torque and/or engine speed intervention
from body.
- Full PTO control from body.
- Cable limitation between body and vehicle.
- Integration of body-PLC controls.
- Implementation of trip, PTO or engine
collective meter.
- Etc, etc.
All CF and XF vehicles with the option Engine
Speed Control, or PTO, or BodyBuilder CAN are
equiped with a BBM.
For more information about applications please
contact DAF.

238 201122
8.5 CVSG TYPE GAUGES
The Body Builder Module (BBM) has an output

called CVSG (Commercial Vehicle Slave Gauge).
This is a communication bus. The CVSG bus is a
single wire communication bus coming from the
BBM. With this CVSG bus we can control several
gauges, and by using the BBM application area (
software) it is possible to translate for example
signals available on the vehicle CAN link to an
indication gauge on the superstructure control
panel.
Dedicated gauges available
Description Range Metric units Range Imperial units
Primary air pressure 0 - 10 bar 0 - 150 psi
Secondary air pressure 0 - 10 bar 0 - 150 psi
Engine oil pressure 0 - 7 bar 0 - 100 psi
Engine coolant temperature 40 - 120 C 100 - 250 F
Engine oil temperature 40 - 150 C 100 - 300 F
Main trans oil temperature 65 - 150 C 150 - 300 F
Fuel level #1 E - 1/2 - F E - 1/2 - F
Gauges not supported by the BBM module (ex-factory)

Description Range Metric units Range Imperial units
Application air pressure 0 - 10 bar 0 - 150 psi
Transfer case oil temperature 40 - 150 C not available
General oil temperature 40 - 150 C not available 8
PTO oil temperature 40 - 150 C 100 - 300 F
General gauges available

Description Range
Engine RPM 0 - 3000 RPM
Voltmeter 18V-36V
Ampere -150A - +150A
Hourmeter 0 - 999999 hours
Clock Analog
Transmission display (Allison Gearbox)
All gauges have a 52 mm diameter, chrome

bezel, black scale with white printing, red pointer,
white backlighting, and red indication LED. This
red indication LED burns when something is
wrong with concerned signal. Together with this
red light an indication on the DIP shows a fault.
Recommended panel cut-out is 52,5 mm.
201122 239
The power supply of the gauges is +12V. Not only

an additional DC/DC converter should be applied
but also a time relais has to be mounted in the
relais foot of the power supply cable of the CVSG A B
gauges.See chapter 13.13: "Miscellaneous
parts" for part number information.
This 12V supply and databus connection can be
found in the bulkhead lead-through if the CVSG 4
system and BBM unit are specified for the 3
23
4 1 2
chassis. See chapters 9.2: "LF series bulkhead 1
connections", 10.2: "CF series bulkhead G001190
connection overview" and/or 11.2: "XF series

bulkhead connection overview" for the wire
number and pin location.
Every CVSG gauge has two 4 pin connectors on
the back side. Pins 1 to 4 of connector A are
bridged to pins 1 to 4 of connector B.
NOTE: In order to get the 12V power
supply available, an additional DC/DC
converter has to be placed inside the
cab - co drivers side.
These part numbers and additional
items can be found in 13.10: "CVSG
Gauges".
Pinning for connector A and B

Pin Function
1 Data link ( CVSG protocol ) BBM required
2 Backlighting for no BBM required gauges
8 3
4
Ground connection
Power supply +12 V
8.6 BODY BUILDERS' CAN J1939
Following market developments and demands,

DAF can offer an additional feature regarding
CAN control to Body Builders.
For CF and XF series vehicles the connection
points can be found in the bulkhead connector
12D and application connector chassis BB-CAN
A105. See the chapters 10.2: "CF series
bulkhead connection overview",
12.37: "Connector A105 Bodybuilder CAN
system 7-pole", 11.2: "XF series bulkhead
connection overview".
NOTE: For detailed message content
see the "BB-CAN CAN message
overview.pdf" document on the
information sheet web page. (The
Internet URL for the corporate DAF
website is: www.daf.com -> follow the
main menu item: "Products" ->
Bodybuilder guidelines webpage ->
Information Sheet webpage)

240 201122
NOTE: All data is according SAE J1939

and detailed information can be found
in the "BB-CAN message overview.pdf"
on the information sheet web
page.(The Internet URL for the
corporate DAF website is:
www.daf.com -> follow the main menu
item: "Products" -> Bodybuilder
guidelines webpage -> Information
Sheet webpage)
201122 241

242 201122
Electrical system LF series
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM LF SERIES

Page Date
9.1 LF series cab switch and connector locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 201122
9.2 LF series bulkhead connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 201122
9.3 LF and CF65 series chassis connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 201122
9.4 LF series accessories connection headershelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 201122
9.5 LF series accessories connection dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 201122
9.6 LF series power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 201122
9.7 LF series radio preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 201122
9.8 LF series telephone preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 201122
9.9 LF series anti-theft protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 201122
9.10 LF series ESC control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 201122
9.11 LF series PTO control / protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 201122
9.12 LF series FMS system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 201122
9.13 Refuse preparation LF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 201122
9.14 LF series trailer connection points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 201122
201122 243

244 201122
9. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM LF SERIES

9.1 LF SERIES CAB SWITCH AND
CONNECTOR LOCATIONS
WARNING! This paragraph explains

for each vehicle series which
connection points for additional
power consumers are or are not fully
or partially prepared ex-factory.
Power supplies other than listed in
this section, only in consultation
with DAF.
Switch positions, overhead console

1 Rotating beam switch
2 Interior alarm on/off switch
3 System LED - Alarmsystem
4 Spare
5 Spare
1 2 3 4 5
G000434
Switch positions, dashboard

9
10 1 2 3 4 5 6 res 7 8
G000433
1 radio recess
2 accessory plug 12V/10A
3 telephone location
4 work lamp/body lighting
5 reversing buzzer on/off
6 main switch
7 PTO on/off
8 loading door alarm on/off
9 adjustable speed limiter
201122 245
10 Location of the FMS and HD-OBD

connector. See sections
12.44: "Connector A126 FMS 2-pole" and
12.33: "Connector A100 HD-OBD
diagnose" for more information.
RES reserve point
9.2 LF SERIES BULKHEAD

CONNECTIONS
Locations of application connectors
1M 3P
1P
A8 B8
23T
3N
3P
A1 B1
3L
23K
G000535
Connec- Descriptions (1)

tor
Code
9 1M Application connector for spare wiring, see section: 12.1: "Connector 1M spare wiring"
1P Application connector RAS-EC, see section: 12.2: "Connector 1P RAS-EC system"
3L Application connector for accessories, see section: 12.4: "Connector 3L accessoiries"
3P Application connector for engine speed control, see section: 12.5: "Connector 3P ESC sys-
tem"
23K Application connector for body functions, see section: 12.12: "Connector 23K body functions"
(1) For pinning and wire numbers see the indicated sections.

246 201122
4V
56W
5V
6V
G000561
Connec- Descriptions (1)

tor
Code
4V Application connector for refuse collector, see section: 12.8: "Connector 4V refuse collector"
56W Application connector for refuse collector, see section: 12.14: "Connector 56W refuse collec-
tor"
9.3 LF AND CF65 SERIES CHASSIS

CONNECTIONS
9
Location of application connectors
B CD E F
B
A
G001299
201122 247
Posi- Con- Description (1)

tion nector
Code
A A070 Connector application superstructure; see section: 12.27: "Connector A070 accesso-
ries 8-pole)"
B Connection for side markers
C A103 Application connector for body function spare wires; see section: 12.35: "Connector
A103 bodybuilder 12-pole"
D A102 Application connector for body function; see section: 12.34: "Connector A102 body
builder 8-pole"
E A068 Application connector for engine speed control (12-pin); see section:
12.26: "Connector A068 (chassis - ESC system)"
F A088 Application connector Taillift (8-pin); see section: 12.29: "Connector A088 taillift sys-
tem 7-pole"
(1) Check out the indicated sections for additional information on offered functionality, pinning and wire numbers within the
connectors used.
Side marking lights

2-pole (location B in illustration)
At the position of the first side marker behind the
cab, on both the left and right-hand side, a cable
is located with a 2-pin connector. This connector
contains wire numbers 2169 and 2170. Side
markers and top lights can be connected from
here (separate cables on the left and right hand
chassis side), using the cable harnesses that are
mentioned in chapter 13.6: "Electric cable
contour lights chassis".
NOTE: If needed, director lamps on the
9 cab mud guards can be repositioned to

line up with the bodied chassis width by
using the extension pieces as shown in
chapter 13.7: "Extension piece for the
LF mud guard" .

248 201122
9.4 LF SERIES ACCESSORIES

CONNECTION HEADERSHELF
Spare wiring headershelf

There is spare wiring from the bulkhead via the A-
pillar to the headershelf.
The wiring (4 separate wires, no connector) runs
from the headershelf to the bulkhead lead-
through 1M (= grey 8 pole connector). The
number of spare wires is 4. See chapter
12.1: "Connector 1M spare wiring" for the
bulkhead connection details. See chapter
9.6: "LF series power supply" for the power
supply connection details.
1M
G001161
9.5 LF SERIES ACCESSORIES

CONNECTION DASHBOARD
Spare wiring from dashboard area to

bulkhead lead-through
9
1M
G001162
The wiring runs from a connector behind the radio

compartment to the bulkhead lead-through 1M (=
grey 8 pole connector). The number of spare
wires is 4. See chapter 12.1: "Connector 1M
spare wiring" for the bulkhead connection details.
201122 249
9.6 LF SERIES POWER SUPPLY
Power supply
Power supply - 24V/10A before and aftercontact
are available in the bulkhead lead-through. See
chapter 12.5: "Connector 3P ESC system" for
details.
NOTE: Remember the total
permissible power supply as listed
in section 7.9: "Maximum load".
12V/15A accessory connection

A 24V/12V DC/DC- converter is used to provide a
12Volt for accessory systems. It is not allowed to
use this 12V for driveline systems or driveline
related systems. If a driveline (related) system
needs 12V, it must be transformed from 24V into
12V inside the system itself for safety reasons.
Connecting a 12V system via the DC/DC
converter is only allowed for customer
accessories.
12V/15A power supply is available for radio and
telephone, and in the overhead console for CB
and fax. Wire numbers: 1153 and M.
WARNING! The standard version 24/
12V converter is 15A. The total
current consumption from the 12V
supply before and after contact for
telephone, fax, radio and CB
together (1 converter), must not
exceed the specified value. Splitting
of the 12V circuit using more than
9 one converter is necessary if

additional current consumption is
required. Installing a heavier-duty
converter is not recommended, in
view of cable diameters and
suppression. Location behind fuse
PCB in central box.
NOTE: The result of this is that energy

is continuously drawn from the
batteries. Carry out this modification
only if necessary.
9.7 LF SERIES RADIO

PREPARATION
Radio preparation
For the radio connection, an ISO connector
(connector code B365.A) has been fitted behind
the radio panel, with 12V/ 10mA power supply
before contact (wire 1153), power supply after
contact (wire 1108: 12V/10A, switched via relay
G377) and earth (M). Also, for the loudspeakers

250 201122
(connector code B365.B), the wiring to the door,

A-pillar (for tweeters) and rear wall (for
loudspeakers) has been prepared as standard. If
tweeters are installed, a dividing filter must be
fitted.
12V converter is 15A. The total
current consumption from the 12V
supply before and after contact for
together, must not exceed the
specified value. Splitting of the 12V
circuit using more than one
converter is necessary if additional
current consumption is required.
Installing a heavier-duty converter is
not recommended, in view of cable
diameters and suppression.
B365.A GY
1 3 5 7
B365.B 2 4 6 8
B365.A
B365.B BN
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
E502816
9
B365.A Power supply radio; see section: 12.49: "Connector D365.A - D365.B radio system"
B365.B Loudspeakers radio
9.8 LF SERIES TELEPHONE

PREPARATION
Telephone preparation
For a telephone connection, space has been
reserved on the right-hand side of the radio
panel, see position 1. The power supply to the
telephone must be tapped from the 12V/10A
accessory plug, see position 2.
2 1
G001163
201122 251
9.9 LF SERIES ANTI-THEFT

PROTECTION
LF series
If the vehicle is fitted with the standard anti-theft
protection system, the body can be connected to
the vehicle system via the application connector
for accessories.
See section 9.3: "LF and CF65 series chassis
connections".
Wire numbers 3659 and 3660 are both inputs,
connected to ground via a switch. If interrupted,
the alarm will sound. Wire 3651 is a 12 V supply
coming from the alarm system, and meant for the
power supply of the interior motion detection.
WARNING! For the latest details and
versions, contact DAF.
9.10 LF SERIES ESC CONTROL
LF Series ESC control

Applicable selection codes:
0761: without engine speed control connector
A068
0797: with engine speed control cab connector
(3P)
9231: with engine speed control chassis
connector (A068)
ECU VIC-L
NOTE: Connector 3P is always present 3P
9 due to standardisation. If selco 0797 is

selected, the corresponding
D358L
functionality is also present (correct VIC ECU ECS-D5

software). D364
D338
C939
G001164
Applicable application connectors in cab and

chassis depending on selection code:
Check out the sections indicated below for additional information on pinning and wire numbers within the
connectors and ECU units used:
connector 3P: in section 12.5: "Connector 3P ESC system".
connector A068: in section 12.26: "Connector A068 (chassis - ESC system)".

252 201122
Purpose of the function

The purpose of the engine speed control system
is to enable the engine speed to be adjusted
between idling speed and the maximum speed.
This adjustable engine speed is used, among
other things, to drive auxiliary consumers via a
PTO. The engine speed control can be used
while driving or when idling by setting the correct
customer parameters using DAVIE. The engine
speed control can be enabled by the driver using
the steering wheel switches, if the correct
selection codes have been chosen, through the
superstructure equipment via the relevant
application connector (A068 hardwired).
Enabling the engine speed control via one of the
application connectors takes priority over the
steering wheel switches.
Schematic overview of ESC system control
The diagram below provides a schematic
overview of the engine speed control. The two
main groups for controlling the engine speed
control can be identified as follows:
1. Enabling engine speed control by the driver via
the VIC (Vehicle Intelligence Centre)
- Steering wheel switches
2. Enabling engine speed control by the body via
- Cab application connector (3P connector)
- Chassis application connector (A068
connector)
201122 253
9
General ESC control system layout

254 201122
CAN signal description

CAN Message id Used CAN Signals for ESC (1) Startbit Length
Message name
TC01 0CFE6CEE Tachograph vehicle speed 48 16
Cruise control resume switch 16 2
Cruise control off switch 18 2
PropB_SW 18FF604D
Cruise control accelerate switch 20 2
Cruise control coast switch 22 2
Parking brake switch 2 2
Cruise control active 24 2
Cruise control enable switch 26 2
Brake switch 28 2
Clutch switch 30 2
CCVS 18FEF100 Cruise control set switch 32 2
Cruise control set speed 40 2
Cruise control state 53 2
EBC1 18F0010B EBS brake switch 6 2
ETC2 18F00503 Selected gear 0 8
PropA_ BBM_ tbd tbd tbd
18EF0025
to_Engine
(1) only ESC related messages are shown.
Enabling engine speed control by the driver

9
As is evident from the schematic overview, the
VIC can receive the engine speed control signals
from the steering wheel switches (via CAN). The
VIC translates these signals into a CAN
message, which is sent to the engine control unit.
Steering wheel switches
201122 255
Operating functions of the steering wheel switches

Function Standard setting Choices in ECS-DC5
(D358) via DAVIE
(CP = customer parame-
ter)
Brief operating (1) of "SET +" during engine speed control CP 2-16
activates the set speed engine speed. The activation re-
acts on the falling edge of the signal.
Brief operation (1) of "SET -" during engine speed control CP2-17
activates the resume speed engine speed. The activation
reacts on the falling edge of the signal.
Long operation (2) of "SET +" during engine speed control 0<ramp<400 [rpm/s]
gives a continuous increase of the preset desired speed CP2-22
SET +
(default 250 rpm/s). This function can only be enabled af-
SET -
ter activation of the set speed once.
Long operation (2) of "SET -" during engine speed control 0<ramp<400 [rpm/s]
gives a continuous decrease of the preset desired speed CP2-22
The desired engine speed can be varied using "set +/-" N_idling<speed lim-
between minimum and the maximum speed to be set. it<N_max (rpm) via CP2-
15 and CP2-14
Res Operating "Res" activates the engine speed control and To be set using CP2-17
sets the engine speed to the value entered using CP2-17 between the values set
(default 1200 rpm). Activation by operating "Res" using CP2-15 and CP2-
(resume) button twice. With this "Res" button the opera- 14
tion can toggle between N1 and N2..
OFF Engine speed control is switched off using the "OFF" but-
ton.
(1) Brief operation: touch time < 0.3 s.

(2) Long operation: touch time > 0.3 s.
9 Switch on and off conditions
To make engine speed control possible, a
number of (default) cut-in conditions must be met,
namely:
- The handbrake must be engaged. (CP2-32)
- The vehicle speed must not be faster than 10
km/h. (CP2-11)
- Clutch pedal is not operated. (CP2-34)
- Brake pedal is not operated. (CP2-33)
- Engine brake foot pedal is not operated. (no
CP)
In addition, there are a number of faults that can
be checked, which, if active, prevent the engine
speed control from being activated.
- No faults are active that relate to vehicle
speed.
- No faults are active that relate to Set+/Set-
plausibility
- No faults are active that relate to engine
speed.
- No faults are active that relate to CAN
communication.

256 201122
- No faults are active that relate to clutch

signal plausibility.
- No faults are active that relate to handbrake
signal.
signal.
- No faults are active that relate to a neutral
gearbox signal.
If, for the body function, it is necessary to deviate
from the standard options tested and released by
DAF, DAF shall no longer be responsible for the
operation. The implementation of non-standard
body functions and the possible consequences
are the responsibility of the user (generally the
bodybuilder), who then bears product liability.
Schematic overview of ESC system control via the body
Hardwired activation of engine speed control

For operating the engine speed control through
the body connection (see relevant selcos), the
same functions, cut-in and cut-out conditions,
and customer choices are offered as for the
9
engine speed control through the steering wheel
switch. Via the hardwired input on the application
connector, two different engine speed control
speed modes can be chosen via customer
parameter 1-116. The two modes are:
1. Fixed speeds mode.
To activate these fixed speeds the engine
speed control must first be enabled providing
a high signal on pin A3 of cab connector 3P
or pin 7 of the chassis connector A068. Then
N1, N2 and N3 can be activated by providing
a high signal on pins 8, 9 and 10 of chassis
connector A068 or pin A4, A5 and A6 of
connector 3P.
2. Variable engine speed control mode.
To activate the variable engine speed control
mode first the enable pin A3 of the cabin
connector or pin 7 of the chassis connector
A068 must be activated. After that the Nvar
enable pin on both connectors must be
201122 257
activated (pin A4/3P or pin 8/A068). Via the

set+ or set- pins on both connectors a
variable ESC will be possible. In the table on
the next page all the different situations are
described.
NOTE: For safety reasons it is not
permitted to activate the "enable" via a
through connection at the same time as
N2, N3 or Nvar. If two separate
connections are not used it will not be
possible to switch off the engine speed
control if a short circuit occurs.
Activation ESC fixed speeds via connector 3P or A068

(5 situations possible; functional description in next table)
Function 1 2 3 4 5
Connector / Pin
ESC enable Oc 24V 24V 24V 24V
Pin 3P/A3 or
Pin A068/7
ESC_N1 Dc Oc 24V Oc Oc
Pin 3P/A4 or
Pin A068/8
ESC_N2 Dc Oc Oc 24V Oc
Pin 3P/A5 or
Pin A068/9
ESC_N3 Dc Oc Oc Oc 24V
Pin 3P/A6 or
Pin A068/10
(1) 24V only temporarily applied before start of engine. See situation 9 and 10 in next table for more details.
9 -
-
Oc = open circuit
Dc = don't care
- Sp = short pulse (brief operation: touch time
with 24V < 0.3 s)
- Lp = long pulse (long operation: touch time
with 24V > 0.3 s)
Situation Engine CP (1) in Default Remarks

Speed ECS-DC5 value
system
1 N_engine = idle 700 rpm Remote engine speed control disabled
speed
2 N_engine = idle 700 rpm Remote engine speed control enabled
speed
3 N_engine = N1 2-27 900 rpm Choice of throttle override available through
customer parameter 2-30
(1) CP = Customer parameter.

258 201122
Activation Variable Speed ESC speed via Application connector 3P or A068

(7 situations possible; functional description in next table)
Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Connector / Pin
ESC enable Oc 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V
Pin 3P/A3 or
Pin A068/7
ESC_Nvar Dc Oc 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V
Pin 3P/A4 or
Pin A068/8
ESC_Set+ Dc Oc Oc Sp Oc LP Oc
Pin 3P/A5 or
Pin A068/9
ESC_Set- Dc Oc Oc Oc Sp Oc Lp
Pin 3P/A6 or
Pin A068/10
(1) 24V only temporarily applied before start of engine. See situation 9 and 10 in next table for more details.
- Oc = open circuit
- Dc = don't care
- Sp = short pulse (brief operation: touch time
with 24V < 0.3 s)
- Lp = long pulse (long operation: touch time
with 24V > 0.3 s)
201122 259
Situation Engine CP (1) in Default Remarks

Speed ECS-DC5 value
system
1 N_engine = idle 700 rpm Remote engine speed control disabled.
speed
2 N_engine = idle 700 rpm Variable remote engine speed control ena-
speed bled.
3 N_engine = Nvar 900 rpm Choice of throttle override available through
customer parameter 2-30.
4 N_engine = cur- "Bump-up" feature, Speed range available
rent between Nidle en Nmax-esc parameter 2-14.
setting + 25rpm If engine speed is not at current ESC setting
(e.g. during throttle override) a short pulse on
this connection will set the current ESC speed
to the current engine speed.
5 N_engine = cur- "Bump-down" feature, Speed range available
rent between Nidle en Nmax-esc parameter 2-14.
setting - 25rpm If engine speed is not at current ESC setting
(e.g. during throttle override) a short pulse on
this connection will set the current ESC speed
to the current engine speed.
6 N_engine = cur- Ramp-up feature. Speed range available be-
rent tween Nidle and MAXESC speed'parameter.
setting + 200rpm/
sec
7 N_engine = cur- Ramp-up feature. Speed range available be-
rent tween Nidle and MAXESC speed'parameter.
setting - 200rpm
(1) CP = Customer parameter.

260 201122
Operating functions of the application connector (A068)

(1)
Function Standard setting Choice in ECS-DC5
via DAVIE
ter)
Enable ESC If the engine speed control function is activated and the
vehicle speed is lower than the limiting speed for engine
speed control + 5 km/h, the engine speed control is ena-
bled through the body connection. At the same time, op-
eration via the steering column switch is blocked.
Operating "SET+/-" switches the engine speed control on
and sets the current engine speed as the desired speed
(constant value).
Brief operation (3) of "SET +/-" during engine speed con- 0<step<400 [rpm] via
trol gives a stepped increase or reduction of the engine CP2-20 and CP2-38
speed (default 25 rpm).
SET +
Long operation (4) of "SET +/-" during engine speed con- 0<ramp<400 [rpm/s] via
SET -
trol gives a continuous increase or reduction of the preset CP2-18 and 2-19
Pulsing or
desired speed (default 200 rpm/s).
continuous (2)
When "SET+/-" is released, the current engine speed is
set as the new desired engine speed
The desired engine speed can be varied using "SET +/-" N_idling<speed lim-
between the minimum and the maximum speed to be set. it<Nmax
( 0 rpm) via CP2-15 and
CP2-14
Operating "Enable N_variable" activates the engine
speed control and sets the last desired engine speed set
using SET+ and SET-. This value is also memorised
N_variable
when the ignition is switched off.
Varying the desired speed is possible using SET+/- but
only if the input "Enable N_variable" is activated.
N_2 Operating "N2" activates the engine speed control and To be set using CP2-28
sets the engine speed to the value entered using CP2-16 between the values set 9
(default 800 rpm). using CP2-15 and CP2-
14
14
V_max applica- If the Vmax application input is activated by providing a 24 Adjustable using CP2-10
tion (5) V signal, the vehicle speed is limited to the pre-pro- between a value of 0 and
grammed value (default 30 km/h). 30 km/h
Engine speed Output signal, square-wave, 30 pulses per revolution; LS
pulse
(1) If operated simultaneously, the priority is as follows (high to low): "enable ESC", "N2", "N3", N_variable (SET-/+).
(2) Pulse signal = a signal becomes a pulse when the rising edge reaches a value of 0.6 x U_bat. Continuous signal is "high" at a
voltage level of 0.6 x U_bat and "low" if below a level of 0.4 x U_bat.
(3) Brief operation: touch time < 0.3 s (default).
(4) Long operation: touch time > 0.3 s (default).
(5) Special applications (e.g. refuse vehicles).
201122 261
In addition to various cut-in conditions, the

cut-out conditions must also be taken into
account. These cut-out conditions are:
- The handbrake must be disengaged. (CP2-
32)
- The vehicle speed is higher than limit value +
offset (10+5=15 km/h). (CP2-11)
- Clutch pedal is operated. (CP2-34)
- Brake pedal is operated. (CP2-33)
- Engine brake foot pedal is operated. (no CP)
- Retarder is operated. (no CP)
In addition, there are a number of faults that
are checked and if active, the engine speed
control should be switched off:
- A vehicle speed fault is active.
- A plausibility fault is active on the set+/set-
switches.
- An engine speed fault is active.
- A fault that relates to the CAN
communication is active.
- A plausibility fault is active that relates to the
clutch signal.
- A fault is active that relates to the handbrake
signal.
- A fault is active that relates to the clutch
signal.
- A fault is active that relates to the neutral
signal of the gearbox.
In addition to the cut-in and cut-out
conditions, the system also has a number of
overrule conditions. An overrule condition
means that the control under which the
system is operating at that point is
9 temporarily suppressed. These overrule

conditions are:
- Accelerator pedal operation. (CP 2-30)
The accelerator pedal can be used to
temporarily increase the engine speed up to
a maximum value preset under customer
parameter 2.14 (max. ESC speed).
- Exceeding vehicle speed limit. (CP 2-11)
- ASR activation.
- Speed limiter activation.

262 201122
Customer (1) Customer parameter name System Value

parameter
ID
ENGINE SPEED CONTROL
1-28 ESC Brake enable VIC-3L ACTIVE /
NOT ACTIVE
ESC Clutch enable VIC-3L ACTIVE /
1-29
NOT ACTIVE
1-30 ESC Parkbrake enable VIC-3L ACTIVE /
NOT ACTIVE
1-116 ESC Speed mode VIC-3L VARIABLE SPEED
/
3 FIXED SPEEDS
(1) For changing default parameter settings see chapter 7.19: "Guideline for the Customer Parameter Change Form"

parameter
ID
2-14 MAX ESC SPEED ECS-DC5 Rpm
2-15 MIN ESC SPEED ECS-DC5 Rpm
2-16 SET SWITCH ESC-SPEED ECS-DC5 Rpm
2-17 RESUME SWITCH ESC-SPEED ECS-DC5 Rpm
2-21 MAX ENGINE LOAD ESC ECS-DC5 Nm
2-22 ACCELERATE / DECELERATE ESC ECS-DC5 Rpm/s
2-27 ESC CHANGE APPLICATION CONN. N1 ECS-DC5 Rpm
2-28 ESC CHANGE APPLICATION CONN. N2 ECS-DC5 Rpm
2-29 ESC CHANGE APPLICATION CONN. N3 ECS-DC5 Rpm 9

parameter
ID
ENGINE SPEED CONTROL CONDITIONS
2-30 ACCEL. PEDAL ECS-DC5 ACTIVE /
NOT ACTIVE
2-31 MAX RPM ACCELERATOR PEDAL ECS-DC5 Rpm
2-32 PARK BRAKE ECS-DC5 ACTIVE /
NOT ACTIVE
2-33 BRAKE ECS-DC5 ACTIVE /
NOT ACTIVE
2-34 CLUTCH ECS-DC5 ACTIVE /
NOT ACTIVE
201122 263
9.11 LF SERIES PTO CONTROL /

PROTECTION
LF45 - LF55 Series PTO-control

Selco description ECU AGC
codes D312
4610 without engine PTO
with engine PTO / without con- 3P ECU VIC-3 Lite
9181 D358L
trol
PTO-1 ECU AS-tronic

Selco description D954
codes
PTO
without gearbox PTO-1 / with-
1412
out control
with gearbox PTO-1 / without
1118
control
various with gearbox PTO / with control
G001203

Connector See the sections indicated below for additional information on pinning and wire num-
Codes bers in the connectors used.
3P section: 12.5: "Connector 3P ESC system"

A PTO (power take off) enables a body builder or
9 customer to derive mechanical energy from the

vehicle to activate special functions, e.g. pumps.
A PTO can be switched on by activating an EP
valve. The driver can request activation of the
PTO by activating the PTO switch. Before
activating the PTO the VIC3L will check if the
switch-on conditions are met. Also the PTO will
be disabled if, with an activated PTO, one of the
switch-off conditions are met. The switch on and
off conditions can be adjusted by the DAF dealer
via DAVIE. For the LF series, only one PTO
control has been prepared.
The main purpose of the PTO control system is to
engage the PTO under safe conditions.The PTO
can be used while driving or when idling by
setting the correct customer parameters using
DAVIE.
Schematic overview of PTO control
overview of the PTO control. The two main
groups for controlling the PTO can be identified
as follows:

264 201122
1. Enabling PTO control by the driver via the

dashboard switches.
2. Enabling PTO control by the body via hardware
connector 3P.
- Cab application connector (hard wired)
- Chassis application connector (CAN
controlled)
VIC-3 Lite
D358L
Valve Switch Switch Application

Control PTO-1
PTO-1 connector
PTO-1 Status
B245 F087 C750 3P
G001202
General PTO control system layout

Engine PTO
For vehicles with a GR engine a special engine
PTO can be used. This 12 o'clock GR engine
PTO cannot be switched on and off.
Gearbox PTO (manual gearbox)
By using the switch on position 7 (see section
9.1: "LF series cab switch and connector
24V
9
locations"), the VIC (Vehicle Intelligence Centre) 5
01
is activated via wire 4594 (active earth). The VIC C750
checks on the basis of the cut-in conditions 7 1

whether the output (wire 4596) may be activated.
4594
These conditions must be met within a specified

control time (default = 4 sec.). If this is not the VIC-3 Lite 4596
case, an error message will appear on the DIP D358L
(display on instrument panel). The PTO output

3410
1
will not be switched on, even if following the 1 B245
expiry of the control time, the cut-in conditions are 2
met. To allow the PTO to be switched on, the F141
switch must first be set to off, and then switched 2

back on.
G001206
If activation of the PTO is permitted, wire 4596 is
activated, and the VIC expects a return status
message from the PTO system, within a second
control time. An immediate check will also be
carried out as to whether the cut-out conditions
are met, or not. If the return status message does
not arrive on time, or if the message states that
the cut-out conditions are met, the output will be
switched off, and the PTO warning will once
201122 265
again appear on the DIP. The 'PTO active'

indication on the DIP will not illuminate, until the
return status message is concluded successfully.
If this indication lights up, the PTO-1 hour counter
will start to run (installed in the DIP menu).
Control wire 4594 (active +24V, in the cab this
wire has number 3420) is included in the ESC
application connector, which means that
preparation for operating the PTO (switching it on
and keeping it running) from the body is provided.
Gearbox PTO (Automatic gearbox)
In general the PTO operation (including the 24V
interlocks) in combination with automatic
gearboxes is identical to the manual gearbox 5
01
PTO operation, with the following exception; C751
7 1
After switching the PTO on and complying with
4594
the interlocks programmed, the E/P valve output
(2) of the BBM is activated. This signal is used by VIC-3 Lite 4595 ECU AGC
the automatic gearbox control unit ( AGC-A4) as D358L D312
a request for activating the gearbox PTO. The
4596
3410
5701
automatic gearbox control unit checks its internal
parametring ( see chapter 7.15: "Automated and 1
automatic gearboxes") whether the PTO can be F088 G371

switched on. 2
4596
1
B246
G001205
Gearbox PTO (Automated gearbox)

DAF introduced an automated gearbox called 24V
AS-Tronic. This is a mechanical gearbox, which
9 is operated via an electronic control unit. This 5

01
means that some of the driver's tasks are C750
monitored or taken over. 7 1

The PTO which is fitted to this gearbox, therefore
4594
has a control/protection system that is different

from that used in combination with the manually AS-Tronic VIC-3 Lite 4596
operated gearboxes. D945 D358L
3410
There is a choice between two settings of the 1
PTO interlocks: 1 B245

2
F087
- operation of PTO on a stationary vehicle
2
- operation of PTO on a moving vehicle
Operation of PTO on a stationary vehicle is G001204
always the basic setting

Cut-in conditions:
- The handbrake must be active
- The engine is running
- The gearbox must be in neutral
- The engine speed is lower than Nmax cut-in
(650 rpm)
- The vehicle speed is lower than 1.5 km/h
Cut-out conditions:

266 201122
- The handbrake must be de-activated

- The engine is not running
- The vehicle contact is switched off
- The vehicle speed is higher than 1.5 km/h
Gear-shift commands are not carried out during
PTO operation.
Operation of PTO on a moving vehicle should
be activated using the diagnostic tool (DAVIE XD)
Cut-in conditions:
(650 rpm)
Cut-out conditions:
Changing gear during driving is not possible. So
when driving off, the gear eventually required
during driving should already be engaged!
Note:
AS-Tronic software version limits
instationary PTO use, to 1st and RL gear. No
gearchange is possible in this version. Check
the vehicle configuration on this in case
instationary PTO use is required.
Depending on the situation, the PTO warning is
given between 2 and 5 seconds after a defect or
undesirable situation occurs. 9
Customer parameter list
In the next tables all related customer parameters

are listed.
201122 267

parameter
ID
PTO-1 switch on conditions
1-01 PTO 1 ON - brake valid VIC-3L ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE
PTO 1 ON - brake use VIC-3L PRESSED / RE-
1-02
LEASED
1-03 PTO 1 ON - clutch valid VIC-3L ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE
1-04 PTO 1 ON - clutch use VIC-3L PRESSED / RE-
LEASED
1-05 PTO 1 ON - park brake valid VIC-3L ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE
1-06 PTO 1 ON - park brake use VIC-3L APPLIED / RE-
LEASED
1-07 PTO 1 ON - engine running valid VIC-3L ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE
1-08 PTO 1 ON - engine running use VIC-3L RUNNING / NOT
RUNNING
1-09 PTO 1 ON - maximum engine speed VIC-3L Rpm
1-10 PTO 1 ON - maximum vehicle speed VIC-3L km/h

parameter
ID
PTO-1 switch off conditions
9 1-12 PTO 1 OFF - brake valid VIC-3L ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE
PTO 1 OFF - brake use VIC-3L PRESSED / RE-
1-13
LEASED
1-14 PTO 1 OFF - clutch valid VIC-3L ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE
1-15 PTO 1 OFF - clutch use VIC-3L PRESSED / RE-
LEASED
1-16 PTO 1 OFF - park brake valid VIC-3L ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE
1-17 PTO 1 OFF - park brake use VIC-3L APPLIED / RE-
LEASED
1-18 PTO 1 OFF - engine running valid VIC-3L ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE
1-19 PTO 1 OFF - engine running use VIC-3L RUNNING / NOT
RUNNING
1-20 PTO 1 OFF - maximum engine speed VIC-3L Rpm
1-21 PTO 1 OFF - maximum vehicle speed VIC-3L km/h

268 201122

parameter
ID
PTO-1 Other
1-31 PTO 1 Type VIC-3L STATIONAIRY /
INSTATION-
AIRY / ENGINE
1-34 PTO 1 ON Timeout VIC-3L Milliseconds
1-35 PTO 1 OFF Timeout VIC-3L Milliseconds
9.12 LF SERIES FMS SYSTEM
LF series FMS system

8360: without Fleet Management System
6407: with Fleet Management System
preparation
ECU VIC-L
D358L
A126
9
G001193
Applicable FMS application connectors

cabine:
connector A126: in section 12.44: "Connector A126 FMS 2-pole".

FMS stands for Fleet Management System and is
used to provide information about condition of the
vehicle to the fleet owner for logistic purposes.
The (wireless) transmission of the data from
vehicle to user is performed by a third party ECU
which will get the data provided by the VIC-3 via
de D-CAN interface.
201122 269
The main vehicle manufacturers, including DAF,

have together agreed on the data to be
the CAN link. Third parties are able to connect
and to get the data from the truck CAN bus
system. This document describes which D-CAN
messages will to be supported via the FMS
prepared selco 6407.
ECU VIC D358
V-CAN 1 A
V-CAN 2 B D-CAN
I-CAN
C
G001139
A D-CAN gateway for FMS standard
messages
B D-CAN gateway for additional DTS
messages (for future use)
C PLC functions
From week 2008-13 a new two pole-connector is

available for connecting to the D-CAN bus were
the FMS messages will be broadcasted.
A Fleet Management System needs some
specific information to know which CAN-data is
available and how to handle this CAN-data. This
information is send in the CAN-message FMS
9 standard software version supported. This CAN-
message is accepted by SAE J1939. Before
there was no standard CAN-message and DAF
would send the CAN-message FMS standard
information.
The following table describes the amount of data
which will be send by DAF on the D-CAN for FMS
preparation.

270 201122
Message Message ID (2) Repetition FMS

Rate (ms) Prepared
Selco 6407
EEC2 0C F0 03 00 50 X
EEC1 0C F0 04 00 20 X
Engine hours revolution 18 FE E5 00 On request X
Vehicle Identification 18 FE EC EE On request X
High Resolution Vehicle Distance 18 FE C1 EE 1000 X
TC01 0C FE 6C EE 50 X
Engine temperature 18 FE EE 00 1000 X
Fuel economy 18 FE F2 00 100 X
Service 18 FE C0 27 1000 X
Vehicle weight 18 FE EA 27 1000 X
Dash display 18 FE FC 27 1000 X
FMS standard interface 1C FD D1 27 10000 X
CCVS 18 FE F1 00 100 X
Fuel consumption 18 FE E9 00 1000 X
DM1 18 FE CA XX 1000 (1) X
TP_DT (BAM) 1C EB FF XX - X
TP_CM 1C EC FF XX - X
DM1 VIC 18 FE CA 27 1000 X
TP_DT (BAM) 1C EB FF XX - X
TP_CM 1C EC FF XX - X
PropB_BBM 18 FF 82 25 250 X
ERC1_XR 18 F0 00 29 100 X
ERC1_DR
EBC1
18 F0 00 10
18 F0 01 0B
100
100
X
X
9
Tire condition (truck) 18 FE F4 33 500 X
Tire condition (trailer) 18 FE F4 C8 500 X
EBS23 18 FE C6 C8 100 X
RGE23 18 FE 5E C8 1000 X
EBS22 18 FE C4 C8 100 X
RGE22 18 FE 5C C8 100 X
Ambient conditions 18 FE F5 00 1000 X
Inlet / exhaust conditions 18 FE F6 00 500 X
Engine fluid level pressure 18 FE EF 00 500 X
Time date 18 FE E6 EE 1000 X
PropB_EST42 18 FF 40 10 100 X
Tank information #1 18 FE 56 3D 1000 X
Driver information 18 FE 6B EE On request X
Combination vehicle weight 18 FE 70 0B On request X
ETC2 18 F0 05 03 100 X
201122 271
Message Message ID (2) Repetition FMS

Rate (ms) Prepared
Selco 6407
Operator wiper and washer controls 18 FD CD 27 100 X
Operator external Light controls 18 FD CC 27 100 X
Cab illumination 18 D0 FF 27 5000 X
Vehicle hours 18 FE EC 27 1000 X
(1) Repetition rate when DM1 is active.

(2) For detailed message content see equivalent document "FMS CAN message overview.pdf" on the information sheet web page.
(The Internet URL for the corporate DAF website is: www.daf.com -> follow the main menu item: "Products" -> Bodybuilder
guidelines webpage -> Information Sheet webpage)
9.13 REFUSE PREPARATION LF

SERIES

9107: 30 +85km
A068
9240: Application connector refuse collector
NOTE: Connector 3P is always present
due to standardisation.
For part numbers of the bulkhead ECU VIC-L
connectors check chapter 9.2: "LF 3P
D358L
series bulkhead connections".
ECU ECS-D5
4V D364
5V
BBM
6V D993
9 56W
G001218-1
Connec- Description (1)

tor loca-
tion
Codes (2)
3P Engine Speed Control, see section: 12.5: "Connector 3P ESC system"
4V Refuse Collector, see section: 12.8: "Connector 4V refuse collector"
56W Refuse Collector, see section: 12.14: "Connector 56W refuse collector"
(2) The here mentioned connector location codes sometimes are identical with the connector code of the actual plugged in
connector.

272 201122
The LF series can be specified with Selco 9240,

which will offer 4 connectors in the narrow sized
bulkhead lead through located in the middle of
the cab front panel. Signal processing is carried
out in a BBM (Body Builder Module) application.
A refuse preparation enables a body builder
to activate special refuse functionality such
as:
1. Stop&Go
2. Body Release
3. Body Active
4. High rpm Request
5. Vehicle speed limitation with operated
footboard
6. Remote engine start
7. Remote engine stop
8. Brake control
9. Speed Switches
1. Stop&Go
This function automates the process of
shifting from drive to neutral at vehicle
standstill and shifting from neutral to drive
when driving off without the driver manually
have to operate the gear shift selector. The
Stop&Go function can be activated and
deactivated by the driver by operating the
toggle switch. When this function is active,
the superstructure of a refuse truck can set a
high idle speed or customer to derive
mechanical energy from the vehicle to
activate special functions, e.g. pumps. A
PTO can be switched on by activating an EP
valve. The driver can request activation of
the PTO by activating a PTO switch. Before
activating the PTO the BBM will check if the
switch-on conditions are met. Also the PTO 9
will be disabled if, with an activated PTO, one
of the switch-off conditions are met. The
switch on and off conditions can be adjusted
by the DAF dealer via DAVIE. Up to two
PTO's can be controlled by the Body Builder
Module.
2. Body Release.
This function can be used to provide the
body builder with the information that the
vehicle is in a secure state of operation. The
body builder can use this signal to safely
operate/control the superstructure. It is
possible to configure the reset conditions for
body release by adjustin the customer
parameters.
3. Body Active.
This function is a safety function and will
enable or disable the outputs to the function
body release and high rpm request
depending on the input status body active. If
the body active input is enabled both
seperate outputs will be set for activation.
201122 273
The outputs will be enabled if the related

input for this output (high rpm request and
body release) are active. These outputs will
be disabled if the enable condition aren't met
anymore.
4. High rpm request.
This function is to set a predefined engine
speed when a high engine speed is
requested by the superstructure. The
requested engine speed will only be set if the
switch on conditions are met. This enables
the superstructure of a refuse truck to set a
high idle engine speed N3 in neutral gear
position at vehicle standstill. The
superstructure can request this high idle
engine speed to drive a hydro pump to
perform a press cycle. When the autoneutral
request is released, engine speed N2
(reduced high idle speed) is set and the
engine speed drops in order to enable the
Allison gearbox to shift from neutral to drive
(Stop&Go functionality) and to limit clutch
wear with manual gearboxes.
5. Vehicle speed limitation with active
footboard.
In this function the Vmax application input or
application speed limiter input from a body
builder CAN message is used to set the
signal application speed limiter in a CAN
message to the engine ECU. The function
can be used by the body builder e.g. limiting
speed if a person is on the footboard of a
garbage truck. The speed limit vaue can be
adjusted by a customer parameter.
6. Remote engine start.
In the function Remote Engine Start the
9 Remote Engine Start input from the engine
application connector or the engine start
signal from a CAN message or the internal
engine start (start/stop) signal is used to
control the Remote Engine Start output. This
output is directly connected to the starter
engine relay. The body builder can use this
function to start the engine from outside the
cabin. This function can be used to provide
the body builder with the information that the
parameters.
7. Remote engine stop.
In the function Remote Engine Stop the
Remote Engine Stop input from the engine
application connector or internal Start/Stop
or Engine Stop from a Body builder CAN
message is used to set the signal Engine
Stop in a CAN message to the Engine ECU.
This function can be used by the body builder
to connect an stop button.

274 201122
8. Brake Control.
If somebody is standing on the footboard of
a refuse truck, reversing of the vehicle shall
be made impossible. For refuse trucks the
parking brake must and engine stop can be
activated when reverse gear is selectedwhile
the refuse step switch (Vmax application) is
active. The parking brake must be kept
active untill KL15 is switched off. For safety
reasons, this functions can only be activated
if the vehicle speed is below a predefined
speed (default 30km/h) To activate the
parking brake the BBM activates a 3/2
electro pneumatic valve (via a relay) which
depressurizes the spring brakes. To activate
the engine stop, the BBM sends a CAN
message to the engine.
9. Speed switches.
This function is to provide three information
signals to the body builder; two for indicating
that the vehicle speed is above a predefined
speed (5km/h or 10km/h) and one for
indicating that the engine speed is above a
predefined value (1400rpm)
Customer parameter list in BBM unit
Customer Customer Value
Parameter Parameter (Recommended)
ID Name
PTO status out
1-94 PTO input NO PTO
PTO 1 status
PTO 2 status
PTO 1 and 2 status
(1) For changing default parameter settings see chapter 7.19: "Guideline for the Customer Parameter Change Form". 9
Body Release Refuse
1-99 Body relaese DEACTIVATED
1-101 Driveline engaged NOT ACTIVE
1-102 Maximum engine speed Rpm
1-103 Park Brake APPLIED / RELEASED
1-104 Maximum vehicle speed Km/h
Engine running
1-105 Engine running ENABLED
Remote engine start/stop parameters

1-86 Engine start enable ENABLED
1-87 Engine stop maximum speed 0 km/h
201122 275
Speed switches
1-95 RPM switch 1400 Rpm
1-96 Vehicle speed switch 1 5 km/h
1-97 Vehicle speed switch 2 10 Km/h
Stop & Go Allison

1-127 External auto neutral request DISABLED
CVSG (Gauges)
1-120 Coolant temperature DISABLED
1-121 Oil pressure DISABLED
1-122 Oil temperature DISABLED
1-123 Fuel level DISABLED
1-124 Transmission oil temperature DISABLED
1-125 Air pressure circuit 1 DISABLED
Fault detection Vmax Application pin C17

1-128 Fault detection pin C17 Open circuit /
Short circuit ground
Customer parameter list in ECS-DC5 unit

ID Name
LIMITERS
9 2-10
2-11
Vmax APPLICATION SPEED
vmax ESC
30 Km/h
30 Km/h
2-12 MAX. CRUISE CONTROL SPEED 85 Km/h
(1) For changing default parameter settings see chapter 7.19: "Guideline for the Customer Parameter Change Form".

2-14 MAX. ESC-SPEED 1500 Rpm
2-15 MIN. ESC-SPEED 600 Rpm
2-18 ACCELERATION RAMP CONTINUOUS UP ESC 200 Rpm/s
2-19 ACCELERATION RAMP CONTINUOUS DOWN ESC 200 Rpm/s
2-20 ACCELERATE UP PER TIP 25 Rpm/tip
2-38 DEACCELERATE DOWN PER TIP 25 Rpm/tip
2-22 ACCELERATE FROM IDLE TO TARGET SPEED IN 1000 Rpm/s
ESC
2-16 ESC CAB N1 600 Rpm

276 201122

2-28 ESC CHANGE APPLICATION CONN. N2 850 Rpm

2-30 ACCEL. PEDAL ACTIVE
2-31 MAX. RPM ACCEL. PEDAL 1500 Rpm
2-32 PARK BRAKE NOT ACTIVE
2-33 BRAKE NOT ACTIVE
9.14 LF SERIES TRAILER

CONNECTION POINTS
Vehicle models for drawbar applications always

have a 24V electric trailer connection.
The electric trailer connection consists of three 7-
pin sockets:
- Standard Lighting connector A000; see
section 12.18: "Connector A000 trailer
system (ISO1185 type 24N)"
- Accessories connector A001; see section
12.19: "Connector A001 trailer system
(ISO3731 type 24S)"
- ABS/EBS connector A004; see section
(ISO7638)"
201122 277

278 201122
Electrical system CF series
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM CF SERIES

Page Date
10.1 CF series cab switch and connector locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 201122
10.2 CF series bulkhead connection overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 201122
10.3 CF75 and CF85 series chassis connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 201122
10.4 CF series accessories connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 201122
10.5 CF series accessories connection in dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 201122
10.6 CF series power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 201122
10.7 CF series radio preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 201122
10.8 CF series CB preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 201122
10.9 CF series telephone preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 201122
10.10 CF series anti-theft protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 201122
10.11 CF series refrigerator preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 201122
10.12 CF series LED preparation immobiliser / Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 201122
10.13 CF65 Series ESC control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 201122
10.14 CF65 series FMS system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 201122
10.15 CF series trailer connection points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 201122
10.16 CF75 - CF85 ESC system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 201122
10.17 CF75 - 85 series FMS / DTS system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 201122
10.18 CF series PTO control / protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 201122
10.19 Refuse preparation CF75 - CF85 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 201122
10.20 Hydraulic Platform CF75 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 201122
10
201122 279
10

280 201122
10.ELECTRICAL SYSTEM CF SERIES

10.1 CF SERIES CAB SWITCH AND
CONNECTOR LOCATIONS
Switch positions, overhead console

1 Tachograph
2 Toll Collect (ECU) connector (See
12.48: "Connector D318 (ECU) Toll Col-
lect".)
3 Switch working light on roof
4 Switch rotating beam
5 Spare / CB / telephone microfoon
RES reserve points
1 2 3 4 5 RES
Switch positions, dashboard
DTS 20 21 22
19
18
17
16
15
14
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
G001223
1 Work lamp 12 hazard switch

2 Control light cargo lift active/open 13 Main switch
3 Cargo lift 14 DTS plug LAN and USB
4 PTO 3 15 reverse buzzer
5 PTO 2 16 Reserve
6 PTO 1 17 FMS connector location.
(See 12.46: "Connector A138 FMS 12-
pole".)
7 Stop & Go 18 HD-OBD plug
(See 12.33: "Connector A100 HD-OBD di-
agnose".)
201122 281
8 Surround lights Hydraulic platform 19 Storage recess 2 and 3 or DTS unit

9 12V accessories plug with cigar lighter 20 Radio recess 1
(See 12.22: "Connector A011 accessories
12V 2-pole".)
10 24V accessories plug 21 Cross lock rear axle
(See 12.21: "Connector A007 accessories
24V 2-pole". )
11 Telephone carkit 22 Lane departure warning assistant
For an overview of available switches and

symbols, see section 7.14: "DAF
dashboardpanel switches and indication lights".
10.2 CF SERIES BULKHEAD

CONNECTION OVERVIEW
Bulkhead lead-through overview
1 A B C D
2
3
4
1
12D
5 2 2
6
7 3 3C 3
8 34A
9
4 4C 4D 4
10 5 5
56A
6
7 7
78B
8 8A 8
9 9
10
10A 10C 10A
10 G001185

282 201122
Connec- Description (1)

tor loca-
tion
Codes (2)
3C Engine torque limiter, see section: 12.3: "Connector 3C engine torque limiter"
4C Engine Speed Control, see section: 12.6: "Connector 4C ESC system"
4D PTO control, see section: 12.7: "Connector 4D PTO control system"
Refuse preparation, see section: 12.39: "Connector A113 garbage truck"
8A Hydraulic platform preparation, see section: 12.41: "Connector A122 hydraulic platform 9-
pole"
12D Bodybuilder functions, see section: 12.11: "Connector 12D body builder"
34A - Fleet Management Systems (FMS), see section: 12.31: "Connector A097 FMS system"
(For general communication standard information, see section: 8.1: "Data communication
CAN SAE J1939 / ISO 11898 (including FMS)")
56A Accessories, see section: 12.13: "Connector 56A accessories"
Refuse preparation, see section: 12.30: "Connector A095 application refuse collector"
78B Hydraulic platform preparation, see section: 12.42: "Connector A123 hydraulic platform 21-
pole"
(2) The here mentioned connector location codes sometimes are identical with the connector code of the actual plugged in
connector.
WARNING! All signals mentioned in

the tables explaining application
connector pinning are active +24V
(HS = High Side) and inactive open
or 0V (LS = Low Side) unless stated
otherwise!
Bulkhead lead-through for body functions

(connector code 12D)
For the bodybuilding industry, a 21-pin
application connector is available, as standard, in
the bulkhead lead-through, so that the 10
bodybuilder can subsequently simply take up
signals, without interfering with the standard
system. The following signals are available:
NOTE: The power supply before
contact ( Kl.30) is fused via fuse E142.
The power supply after contact is fused
via fuse E163. Both the fuses are
designed for 25A current. Via E142 also
other equipment, like rotating beacons,
refrigerator, main beam lights etc. are
fused.
The CAN wiring for CAN-H / CAN-L is available in

the bulkhead lead-through following assembly of
the "BODY BUILDER MODULE" (BBM), which
can be ordered as an accessory. CAN wiring for
body functions may be up to 40 metres long,
201122 283
provided that a terminal resistor of 120 ohms is

installed at the end. The maximum length of the
stubs must not exceed 1 metre. The twisted
wiring, orange/yellow, with protection, must
comply with SAE standard J1939/21.
Option BB-CAN
The option Body Builder CAN default provides
communication only from the vehicle to the body.
For applications involving the transmission of
CAN messages to the vehicle, contact DAF. For
special applications and specific customer
requirements, DAF can supply the so-called BBM
Full, which is described in section 8.4: "Body
Builders' Module (Optional)". This offers the
possibility of tailor-made solutions.
10.3 CF75 AND CF85 SERIES

CHASSIS CONNECTIONS
NOTE: Following information is NOT

valid for CF65 chassis. For these
vehicles see section 9.3: "LF and CF65
series chassis connections".
10

284 201122

1
2
3
4
5 (R) L=200 mm
5 (L) L=2500 mm
6
G000541
G001300
Position Connector description (1)

Code
1 A068 Application connector for engine speed control; see section:
12.26: "Connector A068 (chassis - ESC system)"
2 A070 Application connector for superstructure; see section:
12.27: "Connector A070 accessories 8-pole)"
3 A102 Application connector for body function spare wires (12-pin); see
section: 12.34: "Connector A102 body builder 8-pole"
4 A103 Application connector for body function signals (8-pin); see section:
12.35: "Connector A103 bodybuilder 12-pole"
5 Connection for side markers (2x)
6 A105 Application connector BB-CAN chassis; see section:
12.37: "Connector A105 Bodybuilder CAN system 7-pole"
7 A088 Application connector Taillift preperation (8-pin); see section:
12.29: "Connector A088 taillift system 7-pole"
10
(1) Check out the indicated sections for additional information on offered functionality, pinning and wire numbers within the
connectors used.
Side marker lights

At the position of the first side marker behind the
cab, on right-hand side, there are two cables with
a 2-pin connector. Both connectors contain wire
numbers 2102 and 2103. Side markers and top
lights can be connected from here using the cable
harnesses that are mentioned in chapter
13.6: "Electric cable contour lights chassis"
201122 285
10.4 CF SERIES ACCESSORIES

CONNECTIONS
Wiring headershelf Space Cab

There are several connectors available in the
headershelf at the driver side.
- 9-pin connector 182C: in section 183C
12.15: "Connector 182C power supply".
- 12-pin connector 183C: in section
182C
E502818
Spare wiring
There is no spare wiring from dashboard area via
the A-pillar to the headershelf.
10.5 CF SERIES ACCESSORIES

CONNECTION IN DASHBOARD
Spare wiring from dashboard area to

bulkhead lead-through
The wiring runs from a 18-pole connector (A104)
behind the radio compartment to the bulkhead
lead-through 12D. The number of spare wires is
11, except when a FMS preparation is present. In
this case spare wire A1 is used as wire 3772
panic button input for the FMS system. For details
see 8.1: "Data communication CAN SAE J1939 /
10 ISO 11898 (including FMS)".
A B C D
1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10
E502841-2
Connector 12D

286 201122
Check the sections indicated below for additional

information on pinning and wire numbers within
the connectors used:
- connector A104 in section:
12.36: "Connector A104 spare wiring 18-
pole" .
- connector 12D in section:
12.11: "Connector 12D body builder".
A104
G000462
Connector A104
10.6 CF SERIES POWER SUPPLY
Power Supply
The power supply for all accessoiries should be
taken from connector 12D in the bulkhead lead-
through.
For details on pinning see chapter
- Power supply - 24V/25A before contact, wire
number 1154, and 24V/25A after contact,
wire number 1258 - is available in the 6-pin
green connector in the central box behind
10
the fuse/relay board. In this connector, the
signals 'engine running' (3157), 'cab locking'
(3412) and 'earth' (2x) are also available.
- 24V/40A power supply, before contact, is
available in the 2-pin connector in the central
box behind the fuse/relay board. Wire
numbers: 1175 and M.
- 24V/10A via the accessory plug on the
dashboard, beside the lighter position.
Remember the total permissible power supply as
stated in section 7.9: "Maximum load".
Beside this 24V connection, there are two earth
connections, M8 screw version, in positions 10C
and 10D, in the bulkhead lead-through.
201122 287
12V/10A or 12V/20A (optional) power supply is

available behind the panel of the central console
for radio and telephone, and in the overhead
console for CB and fax (see below).
WARNING! The 24V connections on
the bulkhead lead-through (10A) and
on the distributor block behind the
foot panel on the co-driver's side are
all un-fused and must not be used
for power supply unless separately
fused within 10 cm from the
connection.
NOTE: a maximum of 3 ring connectors

per bolt connection.
Accessories preparations
Several preparations are standard in the CF
series cab.
40A power supply preparation
This is a 2 pole connector ( connector code
A038). Designed for currents up to 40 A!. See
section: 12.23: "Connector A038 accessories".
The wires 1175 (Kl30) and M22 (earth) are both
4,0 mm. The powersupply is taken via fuse E168
Kl30 (before contact). The fuse is a MAXI FUSE,
located on the top side of the fuse-relay board.
See also chapter 7.4: "Earth connections".
10.7 CF SERIES RADIO

PREPARATION
8304: no radio, no speakers

8305: no radio, with basic speakers
10
8450: no radio, with luxury speakers
8508: basic radio/CD player
8562: luxury radio/CD player
12V converter is 10A. A 20A version
is available. The total current
consumption from the 12V supply
before and after contact for
together, must not exceed the
specified value. Splitting of the 12V
circuit using more than one
converter is necessary if additional
current consumption is required.
Installing a heavier-duty converter is
not recommended, in view of cable
diameters and suppression.

288 201122
Radio preparation
For the radio connection, an ISO connector is B
fitted behind the radio panel, with 12V/10A power
supply before contact (wire 1108), power supply A
after contact (wire 1363, switched via relay G377)
and earth (M). Also, for the loudspeakers, the
wiring to the door, A-pillar (for tweeters) and rear
wall (for loudspeakers) has been prepared as
standard. If tweeters are installed, a dividing filter
must be fitted.
Position Connec- Description
tor
D347.A Power supply
24V radio
A
238C Power supply
12V radio
G001220
B D347.B Loudspeakers
radio
WARNING! If a vehicle is ordered

without radio (selco 8304, 8305 or
8450) the three above mentioned
connectors are available were
connector D347.A is tightened up. If
a vehicle is ordered with radio (selco
8508 or 8562) only connector D347.A
and D347.B are available. When the
vehicle needs to be rebuild from 24V
into 12V radio an extra wiring loom
has to be ordered at DAF.
10.8 CF SERIES CB PREPARATION
CB preparation
In the headershelf there is a 2-pole white
connector (connector code B026) containing the
wires 1108 (+12V,Kl30 ) en M515 (earth).
B026
10
These are meant for connecting CB or fax
equipment.
1 2 3 4 5 RES
G001222
201122 289
10.9 CF SERIES TELEPHONE

PREPARATION
Telephone preparation
For a telephone connection, space has been A076
reserved on the right-hand side of the radio
panel. An AMP plug is fitted as standard behind
the radio panel, with 12V/10A power supply
before contact (wire 1108), 12V/25 mA power
supply after contact (wire 1353) and earth (M).
Check the section 12.28: "Connector A076
telephone" for additional information on pinning
and wire numbers within this connector used.
G001221
10.10 CF SERIES ANTI-THEFT

PROTECTION
CF series
If the vehicle is fitted with the standard anti-theft
protection system, the body can be connected to
the vehicle system via the application connector
accessories.
See section 10.3: "CF75 and CF85 series
chassis connections" and 9.14: "LF series trailer
connection points".
Wire numbers 3659 and 3660 are both inputs
10 connected to ground via a switch. If interrupted,
the alarm will sound. Wire 3651 is a 12 V supply
coming from the alarm system, and meant for the
power supply of the interior motion detection.
versions, contact DAF.

290 201122
10.11 CF SERIES REFRIGERATOR

PREPARATION
Refrigerator preparation
The refrigerator wiring is standard prepared and
can be found in the lower bed bunk. In this
connector (connector code B356) the wires 1154
(+24V, Kl30) en M72 (earth) can be found.
NOTE: The powersupply 1154 runs via
fuse E142. Via this fuse also other
functions are secured among which as
rotating beacons, bodybuilder
application connector etc. See section
7.13: "Connection points and permitted
power loads" for the maximum
permitted load on fuse E142.
E501557
10.12 CF SERIES LED PREPARATION

IMMOBILISER / ALARM
LED preparation immobiliser / Alarm

In the headershelf there is a 2-pole black
connector (connector code 143C). The wire 1107
and 3482 are meant for connecting the LED of the
immobiliser.
10
E501556
201122 291
10.13 CF65 Series ESC control

0761: without engine speed control connector
A068
0797: with engine speed control cab connector
9231: with engine speed control chassis
connector ECU BBM
D993
NOTE: Connector 4C is always present
due to standardisation if selco 0797 is 4C
selected including correct BBM
software. 12D
For part numbers of the bulkhead
connectors check chapter
13.4: "Electric connector parts cabine
(CF75-85 and XF Series)".
G001166
connector A068 in the vehile chassis: see section 12.26: "Connector A068 (chassis - ESC system)".
connector 4C in the bulkhead: see section 12.6: "Connector 4C ESC system".

10 customer parameters using DAVIE. The engine
the steering wheel switches, if the correct
selection codes have been chosen, through the
superstructure equipment via the relevant
application connector (A068 hardwired).
Enabling the engine speed control via one of the
application connectors takes priority over the
steering wheel switches.
- Steering column switch

292 201122

the BBM (Body Builder Module)
- Cab application connector (4C connector)
- Chassis application connector (A068
connector)
ECS-DC5, ECU D364
PropA_ BBM_to_Engine:
18EF0025
0CFE6CEE
V-CAN 2
18F0010B
18F00503
EBC1:
ETC2:
TC01:
Tacho AS Tronic ABS

ECU ECU VIC-3, ECU, BBM, ECU,
D525 D9 5 4 D8 5 0 D3 5 8 D99 3
PropA_ Body_to_BBM:
ESC SET / RES
PropB_ SW:
ESC enable
18FF604D
ESC N var
18EF25E6
TSC1_BE:
0C0000E6
ESC set +
ESC set +
ESC set -
ESC set -
ESC N2
ESC N3
ESC off
Steering colum Steering wheel Application Application

10
switch switches connector connector
C907 C9 16 A105 A106 4C or A068

IF BB-CAN
G001143
General ESC system layout (VIC3 - ECS-DC5)

CAN Message id Used CAN Signals for ESC Startbit Length
Message name
PropB_SW 18FF604D
201122 293

CAN Message id Used CAN Signals for ESC Startbit Length
Message name
Brake switch 28 2
Clutch switch 30 2
Engine start 42 2
ESC enable 48 2
ESC set minus 50 2
ESC n variabel 52 2
PropA_ BBM_
18EF25E6 ESC set plus 54 2
to_Engine
Application speed limiter 56 2
ESC N2 58 2
ESC N3 60 2
Engine stop 62 2

10 VIC can receive the engine speed control signals

from the steering wheel switches (via CAN) or via
the steering column switch (hardwired). The VIC
translates these signals into a CAN message,
which is sent to the engine control unit. The
steering column switches and the steering wheel
switches have the same engine speed control
operating functions, namely: "SET+", "SET-",
"SET", "RESUME" AND "OFF".

294 201122
G000391
Steering wheel switches and stalk lever switches.
Operating functions of the steering wheel switches

Function Standard setting Choices in ECS-DC5
(D364) via DAVIE
ter)
Brief operating (2) of "SET +" during engine speed control CP 2-16
activates the set speed engine speed. The activation re-
acts on the falling edge of the signal.
Brief operation (2) of "SET -" during engine speed control CP2-17
activates the resume speed engine speed. The activation
reacts on the falling edge of the signal.
Long operation (1) of "SET +" during engine speed control 0<ramp<400 [rpm/s]
gives a continuous increase of the preset desired speed CP2-22
SET +
SET -
Long operation (1) of "SET -" during engine speed control 0<ramp<400 [rpm/s]
gives a continuous decrease of the preset desired speed CP2-22
between minimum and the maximum speed to be set. it<N_max (rpm) via CP2-
Res Operating "Res" activates the engine speed control and

15 and CP2-14
To be set using CP2-17
10
(default 1200 rpm). Activation by operating "Res" using CP2-14 and CP2-
(resume) button twice. With this "Res" button the opera- 15
tion can toggle between N1 and N2..
ton.
(1) Long operation: touch time>0,1s

(2) Brief operation: touch time<0,1s
Switch on and off conditions

namely:
km/h. (CP2-11)
201122 295

CP)
speed.
plausibility
speed.
communication.
signal.
signal.
gearbox signal.
If the above conditions are met, the application
connector can be used in various ways to activate
the engine speed control, namely via:
Hardwired or CAN Activation Priority (1)
Application connector Hardwired ESC enable 1
PropA_Body_to_BBM CAN ESC enable 2
10 (1) If a untit is active and a unit with a higher priority is activated, the unit with the highest priority will become active immediately.
Only one unit of the above variations can be active, so no combination of various units is possible.
The above table indicates that hardwired

activation has the highest priority followed by
activation via CAN.

296 201122
Application
connector PropA_ Body_to_BBM:
18EF25E6
12D
TSC1_BE:
IF BB-CAN 0C0000E6
BBM, ECU, ECS-DC5,
ESC set - ECU
D993 18EF0025
ESC set +
Application D364
connector ESC N2
ESC N3
4C or A068
ESC enable
ESC N var
G001144

the body connection (see relevant selco's), the
engine speed control through the steering wheel
or column switch. The functions "SET+" and
"SET-" are controlled using pulse and continuous
signals. Via the hardwired input on the application
connector, two engine speeds N2 or N3 are to be
reprogrammed and a variable speed (Nvar) are
also to be activated. To activate these speeds the
engine speed control first must be enabled by
providing a high signal on pin 7 of the cab
connector 4C or chassis connector A068. Then
N2 and N3 can be activated providing a high
signal on pins 10 and 11 respectively of this
connector and if a high signal is provided on pin 8
of the above connectors, Nvar is activated. It is
not possible to wire the ESC enable and N2 or N3
together to switch ESC on. The ESC enable must
be switched on before the required set speed is
switched on.
10
201122 297
Operating functions of the application connector (4C or A068)

(1)
Function Standard setting Choice in ECS-DC5
via DAVIE
(CP = customer
parameter)
(constant value).
Brief operation of "SET +/-" during engine speed control 0<step<400 [rpm] via
gives a stepped increase or reduction of the engine speed CP2-20 and CP2-38
(default 25 rpm).
SET +
SET -
Pulsing (2) or
continuous (3)
( 0 rpm) via CP2-15 and
CP2-14
N_variable
14
10 N_3 Operating "N3" activates the engine speed control and To be set using CP2-29
14
V_max If the Vmax application input is activated by providing a 24 Adjustable using CP2-10
application (5) V signal, the vehicle speed is limited to the pre-pro- between a value of 10
grammed value (default 30 km/h). and 24km/h (6)
pulse
(1) If operated simultaneously, the priority is as follows (high to low):"enable ESC", "N2", "N3", "Nvar" (set+/-)
(2) Pulse signal; when rising edge reaches value of 0,6xUbat
(3) Continuous signal; "high" at a voltage level of 0,6xUbat and "low" if below a level of 0,4xUbat
(4) Long operation; touch time>0,1s
(5) Special applications (e.g. refuse vehicles)
(6) Contact Sales engineering for speed limit higher than 24km/h

298 201122
Activation of engine speed control via CAN

message PropA_Body_to_BBM
In addition to calling up two, pre-set target speeds

via the hardwired option, it is also possible,
providing selection code 9562 "with application
connector body builder CAN" has been chosen,
to activate these target speeds via CAN. To be
able to use this functionality, the body must
provide CAN message PropA_Body_to_BBM
with identifier 18_EF_25_E6 to pin 17 and 18 of
connector 12D. The data that must be provided in
this message is as follows:
Signal Byte Bit Type Offset Min Max Unit Comments
name
ESC enable 7 2,1 Status - 0 3 - 00b=passive
10b=error
01b=active
11b=not available
ESC set 7 4,3 Status - 0 3 - 00b=passive
min 10b=error
01b=active
11b=not available
ESC N 7 6,5 Status - 0 3 - 00b=passive
variable 10b=error
01b=active
11b=not available
ESC 7 8,7 Status - 0 3 - 00b=passive
set plus 10b=error
01b=active
11b=not available
ESC N2 8 4,3 Status - 0 3 - 00b=passive
10b=error
01b=active
11b=not available
10b=error
01b=active
11b=not available
10
Engine re- 5 4,3 Status - 0 - 00b=override disabled
quested 01b=Speed control
Speed Con- 10b=Torque control
trol Condi- 11b=Speed/Torque limit control
tions
201122 299

name
Engine 5 -2,1 Status - 0 3 - 00b=Transient optimized for
Override driveline
Control disengaged and non-lockup con-
mode ditions
01b= Stability optimized for drive-
line
disengaged and non-lockup con-
ditions
line
engaged and/or in lockup condi-
tion 1
line
tion 2
Engine re- 4,3 Value - 0 803 Rpm
quested 1,87
Speed/ 5
Speed limit
Engine re- 2 Value -125 -125 125 %
quested
Torque/
Torque limit
In message PropA_Body_to_BBM the

commands that are provided through the
hardwired option may also be provided via CAN,
as is evident from the table. In addition, contrary
to earlier releases, a torque/speed limit can be
forced via this message by selecting the correct
CAN configuration of the message provided. This
function makes it possible to select any speed
between the limits defined using customer
parameters (2-14 and 2-15) via the Body Builder
10
CAN.
By way of clarification, an example of the content
of the PropA_Body_to_BBM message is given
below.
PropA_Body_to_BBM (18 EF 25 E6)
Name Sourc Destina- Direc- Data DATA: 01 00 E2 04 F0 F7 41 04
e tion tion Lengt
h
Code
PropA_Bo Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte
dy_ E6 5 X 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
to_BBM 01 00 E2 04 F0 F7 41 04

300 201122
signal Physical Byte / bit (b) = Binair Comment

value number (h) = Hexago-
nal
value
Requested_Torqu -125% Byte 2 00(h) Physical value = (CAN
e_ 0000 000(b) data x rise/scale) + offset =
Torque_ limit (0 x 1/1) + (-125) = -125%
Requested_ 1250 rpm Byte 4,3 04 E2(h) Physical value = (CAN
Speed_ 0000 0100 1110 data x rise/scale) + offset =
Speed_limit 0010(b) (1250 x 1/1) + 0 = 1250
rpm
Requested_ 00b= override disabled Byte 5 F0(h) ( 00)
Speed_Control_ bit 4,3 1111 0000(b)
Condition
Override_Control_ 00b=Transient optimized Byte 5 F0(h) ( 00)
Mode for driveline disengaged bit 2,1 1111 0000(b)
and non-lockup condi-
tions
ESCn3 00b=passive Byte 8 04(h) ( 00)
bit 6,5 0000 0100(b)
ESCn2 01b=active Byte 8 04(h) ( 01)
bit 4,3 0000 0100(b)
ESCn_variable 00b=passive Byte 7 41(h) ( 00)
bit 6,5 1000 0001(b)
ESC_set_plus 01b=active Byte 7 41(h) ( 01)
bit 8,7 0100 0001(b)
ESC_set_minus 00b=passive Byte 7 41(h) ( 00)
bit 4,3 1000 0001(b)
ESC_enable 01b=active Byte 7 41(h) ( 01)
bit 2,1 0100 0001(b)
Engine_stop 00b=passive Byte 8 04(h) ( 00)
bit 8,7 0000 0100(b)
Engine_start 01b=active Byte 6 F7(h) ( 01)
bit 4,3 1111 0111(b)
Application_ 00b=passive Byte 8 04(h) ( 00) 10
speed_ limiter bit 2,1 0000 0100(b)

32)
- The vehicle speed is higher than limit value +
offset (10+5=15 km/h). (CP2-11)
- Clutch pedal is operated. (CP2-34)

201122 301

switches.
clutch signal.
signal.
signal.
temporarily suppressed. These overrule
conditions are:
- ASR activation.
Customer (1) ENGINE SPEED CONTROL

parameter
2-14 MAX ESC SPEED. DMCI Rpm
2-15 MIN ESC SPEED DMCI Rpm
2-16 ACCELERATION RAMP CONTINUOUS DOWN DMCI Rpm/s
ESC
2-17 ACCELERATE UP PER TIP DMCI Rpm/tip
10 2-21 DECELERATE DOWN PER TIP DMCI Rpm/tip
2-22 ACCELERATE FROM IDLE TO TARGET DMCI Rpm/s
SPEED IN ESC
2-27 ESC CHANGE STEERING COLUMN N VARIA- DMCI Rpm
BLE
2-28 ESC CHANGE APPLICATION CONN. N2 DMCI Rpm

302 201122
Customer (1) ENGINE SPEED CONTROL CONDITIONS

parameter
2-30 ACCEL. PEDAL DMCI ACTIVE /
NOT ACTIVE
2-31 MAX RPM ACCELERATOR PEDAL DMCI Rpm
2-32 PARK BRAKE DMCI ACTIVE /
NOT ACTIVE
2-33 BRAKE DMCI ACTIVE /
NOT ACTIVE
2-34 CLUTCH DMCI ACTIVE /
NOT ACTIVE
10.14 CF65 SERIES FMS SYSTEM

6407: with Fleet Management System Tacho
preparation A097 B525
9990: with DAF Telematics System preparation
1075: with DAF Telematics System A098 ECU BBM
D993
12D
ECU ECS-DC5
D364
A138
ECU VIC
D358
ECU Telematics
D324
10
G001167

cabine:
connector A098: in section 12.32: "Connector A098 FMS system".
connector A097: in section 12.31: "Connector A097 FMS system".
connector A138: in section 12.46: "Connector A138 FMS 12-pole".

de D-CAN interface.
Since week 05 of 2011 FMS 2.0 standard is used
by DAF.
201122 303

prepared selco 6407 or the DTS (DAF Telematics
System) prepared selco 9990.
ECU VIC D358
V-CAN 1 A
V-CAN 2 B D-CAN
I-CAN
C
G001139
messages
messages
C PLC functions
From week 2008-13 in total three connectors are

the FMS messages will be broadcasted. One of
these three connectors is the standardised 12-
pins FMS connector and is called A138.
standard software version supported. This CAN-
10 message is accepted by SAE J1939. Before
information.
For detailed FMS message overview and content
of these messages, see equivalent document
"FMS CAN message overview.pdf" on the
information sheet web page. (The internet URL
for corporate DAF website is: www.daf.com ->
follow the main menu item; "Products" ->
Bodybuilder guidelines webpage -> information
sheet webpage.
Terminator resistor D-CAN
FMS and DTS prepared are connected at the end

of the D-CAN bus and therefore a terminator
resistor is required. Vehicles with FMS prepared
are ex-factory equipped with a terminator resistor
in connector A098 on pin 10 and 11. Depending

304 201122
on the connected FMS system (with or without

internally terminator resistor) one terminator
resistor has to be fitted at the end of the D-CAN
bus. In the table below the different situations are
discribed.
Terminator resistor Terminator resistor
in A098 in A138
No FMS system connected Yes No
FMS with internal terminator resistor No No
FMS connected to A098 without terminator resistor No Yes
FMS connected to A138 without terminator resistor Yes No
10.15 CF SERIES TRAILER

CONNECTION POINTS
A 24V electric trailer connection is standard for all

vehicle types.
The electric sockets are lokated on a bracket
behind the cab for tractors and mounted below
the drawbar cross member for rigids.
Different arrangements are possible for the
lighting and accessory connections namely:
1. Two 7-pin sockets (not in combination with
safety regulations ADR)
1. Standard Lighting connector A000; see
system (ISO1185 type 24N)"
2. Accessories connector A001; see
system (ISO3731 type 24S)"
2. One 15-pole socket with locking device (if
ADR is specified)
1. Accessories connector A058; see
10
system (ISO12098)"
3. Aditional 7-pin socket is mounted to connect
the EBS system of the (semi-)trailer
1. EBS connector A004; see section
(ISO7638)"
4. 12V/40A electric trailer connection (Vehicles
for application class 2A. Not in combination
with anti-theft systems)
1. 12V connector (connector code is
A019).
10.16 CF75 - CF85 ESC SYSTEM
CF75 - CF Series ESC control.

NOTE: Following information, except
the PR engine related data, is also valid
for the XF Series.
201122 305

f
Selco description A105
c
codes A068
without engine speed control

0761 a
connector ECU BBM
b D993
(a) + b
4C
with engine speed control cab
0797
A1 A3
connector d
12D A2 A4 A5
a+b
M714
M715
with engine speed control 3C
9231
MAA-2
chassis connector e A106

a+b+c
ECU DMCI
without body builder CAN/with-
9560 D965
out CANopen
with application connector body
9562
builder CAN
a+d+e+f G001186
NOTE: Connector 4C is always present

due to standardisation. If selco 0797 is
selected, the corresponding
functionality is also present (correct
BBM software).
For part numbers of the bulkhead
connectors check chapter
13.4: "Electric connector parts cabine
(CF75-85 and XF Series)".

A068 section: 12.26: "Connector A068 (chassis - ESC system)"
10 A105
A106
section: 12.37: "Connector A105 Bodybuilder CAN system 7-pole"
section: 12.38: "Connector A106 CAN-cab 9-pole"
4C section:12.6: "Connector 4C ESC system"
12D section:12.11: "Connector 12D body builder"

customer parameters using DAVIE. The engine
the steering wheel switches, steering column
switches or, if the correct selection codes have
been chosen, through the superstructure

306 201122
equipment via the relevant application connector

(A068 hardwired and A105 CAN). Enabling the
engine speed control via one of the application
connectors takes priority over the steering
column switches.
- Steering column switch
the BBM (Body Builder Module
- Cab application connector
- Chassis application connector
10
201122 307
DMCI, ECU, D965
18EF0025
0CFE6CEE
V-CAN 2
18F0010B
18F0010B
18F00503
EBC1:
EBC1:
ETC2:
TC01:
Tacho AS Tronic EBS-2 ABS

ECU ECU ECU VIC-2, ECU, BBM, ECU,
D525 D954 D978 D850 D358 D993

PropA_ Body_to_BBM:
PropB_ SW:
ESC enable
ESC N1/N2
18FF604D
ESC N var
18EF25E6
TSC1_BE:
0C0000E6
ESC set +
ESC set +
ESC set -
ESC set -
ESC N2
ESC N3
ESC off
10 Steering colum
switch
Steering wheel
switches
Application
connector
Application
connector
Application
connector
C916 A105 A106 4C or A068 3C
C907
IF BB-CAN
G001187
General ESC control system layout

308 201122

Message name
PropB_SW
18FF604D Cruise control accelerate switch 20 2
Brake switch 28 2
Clutch switch 30 2
Engine requested torque/torque limit 8 8
Engine requested speed/speed conditions 16 16
Engine override control mode 32 2
Engine requested speed control conditions 34 2
ESC enable 48 2
ESC set minus 50 2
10
PropA_ BBM_
18EF0025
to_Engine ESC N variable 52 2
ESC set plus 54 2
Application speed limiter switch 56 2
ESC N2 58 2
ESC N3 60 2
Engine stop 62 2
Override control modes 0 2
Requested speed control condition 2 2
TSC1_BE 0C0000E6 Override control mode priority 4 2
Requested speed speed limit 8 16
Requested torque torque limit 24 8
201122 309

Message name
Engine requested torque/torque limit 8 8
Engine requested speed/speed limit 16 16
Engine override control mode 32 2
Engine requested speed control conditions 34 2
Engine start 42 2
ESC enable 48 2
PropA_body
18EF25E6 ESC set minus 50 2
_to_BBM
ESC n variable 52 2
ESC set plus 54 2
Application speed limiter switch 56 2
ESC N2 58 2
ESC N3 60 2
Engine stop 62 2
(1) only ESC related messages are shown.

VIC can receive the engine speed control signals
from the steering wheel switches (via CAN) or via
the steering column switch (hardwired). The VIC
translates these signals into a CAN message,
which is sent to the engine control unit.
The steering column switches and the steering
wheel switches have the same engine speed
control operating functions, namely: "SET+",
"SET-", "N1", "N2" and "OFF".
10
G000391
Steering wheel and stalk lever switches

310 201122
Operating functions of the steering column and steering wheel switches

Function Standard setting Choices in DMCI via
DAVIE
ter)
(constant value).
Brief operation (1) of "SET +/-" during ESC gives a 0<step<400 [rpm]
stepped increase or reduction of engine speed (default 25 CP2-20 and CP2-38
rpm)
SET + Long operation (2) of "SET +/-" during engine speed con- 0<ramp<400 [rpm/s]
SET - trol gives a continuous increase or reduction of the preset CP2-18 and 2-19
When "SET +/-" is released, the current engine speed is
between minimum (N_min = idling) and the maximum it<N_max (rpm) via CP2-
speed to be set. 15 and CP2-14
N1 Operating "N1" activates the engine speed control and To be set using CP2-16
(default 800 rpm). Activation using "RES" (resume) but- using CP2-15 and CP2-
ton. 14
N2 Operating "N2" activates the engine speed control and To be set using CP2-17
(default 1200 rpm). Activation by operating "RES" using CP2-15 and CP2-
(resume) button twice. With this "RES" button the opera- 14
tor can toggle between N1 and N2.
ton.
(1) Brief operation: touch time < 0.3 s

(2) Long operation: touch time > 0.3 s

10
namely:
km/h. (CP2-11)
CP)
speed.
plausibility
speed.
201122 311

communication.
signal.
signal.
gearbox signal.
If the above conditions are met, the application
connector can be used in various ways to activate
the engine speed control, namely via:
Hardwired or CAN Activation Priority (1)
Application connector Hardwired ESC enable 1
CAN ESC enable and 2
PropA_Body_to_BBM
Engine override control mode
TSC1_BE CAN ESC enable and 3
(torque/speed limitation) Engine override control mode
(1) If a unit is active and a unit with a higher priority is activated, the unit with the highest priority will become active immediately.
Only one unit of the above variations can be active, so no combination of various units is possible.
The above table indicates that hardwired

activation has the highest priority followed by
activation via CAN. It is important to note that the
choice between the PropA_Body_to_BBM and
TSC1_BE message depends on the activation of
the engine speed control in the
10 PropA_Body_to_BBM message. If the engine
speed control is active via bit 1 and 2 of byte 7
from this message, the PropA_Body_to_BBM
message is the determining factor. If bit 1 and 2
of byte 7 are not equal to active, then the
TSC1_BE message is, providing bit 1 and 2 of
byte 1 are not equal to "0".
This is clarified in the table below.

312 201122
Input Output
Engine speed control Engine speed control ac- Engine override control mode
activation via pin 7 appli- tivation via bit 1 and 2 of activation via bit 1 and 2 of
cation connector 4C or byte 7 from the byte 1 from the
A068 PropA_Body_to_BBM TSC1_BE message.
message.
No influence No influence Application con-
Active
nector
Not active Active No influence PropA_Body_to_B
BM
Not active Not active 00b (2) TSC_BE
(1)
Not active Active 00b (2) No limitation
(1) Active = Inactive, Error, Not available or Time-out

(2) 00b = 00 binaire
Application
connector PropA_ Body_to_BBM:
18EF25E6
A105 A106
TSC1_BE:
IF BB-CAN 0C0000E6
BBM, ECU, DMCI, ECU,
ESC set -
D993 18EF0025
ESC set + D965
Application
connector ESC N2
4C or A068 ESC N3
ESC enable
ESC N var
G001173
Schematic overview of ESC system control via the body

the body connection (see relevant selcos), the
10
engine speed control through the steering column
switch. The functions "SET+" and "SET-" are
controlled using pulse and continuous signals.
Via the hardwired input on the application
connector, two engine speeds N2 or N3 that are
to be pre-programmed and a variable engine
speed (Nvar) are also to be activated. To activate
these speeds the engine speed control must first
be enabled by providing a high signal on pin 7 of
cab connector 4C or chassis connector A068.
Then N2 and N3 can be activated by providing a
high signal on pins 10 and 11 respectively of this
connector, and if a high signal is provided on pin
8 of the above connectors, Nvar is activated.
201122 313
WARNING! For safety reasons it is

not permitted to activate the
"enable" via a through connection at
the same time as N2, N3 or Nvar. If
two separate connections are not
used it will not be possible to switch
off the engine speed control if a
short circuit occurs.
10

314 201122
Operating functions of the application connector (4C or A068)

(1)
Function Standard setting Choice in DMCI via
DAVIE
ter)
(constant value).
Brief operation (3) of "SET +/-" during engine speed con- 0<step<400 [rpm] via
trol gives a stepped increase or reduction of the engine CP2-20 and CP2-38
speed (default 25 rpm).
SET +
SET -
Pulsing or
continuous (2)
( rpm) via CP2-15 and
CP2-14
N_variable
14
10
14
V_max applica- If the Vmax application input is activated by providing a Adjustable using CP2-10
tion (5) high signal, the vehicle speed is limited to the pre-pro- between a value of 0 and
grammed value (default 30 km/h). 30 km/h
pulse
Engine stop Control signal (24 V) for switching off the engine remotely. Option must be activated
using CP1-87. Value
must be set between 1
and 30 km/h.
Engine start Control signal (24 V) for starting the engine remotely. Option must be activated
using CP1-86.
(1) If operated simultaneously, the priority is as follows (high to low): "enable ESC", "N2", "N3", N_variable (SET-/+).
(2) Pulse signal = a signal becomes a pulse when the rising edge reaches a value of 0.6 x U_bat. Continuous signal is "high" at a
voltage level of 0.6 x U_bat and "low" if below a level of 0.4 x U_bat.
(3) Brief operation: touch time < 0.3 s (default).
201122 315
(4) Long operation: touch time > 0.3 s (default).

(5) Special applications (e.g. refuse vehicles).
Activation of engine speed control via CAN

message PropA_Body_to_BBM

via the hardwired option, it is also possible,
providing selection code 9562 "with application
connector body builder CAN" has been chosen,
to activate these target speeds via CAN. To be
able to use this functionality, the body must
provide CAN message PropA_Body_to_BBM
with identifier 18_EF_25_E6 to pin 17 and 18 of
name
ESC enable 7 2,1 Status - 0 3 - 00b=passive
10b=error
01b=active
11b=not available
min 10b=error
01b=active
11b=not available
ESC N vari- 7 6,5 Status - 0 3 - 00b=passive
able 10b=error
01b=active
11b=not available
plus 10b=error
01b=active
11b=not available
10b=error
01b=active
10 ESC N3 8 6,5 Status - 0 3 -
11b=not available
00b=passive
10b=error
01b=active
11b=not available

316 201122

name
Engine re- 5 4,3 Status - 0 - 00b=Transient optimized for
quested driveline
Speed Con- disengaged and non-lockup con-
trol Condi- ditions
tions 01b= Stability optimized for drive-
line
disengaged and non-lockup con-
ditions
line
tion 1
line
tion 2
Engine 5 -2,1 Status - 0 3 - 00b=override disabled
Override 01b=Speed control
Control 10b=Torque control
mode 11b=Speed/Torque limit control
Engine re- 4,3 Value - 0 803 Rpm
quested 1,87
Speed/ 5
Speed limit
Engine re- 2 Value -125 -125 125 %
quested
Torque/
Torque limit
In message PropA_Body_to_BBM the

commands that are provided through the
hardwired option may also be provided via CAN,
as is evident from the table. In addition, contrary
to earlier releases, a torque/speed limit can be
forced via this message by selecting the correct
CAN configuration of the message provided. This
function makes it possible to select any speed 10
between the limits defined using customer
CAN.
of the PropA_Body_to_BBM message is given
below.
PropA_Body_to_BBM (18 EF 25 E6)
DataLength
Destination
Direction
Source
Name
Code
DATA: 01 00 E2 04 F4 F7 41 04
PropA_Bod Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte

y_ E6 5 X 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
to_BBM 01 00 E2 04 F4 F7 41 04
201122 317
Signal Physical Byte/bit (b) = Binair Comment

value number (h) = Hexagonal
value
Requested_Torqu -125% Byte 2 00(h) Physical value = (CAN data
e_ 0000 000(b) x rise/scale) + offset = (0 x
Torque_ limit 1/1) + (-125) = -125%
Requested_ 1250 rpm Byte 4,3 04 E2(h) Physical value = (CAN data
Speed_ 0000 0100 1110 x rise/scale) + offset =
Speed_limit 0010(b) (1250 x 1/1) + 0 = 1250 rpm
Requested_ 01b= Speed control Byte 5 F4(h) ( 01)
Speed_Control_ bit 4,3 1111 0100(b)
Condition
Override_Control_ 00b=Transient optimized Byte 5 F4(h) ( 00)
Mode for driveline disengaged bit 2,1 1111 0100(b)
and non-lockup condi-
tions
ESCn3 00b=passive Byte 8 04(h) ( 00)
bit 6,5 0000 0100(b)
ESCn2 01b=active Byte 8 04(h) ( 01)
bit 4,3 0000 0100(b)
ESCn_variable 00b=passive Byte 7 41(h) ( 00)
bit 6,5 0100 0001(b)
ESC_set_plus 01b=active Byte 7 41(h) ( 01)
bit 8,7 0100 0001(b)
ESC_set_minus 00b=passive Byte 7 41(h) ( 00)
bit 4,3 0100 0001(b)
ESC_enable 01b=active Byte 7 41(h) ( 01)
bit 2,1 0100 0001(b)
Engine_stop 00b=passive Byte 8 04(h) ( 00)
bit 8,7 0000 0100(b)
Engine_start 01b=active Byte 6 F7(h) ( 01)
bit 4,3 1111 0111(b)
Application_ 00b=passive Byte 8 04(h) ( 00)
10 speed_ limiter bit 2,1 0000 0100(b)
Activating engine speed control via CAN

message TSC1_BE.
via the hardwired option, it is possible, providing
selection code 9562 "with application connector
body builder CAN" has been chosen, to select
any speed between the limits defined using client
CAN. To be able to use this function, the body
must provide a Torque/Speed Control message
on pin 17 and 18 of connector 12D. In this torque
speed control message, any desired speed and/
or torque limit can be selected by filling in the
message content correctly. The signals sent by
the body are translated by the BBM and are part
of the PropA_BBM_to_Engine message. This

318 201122
message is one of the TSC messages that the

ECU engine can receive, although with a much
lower priority. Identifier = 0C 00 00 E6 to be
programmed and the content of the message is
as follows:
Signal Byt Bit Type Off- Min Max Unit Comments

name e set
Engine 1 4,3 Sta- - 0 3 - 00b = Transient optimized for drive-
requested tus line
Speed Con- disengaged and non-lockup condi-
trol Condi- tions
tions 01b = Stability optimized for driveline
disengaged and non-lockup condi-
tions
10b = Stability optimized for driveline
engaged and/or in lockup condition 1
11b = Stability optimized for driveline
engaged and/or in lockup condition 2
Engine 1 2,1 Sta- - 0 3 - 00b = override disabled
Override tus 01b = Speed control
Control 10b = Torque control
mode 11b = Speed/Torque limit control
Engine 3,2 All Value - 0 8031,875 Rpm
requested
Speed/
Speed limit
Engine 4 All Value -125 -125 125 %
requested
Torque/
Torque limit

of the TSC1_BE (0C 00 00 E6) message is given
below.
TSC1_BE (0C 00 00 E6)
10
Data Length
Destination
Direction
Source
Name
Code
DATA: 5A 00 E0 2E DD FF FF FF
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8

TSC1_BE E6 00 RX 8
5A DC 05 DD FF FF FF FF

of the TSC1_BE (0C 00 00 E6) message is given
below.
201122 319
Signal Physical Byte / bit (b) = Binair Comment

value number (h) = Hexagonal
value
Requested_Torq 96% Byte 4 DD(h) Physical value = (CAN
ue_ 1101 1101(b) data x rise/scale) + offset
Torque_ limit = (221 x 1/1) + (-125) =
96%
Requested_Spee 1500 rpm Byte 3,2 05 DC(h) Physical value = (CAN
d_ 0000 0101 1101 data x rise/scale) + offset
Speed_limit 1100(b) = (1500 x 1/1) + 0 = 1500
rpm
Requested_Spee 10b = Torque control Byte 1 5A(h) (10)
d_ bit 4,3 0101 1010(b)
Control_Conditio
n
Override_Control 10b = Stability opti- Byte1 5A(h) (10)
_ mized for driveline bit 2,1 0101 1010(b)
Mode engaged and/or in
lockup condition 1
Irrespective of the way in which the engine speed

control is activated (via CAN or hardwired), a
torque limit can be activated during engine speed
control. The various limits are set if a combination
is made with wires 6185 and 6186, pin 3 and 6
respectively in bulkhead connector 3C. These
limits are necessary as in many cases engine
speed control is used in combination with an
auxiliary consumer (PTO). This auxiliary
consumer has certain limitations, which naturally
must not be exceeded and the torque and speed
limits are required for that purpose. By using
customer parameter 2-30 the accelerator pedal
can be switched off during ESC operation. When
the accelerator pedal is switched on, the preset
value of the engine speed control can be
overruled up to the maximum allowed speed
10 during engine speed control using customer
parameter 2.31.
Coupling the PTO activation signal to wire 6185
and/or 6186 will limit the engine speed during
PTO usage and a torque limitation applies when
engine speed control is active and a fixed % of
the original torque curve when the engine speed
control is not active.
The combinations and corresponding limitations
are given in the table below.

320 201122
Wire 6185 Wire 6186 ESC active Driving mode (1)

Connector Connector Engine speed maximised Engine speed maximised
3C 3C by ESC_N_max (CP2-14) (2) by N_max (3)
Pin 3 pin 6
PR engine MX engine PR engine MX engine
0 Volt 0 Volt No limitation No limitation
24 Volt 0 Volt 1000 Nm 1800 Nm 95%
0 Volt 24 Volt 750 Nm 1200 Nm 80%
24 Volt 24 Volt 500 Nm 600 Nm 60%
(1) The limitation in driving mode can be used irrespective of whether engine speed control is enabled or not.
(2) As absolute maximum engine torque.
(3) Limitation can be changed by cp.
NOTE: An intermediate level of torque

limitation (up to 70% of maximum
torque) during ESC operation can be
set using customer parameter 2-37.
Parameter 2-37 allows automatic
torque limitation during engine speed
control operation only. The limitation
level is a percentage of maximum
torque, and therefore engine
configuration dependant. Given the
above information we can provide
hardwired torque limitation as well as
via CAN. The hardwired limitation has
the highest priority. If, in addition, the
hardwired option and the automatic
option are activated, the lowest value
will be used as limitation value.

32)
-
-
The vehicle speed is higher than limit value +
offset (10+5=15 km/h). (CP2-11)
Clutch pedal is operated. (CP2-34)
10

switches.
clutch signal.
signal.
201122 321

signal.
temporarily suppressed. These overrule
conditions are:
- ASR activation.

parameter
ID
2-14 MAX ESC SPEED. DMCI Rpm
2-15 MIN ESC SPEED DMCI Rpm
2-18 ACCELERATION RAMP CONTINUOUS DMCI Rpm/s
UP ESC
2-19 ACCELERATION RAMP CONTINUOUS DMCI Rpm/s
DOWN ESC
2-20 ACCELERATE UP PER TIP DMCI Rpm/tip
2-38 DECELERATE DOWN PER TIP DMCI Rpm/tip
2-22 ACCELERATE FROM IDLE TO TARGET DMCI Rpm/s
SPEED IN ESC
10 2-39 DECELERATE FROM TARGET SPEED IN DMCI

ESC TO IDLE
Rpm/s
2-27 ESC CHANGE STEERING COLUMN N DMCI Rpm

VARIABLE
2-16 ESC CAB N1 DMCI Rpm
2-17 ESC CAB N2 DMCI Rpm

322 201122
Customer (1) Customer paramer name System Value

parameter
ID
ENGINE SPEED CONTROL CONDI-
TIONS
2-30 ACCEL. PEDAL DMCI ACTIVE/NOT
ACTIVE
2-31 MAX RPM ACCELERATOR PEDAL DMCI Rpm
2-32 PARK BRAKE DMCI ACTIVE/NOT
ACTIVE
2-33 BRAKE DMCI ACTIVE/NOT
ACTIVE
2-34 CLUTCH DMCI ACTIVE/NOT
ACTIVE
Customer (1) Customer paramer name System Value

parameter
ID
LIMITERS
2-46 CUSTOM ENGINE SPEED LIMIT 1 DMCI Rpm
10.17 CF75 - 85 SERIES FMS / DTS

SYSTEM
CF series FMS / DTS system

NOTE: Following information is also
valid for the XF series.
10
201122 323

6407: with Fleet Management System Tacho
preparation A097 B525
9990: with DAF Telematics System preparation
1075: with DAF Telematics System A098 ECU BBM
D993
12D
ECU DMCI
D965
A138
ECU VIC
D358
ECU Telematics
D324
G001169

cabine:
Connector See the sections indicated below for additional information
Codes
A097 section: 12.31: "Connector A097 FMS system"
A098 section: 12.32: "Connector A098 FMS system"
A138 section:12.46: "Connector A138 FMS 12-pole"

de D-CAN interface.
10
Since week 05 of 2011 FMS 2.0 standard is used
by DAF.
prepared selco 6407 or the DTS (DAF Telematics
System) prepared selco 9990.

324 201122
ECU VIC D358
V-CAN 1 A
V-CAN 2 B D-CAN
I-CAN
C
G001139
messages
messages
C PLC functions
From week 2008-13 in total three connectors are

the FMS messages will be broadcasted. One of
these three connectors is the standardised 12-
pins FMS connector and is called A138.
standard software version supported. This CAN-
message is accepted by SAE J1939. Before
information.
Terminator resistor D-CAN
FMS and DTS prepared are connected at the end

of the D-CAN bus and therefore a terminator
resistor is required. Vehicles with FMS prepared
are ex-factory equipped with a terminator resistor
in connector A098 on pin 10 and 11. Depending
10
on the connected FMS system (with or without
internally terminator resistor) one terminator
resistor has to be fitted at the end of the D-CAN
bus. In the table below the different situations are
discribed.
Terminator resistor Terminator resistor
in A098 (1) in A138 (1)
No FMS system connected Yes No
FMS with internal terminator resistor No No
FMS connected to A098 without terminator resistor No Yes
FMS connected to A138 without terminator resistor Yes No
(1) If the terminator resistor is mounted in connector A098, wire lenght of the FMS system connected to connector A138 is limited
to 95cm. To be able to use more wire lenght the connected FMS system should have an internal terminator resistor and together
the original terminator resistor has to be removed out of connector A098.
201122 325
10.18 CF SERIES PTO CONTROL /

PROTECTION
CF75 - CF85 Series PTO-control

codes
ECU AGC
4610 without engine PTO A106
D312
with engine PTO / without con- 12D
9181
trol ECU BBM
4D
9581 with engine PTO / with control D993
ECU AS-tronic
Selco description D954 PTO
codes
PTO
1412
out control PTO-1
with gearbox PTO-1 / without PTO-2
1118
control PTO-3
G001195
Selco description
codes
4852
out control
with gearbox PTO-2 / with con-
various
trol

10 A105 section: 12.37: "Connector A105 Bodybuilder CAN system 7-pole"
A106 section: 12.38: "Connector A106 CAN-cab 9-pole"
4D section:12.7: "Connector 4D PTO control system"

customer to derive mechanical energy from the
PTO by activating a PTO switch. Before
via DAVIE. Up to two PTO's can be controlled by
the Body Builder Module.

326 201122

DAVIE.
PTO configuration for vehicles with a manual
gearbox.
PTO-1 PTO-2
Engine PTO
Engine PTO Gearbox PTO N1/ N4 (1)
Engine PTO Gearbox PTO N10 (1)
- Gearbox PTO N10 (1)
Gearbox PTO N1/N4 (1) Gearbox PTO N10 (1)
Gearbox PTO N1/N4 (1)
(1) In the BBM software no difference is made between N1, N4 or N10 PTO.

as follows:
dashboard switches.
connections (connector 4D) or via CAN.
controlled)
BBM, ECU,
10
D993
Valve Valve Switch Switch Switch Application Switch Switch Application

Control Control PTO-1 PTO-2 Air pressure connector
PTO-1 PTO-2 connector
PTO-1 PTO-2 Status Status PTO status A105 A106
B245 B246 F087 C750 C751 4D
F088 F141 IF BB-CAN
G001194
201122 327

CAN Message id Used CAN Signals for PTO (1) Startbit Length
Message name
PTO-1 CAN Switch 16 2
PropB_CXB
18FF80E6 PTO-2 CAN Switch 18 2
CCVS 18FEF100 Brake switch 28 2
Clutch switch 30 2
EEC1 0CF00400 Engine speed 24 16
PTO_1 indication 0 2
PTO_1 Blinking 18 2
PTO_2 Blinking 20 2
PropB_ BBM 18FF8225
PTO_1 not active warning 6 2
PTO_1 warning 12 2
PTO_2 warning 14 2
(1) only PTO control related messages are shown.
Engine PTO
For vehicles with a MX engine a special engine 24V
PTO can be used. This 12 o'clock engine PTO
MX can, unlike the engine PTO for PR engines, 5
01
be switched on and off when the engine is already C750
running. The clutch of this PTO type is air 7 1

pressure controlled. To make sure enough air
4594
pressure is available for engaging the clutch, an

air pressure switch is added. This switch is added BBM 4596
10 to an input of the BBM and is a switch on D993
condition for this PTO type.

3410
1
1 B245
2
F141
G001199

Upto 2 PTO are incorporated in the electrical
design of the CF series. Both PTO's can be
operated and monitored from in-cab position, by
wire from the outside via the bulkhead lead-
through for PTO (connector 4D) (see 10.2: "CF
series bulkhead connection overview") and via
CAN control in case the PTO option and the BB-
CAN option (see 8.6: "Body Builders' CAN
J1939") is present.

328 201122
PTO1 operation
By using the switch on position 8 (see section 24V
10.1: "CF series cab switch and connector
locations"), the BBM (Body Builder Module) is 5
01
activated via wire 4594. The BBM checks on the C750
basis of the cut-in conditions whether the output 7 1

(wire 4596) may be activated. These conditions
4594
must be met within a specified control time
(default = 4 s). The PTO output will not be BBM 4596
switched on, even if following the expiry of the D993
control time, the cut-in conditions are met. To
3410
1
allow the PTO to be switched on, the switch must 1 B245
first be set to off, and then switched back on. 2
F087
If activation of the PTO is permitted, wire 4596 is 2
activated, and the BBM expects a return status
message from the PTO system, within a second G001196-1
are met, or not. If the return status message (wire
3410) does not arrive on time, or if the message
states that the cut-out conditions are met, the
output will be switched off, and the PTO warning
will appear on the DIP(display on instrument
panel). The 'PTO active' indication on the DIP will
not illuminate, until the return status message is
concluded successfully. If this indication lights up,
the PTO-1 hour counter will start to run (installed
in the DIP menu). Control wire 4594 (active +24V,
in parallel connected to dashboard switch) is
included in the ESC application connector, which
means that preparation for operating the PTO
(switching it on and keeping it running) from the
body is provided. For manual gearboxes remote
operation of the clutch must be realized ( check
ordering possibilities).
3 possible settings of the PTO interlocks are

possible
(CP1-31) 10
- operation of PTO on a moving vehicle (CP1-
31)
- individual settings of all conditions (see
related customer parameters)
N10 Clutch protection (not clutch-misuse
protection)
In order to switch on a torque-dependent PTO,
the clutch pedal must be operated. The on/off
condition laid down in the BBM responds if the
pedal is depressed approx. 5 mm, which is not
sufficient for the protection of the PTO and the
gearbox (preventing misuse). If an N221/10 PTO
is installed, the PTO operation must therefore be
combined with extended clutch pedal protection;
in that case, it is necessary to add the G259 relay.
For additional information, contact DAF.
201122 329
PTO2 operation
Operation of the "PTO2" is identical to the PTO-1
operation, with exception of :
1. PTO-2 On/Off wire is 5241 (PTO-1 wire is
4594)
2. PTO-2 E/P activation wire is 4595 (PTO-1
wire is 4596) or 5149 with a N10 or Chelsea
PTO
3. PTO-2 Status return wire is 3668 (PTO-1
wire is 3410)
PTO3 operation
On the dashboard, a switch position is provided
for a 3rd PTO. The wiring for the 3rdPTO
operation is prepared ex-factory and goes directly
to the PTO3-valve without controlling by the
BBM. An additional warning lamp can be fitted on
the heater panel, beside the 2nd radio recess.
Gearbox PTO (Automatic gearbox)
In general the PTO operation (including the 24V
interlocks) in combination with automatic
gearboxes is identical to the manual gearbox 5
01
PTO operation, with the following exception; C751
7 1
After switching the PTO on and complying with
4594
the interlocks programmed, the E/P valve output
(2) of the BBM is activated. This signal is used by BBM ECU AGC
the automatic gearbox control unit ( AGC-A4) as D993 D312
a request for activating the gearbox PTO. The
4596
3410
automatic gearbox control unit checks its internal

parametring ( see chapter 7.15: "Automated and 1
automatic gearboxes") whether the PTO can be F088 G371

switched on. 2
4596
1
B246
10 Gearbox PTO (Automated gearbox)

G001197

is operated via an electronic control unit. This 5
01

The PTO which is fitted to this gearbox, therefore
4594

from that used in combination with the manually AS-Tronic BBM 4596
operated gearboxes. D945 D993
3410

2
F087
2
Operation of PTO on a stationary vehicle is G001198-1

330 201122
Cut-in conditions:
(650 rpm)
Cut-out conditions:
PTO operation.
Cut-in conditions:
(650 rpm)
Cut-out conditions:
Note:
AS-Tronic software version may limit
instationary PTO use, to 1st and RL gear with
direct drive gearboxes and to 2nd and RH 10
gear with overdrive gearboxes. No
gearchange possible with these versions.
Check the vehicle configuration on this in
case instationary PTO use is required.
undesirable situation occurs.
Note:
When the PTO is engaged, programmed to
instationary use, and crawler gears are
selected:
- As lowest gearing, gears 1 and RL are
available for Direct Drive (DD) gearboxes
- As lowest gearing, gears 2 and RH are
available for Over Drive (OD) gearboxes
201122 331
Activation of PTO control via CAN message

PropB_CXB
In addition to engage the PTO via the hardwired

option, it is also possible, providing selection
code 9562 "with application connector body
builder CAN" has been chosen, to activate this
via CAN. To be able to use this functionality, the
body must provide CAN message PropB_CXB
with identifier 18_FF_80_E6 to pin 17 and 18 of
name
CXB Re- 3 2,1 Status - 0 3 - 00b=passive
mote 10b=error
PTO 1 01b=active
11b=not available
mote 10b=error
PTO 2 01b=active
11b=not available
PTO hour counter(s)

As is clear from the above, vehicles can be
equipped with one or more PTO's. The function of
the PTO hour counter is to record the number of
additional engine operating hours during PTO
operation, and if possible, to take them into
account when determining the vehicle's
maintenance intervals. Readout of the number of
PTO hours is via the DOT matrix display using the
menu control switch on the dashboard (DIP) or
via DAVIE. The operating time (in hours) of a
maximum of 2 PTO's can be read out via the
display. If PTO1 is switched on, the operating
time is automatically added to the total for PTO1.
When PTO2 is switched on, the operating time is
10 automatically added to the total for PTO2. Both
PTO1 and PTO2 can be reset using DAVIE. The
PTO counters will become visible after more than
1 minute operation.
A separate hour counter is available as analoge
gauge. See chapter 8.5: "CVSG type gauges".
are listed.

332 201122
Customer Customer parameter name System Value

parameter
ID (1)
PTO-1/2 switch on conditions
1-01 / 1-45 PTO 1/2 ON - brake valid BBM ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE
PTO 1/2 ON - brake use BBM PRESSED / RE-
1-02 / 1-46
LEASED
1-03 / 1-47 PTO 1/2 ON - clutch valid BBM ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE
1-04 / 1-48 PTO 1/2 ON - clutch use BBM PRESSED / RE-
LEASED
1-05 / 1-49 PTO 1/2 ON - park brake valid BBM ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE
1-06 / 1-50 PTO 1/2 ON - park brake use BBM APPLIED / RE-
LEASED
1-07 / 1-51 PTO 1/2 ON - engine running valid BBM ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE
1-08 / 1-52 PTO 1/2 ON - engine running use BBM RUNNING / NOT
RUNNING
1-09 / 1-53 PTO 1/2 ON - maximum engine speed BBM Rpm
1-10 / 1-54 PTO 1/2 ON - maximum vehicle speed BBM km/h
1-88 PTO 1 ON - minimum engine speed BBM Rpm
1-89 PTO 1 ON - pressure switch BBM ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE
10
201122 333

parameter
ID (1)
PTO-1/2 switch off conditions
1-12 / 1-55 PTO 1/2 OFF - brake valid BBM ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE
PTO 1/2 OFF - brake use BBM PRESSED / RE-
1-13 / 1-56
LEASED
1-14 / 1-57 PTO 1/2 OFF - clutch valid BBM ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE
1-15 / 1-58 PTO 1/2 OFF - clutch use BBM PRESSED / RE-
LEASED
1-16 / 1-59 PTO 1/2 OFF - park brake valid BBM ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE
1-17 / 1-60 PTO 1/2 OFF - park brake use BBM APPLIED / RE-
LEASED
1-18 / 1-61 PTO 1/2 OFF - engine running valid BBM ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE
1-19 / 1-62 PTO 1/2 OFF - engine running use BBM RUNNING / NOT
RUNNING
1-20 / 1-63 PTO 1/2 OFF - maximum engine speed BBM Rpm
1-21 / 1-64 PTO 1/2 OFF - maximum vehicle speed BBM km/h

parameter
ID (1)
PTO-1/2 other
1-31 / 1-65 PTO 1/2 Type BBM STATIONARY /
IN-STATION-
ARY / ENGINE
10 1-34 / 1-66 PTO 1/2 On Timeout BBM Milliseconds
1-35 / 1-67 PTO 1/2 Off Timeout BBM Milliseconds
1-91 PTO 1 OFF Time BBM Milliseconds

334 201122

parameter
ID (1)
AStronic PTO-1/2 switch on conditions
ACTIVE
LEASED

parameter
ID (1)
AStronic PTO-1/2 switch off conditions
ACTIVE
LEASED

parameter
ID (1)
AStronic PTO-1/2 other
IN-STATION-
ARY / ENGINE 10
1-33 / 1-85 AStronic PTO 1/2/ Time Milliseconds
1-34 / 1-66 PTO 1/2 On Timeout BBM Milliseconds
201122 335

parameter
ID (1)
Remote engine start/stop PTO-1/2 con-
trol
1-118 Remote engine start/stop PTO 1 control BBM ENABLED / DIS-
ABLED
Remote engine start/stop PTO 2 control BBM ENABLED / DIS-
1-119
ABLED
10.19 REFUSE PREPARATION CF75 -

CF85 SERIES
The CF series can be specified with Selco 9240,

which will offer a 12 pole application connector for
lighting (see section: 12.39: "Connector A113
garbage truck") and a 21 pole application
connector for Refuse collector bodies (see
section: 12.30: "Connector A095 application
refuse collector"). The counter connector for
A095 is called A134 (see section:
12.45: "Connector A134 refuse feed through
wire") and is prepared with a single (loup) wire to
ground. Signal processing is carried out in a BBM
(Body Builder Module) application. Additional a
modified rear overhang can be specified by
selecting an AE of 740, 920 or 1000 mm. The
electrical connections are positioned in the
bulkhead lead through and can be made by
means of the standard DAF connectors.
A refuse preparation enables a body builder
to activate special refuse functionality such
as:
10 1. Stop&Go
2. Body Release
3. Body Active
4. High rpm Request
5. Vehicle speed limitation with operated
footboard
6. Remote engine start
7. Remote engine stop
8. Brake control
9. Speed Switches
1. Stop&Go
This function automates the process of
shifting from drive to neutral at vehicle
standstill and shifting from neutral to drive
when driving off without the driver manually
have to operate the gear shift selector. The
Stop&Go function can be activated and
deactivated by the driver by operating the
toggle switch. When this function is active,
the superstructure of a refuse truck can set a

336 201122
high idle speed or customer to derive

mechanical energy from the vehicle to
activate special functions, e.g. pumps. A
PTO can be switched on by activating an EP
valve. The driver can request activation of
the PTO by activating a PTO switch. Before
switch-on conditions are met. Also the PTO
will be disabled if, with an activated PTO, one
of the switch-off conditions are met. The
switch on and off conditions can be adjusted
by the DAF dealer via DAVIE. Up to two
PTO's can be controlled by the Body Builder
Module.
2. Body Release.
parameters.
3. Body Active.
This function is a safety function and will
enable or disable the outputs to the function
body release and high rpm request
depending on the input status body active. If
the body active input is enabled both
seperate outputs will be set for activation.
The outputs will be enabled if the related
input for this output (high rpm request and
body release) are active. These outputs will
be disabled if the enable condition aren't met
anymore.
4. High rpm request.
This function is to set a predefined engine
speed when a high engine speed is
requested by the superstructure. The
requested engine speed will only be set if the
switch on conditions are met. This enables
the superstructure of a refuse truck to set a
10
high idle engine speed N3 in neutral gear
position at vehicle standstill. The
superstructure can request this high idle
engine speed to drive a hydro pump to
perform a press cycle. When the autoneutral
request is released, engine speed N2
(reduced high idle speed) is set and the
engine speed drops in order to enable the
Allison gearbox to shift from neutral to drive
(Stop&Go functionality) and to limit clutch
wear with manual gearboxes.
5. Vehicle speed limitation with active
footboard.
201122 337
In this function the Vmax application input or

application speed limiter input from a body
builder CAN message is used to set the
signal application speed limiter in a CAN
message to the engine ECU. The function
can be used by the body builder e.g. limiting
speed if a person is on the footboard of a
garbage truck. The speed limit vaue can be
adjusted by a customer parameter.
6. Body Release.
parameters.
7. Remote engine start.
In the function Remote Engine Start the
Remote Engine Start input from the engine
application connector or the engine start
signal from a CAN message or the internal
engine start (start/stop) signal is used to
control the Remote Engine Start output. This
output is directly connected to the starter
engine relay. The body builder can use this
function to start the engine from outside the
cabin. This function can be used to provide
the body builder with the information that the
parameters.
8. Remote engine stop.
In the function Remote Engine Stop the
Remote Engine Stop input from the engine
application connector or internal Start/Stop
10 or Engine Stop from a Body builder CAN
message is used to set the signal Engine
Stop in a CAN message to the Engine ECU.
This function can be used by the body builder
to connect an stop button.
9. Brake Control.
If somebody is standing on the footboard of
a refuse truck, reversing of the vehicle shall
be made impossible. For refuse trucks the
parking brake must and engine stop can be
activated when reverse gear is selectedwhile
the refuse step switch (Vmax application) is
active. The parking brake must be kept
active untill KL15 is switched off. For safety
reasons, this functions can only be activated
if the vehicle speed is below a predefined
speed (default 30km/h) To activate the

338 201122
parking brake the BBM activates a 3/2

electro pneumatic valve (via a relay) which
depressurizes the spring brakes. To activate
the engine stop, the BBM sends a CAN
message to the engine.
10. Speed switches.
This function is to provide three information
signals to the body builder; two for indicating
that the vehicle speed is above a predefined
speed (5km/h or 10km/h) and one for
indicating that the engine speed is above a
predefined value (1400rpm)
ID (1) Name
PTO status out
PTO 1 status
PTO 2 status
PTO 1 and 2 status
Body Release Refuse

1-99 Body relaese DEACTIVATED
1-101 Driveline engaged NOT ACTIVE
1-102 Maximum engine speed Rpm
1-103 Park Brake APPLIED / RELEASED
1-104 Maximum vehicle speed Km/h
Engine running
10
Speed switches
Stop & Go Allison

1-127 External auto neutral request DISABLED
201122 339
CVSG (Gauges)
1-121 Oil pressure DISABLED
1-122 Oil temperature DISABLED
Fault detection Vmax Application pin C17

1-128 Fault detection pin C17 Open circuit /
Short circuit ground
Customer parameter list in DMCI unit

ID (1) Name
LIMITERS
2-10 Vmax APPLICATION SPEED 30 Km/h
2-11 vmax ESC 30 Km/h
2-37 TORQUE REDUCTION ESC 0%

10 2-19 ACCELERATION RAMP CONTINUOUS DOWN ESC 200 Rpm/s
ESC
2-39 DEACCELERATE FROM TARGET SPEED IN ESC 1000 Rpm/s
TO IDLE

2-30 ACCEL. PEDAL ACTIVE
2-31 MAX. RPM ACCEL. PEDAL 1500 Rpm

340 201122

NOTE: Activating the auxiliary STOP

input on pin 20, forces the body release
output to be switch off. In case this
function is used, the high RPM request
coming form the body also has to be
disabled.
NOTE: On the majority of input and

outputs diagnosis on short circuit to
ground or +24V is carried out. In case
pins of the 21pole connector are not
used, it may result in an BBM warning
on the dashboard display. Using pull-
down resistors ( 1k, Watt) to vehicle
ground (in case of BBM reports error -
short circuit to +24V) or pull-up resistors
( 1k , Watt) to KL15 switched power
supply (in case of BBM reports error -
short circuit to ground) will solve the
problem.
NOTE: For minimum currents

applicable see chapter 7.8: "EMC
compatibility"
NOTE: Depending on the application of

the vehicle (rearloader, side loader etc.)
one or more functions could have to be
modified. Please prepare a clear list of
desired functionality and contact the
local sale engineering department so
we can advise you on how the make the
vehicle+superstructure working as
desired.
10
10.20 HYDRAULIC PLATFORM CF75
SERIES
The CF series can be specified with Selco 2950,

which will offer a 9 pole application connector
(see section: 12.41: "Connector A122 hydraulic
platform 9-pole" and a 21 pole application
connector (see section: 12.42: "Connector A123
hydraulic platform 21-pole" for Hydraulic platform
bodies. The counter connector for A123 is called
A125 (see section: 12.43: "Connector A125
hydraulic platform feed through" and is prepared
with a number of power suppply wires . Signal
processing is carried out in a BBM (Body Builder
Module) application. Additional an automatic
201122 341
gearbox and air suspension on the rearaxle is

required. The electrical connections are
positioned in the bulkhead lead through and can
be made by means of the standard DAF
connectors.
Customer (1) Customer Value
ID Name
PTO status out
PTO 1 status
PTO 2 status
PTO 1 and 2 status
Engine running

Speed switches
CVSG (Gauges)
10 1-121
1-122
Oil pressure
Oil temperature
DISABLED
DISABLED

342 201122
Customer parameter list in DMCI unit

Customer (1) Customer Value
ID Name
LIMITERS
2-10 Vmax APPLICATION SPEED 30 Km/h
2-11 vmax ESC 30 Km/h
2-37 TORQUE REDUCTION ESC 0%

2-19 ACCELERATION RAMP CONTINUOUS DOWN ESC 200 Rpm/s
ESC
2-39 DEACCELERATE FROM TARGET SPEED IN ESC 1000 Rpm/s
TO IDLE

2-30
2-31
ACCEL. PEDAL
MAX. RPM ACCEL. PEDAL
ACTIVE
1500 Rpm
10
NOTE: Activating the auxiliary STOP

input on pin 20, forces the body release
output to be switch off. In case this
function is used, the high RPM request
coming form the body also has to be
disabled.
201122 343
NOTE: On the majority of input and

outputs diagnosis on short circuit to
ground or +24V is carried out. In case
pins of the 21pole connector are not
used, it may result in an BBM warning
on the dashboard display. Using pull-
down resistors ( 1k, Watt) to vehicle
ground (in case of BBM reports error -
short circuit to +24V) or pull-up resistors
( 1k , Watt) to KL15 switched power
supply (in case of BBM reports error -
short circuit to ground) will solve the
problem.
10

344 201122
Electrical system XF series
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM XF SERIES

Page Date
11.1 XF series cab switch and connector locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 201122
11.2 XF series bulkhead connection overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 201122
11.3 XF series accessories in headershelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 201122
11.4 XF series accessories connection in dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 201122
11.5 XF series power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 201122
11.6 XF series radio preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 201122
11.7 XF series CB preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 201122
11.8 XF series telephone preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 201122
11.9 XF series anti-theft protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 201122
11.10 XF series refrigerator preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 201122
11.11 XF series LED preparation immobiliser / Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 201122
11.12 XF series microwave preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 201122
11.13 XF series chassis connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 201122
11.14 XF series ESC control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 201122
11.15 XF series FMS system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 201122
11.16 XF series trailer connection points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 201122
11
201122 345
11

346 201122
11.ELECTRICAL SYSTEM XF SERIES

11.1 XF SERIES CAB SWITCH AND
CONNECTOR LOCATIONS
Switch positions, overhead consoles
B RES RES RES
RES A C RES
G001136
A C
G001154
Space Cab Super Space Cab
A Tachograph
B Toll Collect (ECU) connector (See 12.48: "Connector D318 (ECU) Toll Collect".)
C Spare / CB / telephone microfoon
RES Spare location
11
201122 347
Switch position, dashboard
DTS
1 2 3 4 5 5 6
16
15
14 13 12 11 10 9
G001171
1 PTO-1
2 PTO-2
3 loading door alarm on/off
4 parking brake lever
5 radio recess 1,2,3 DIN slots
6 brake integration / Traction aid FTM / Liftaxle up FAK
7 24V accessory plug
(See 12.21: "Connector A007 accessories 24V 2-pole".)
8 main switch
9 12V accessory plug with cigar lighter
(See 12.22: "Connector A011 accessories 12V 2-pole".)
10 AS-Tronic D-N-R (Drive-Neutral-Reverse) switch
11 spare location
11 12
13
spare location
switch reverse alarm ouside on/off
14 switch worklamp cab back / taillift enable
15 LAN and USB connector telematics
16 HD OBD plug
(See 12.33: "Connector A100 HD-OBD diagnose".)
For an overview of available switches and

symbols, see section 13.9: "Switches".

348 201122
11.2 XF SERIES BULKHEAD

CONNECTION OVERVIEW
The connections in the CF and XF bulkhead

panels are the same, see section 10.2: "CF
series bulkhead connection overview" for more
information.
11.3 XF SERIES ACCESSORIES IN

HEADERSHELF
Wiring headershelf
182C
183C
183C
182C
E502857 E502818
Super Space Cab Space Cab
There are several connectors available in the

headershelf at the driver side.
Check the sections indicated below for additional
information on pinning and wire numbers within
the connectors used:
Spare wiring
There is no spare wiring from dashboard area via
11
the A-pillar to the headershelf.
11.4 XF SERIES ACCESSORIES

CONNECTION IN DASHBOARD
The accessories connection in the CF and XF

dashboard are the same, see section 10.5: "CF
series accessories connection in dashboard" for
more information.
201122 349
11.5 XF SERIES POWER SUPPLY
The power supply connection of the CF and XF

dashboard are the same, see section 10.6: "CF
series power supply" for more information.
11.6 XF SERIES RADIO

PREPARATION
The radio preparation of the CF and XF series are

the same, see section 10.7: "CF series radio
preparation" for more information.
11.7 XF SERIES CB PREPARATION
The CB preparation of the CF and XF series are

the same, see section 10.8: "CF series CB
preparation" for more information.
11.8 XF SERIES TELEPHONE

PREPARATION
The telephone preparation of the CF and XF

series are the same, see section 10.9: "CF series
telephone preparation" for more information.
11.9 XF SERIES ANTI-THEFT

PROTECTION
XF series
The alarm system of the XF series is the same as
that of the CF series. The only difference is the
position of the interior IR and UR sensors.
11 versions, contact DAF.
11.10 XF SERIES REFRIGERATOR

PREPARATION
The refrigerator preparation of the CF and XF

series are the same, see section 10.11: "CF
series refrigerator preparation" for more
information.

350 201122
11.11 XF SERIES LED PREPARATION

IMMOBILISER / ALARM
The LED preparation immobiliser / Alarm of the

CF and XF series are the same, see section
10.12: "CF series LED preparation immobiliser /
Alarm" for more information.
11.12 XF SERIES MICROWAVE

PREPARATION
Microwave preparation
This is a 2-pole connector (connector code
A038). This 2-pole connector is designed for
currents up to 40 A!. The wires 1175 (Kl30) and A038
M22 (earth) are both 4,0 mm. The power supply
is taken via fuse E168 Kl30 (before contact). The
fuse is a MAXI FUSE, located on the top side of
the fuse-relay board.
In addition a connecting block can be connected
here, and so creating a central point for power
supply Kl30 and earth. See also chapter
7.4: "Earth connections".
See section 12.23: "Connector A038
accessories" for more additional information on
pinning and wire numbers within this connector
used. E502842
11.13 XF SERIES CHASSIS

CONNECTIONS
The XF and CF series chassis connections are

the same. Please use section 10.3: "CF75 and
CF85 series chassis connections" for all
information.
11.14 XF SERIES ESC CONTROL

11
DMCI engine control functionality
The DMCI engine speed control functionality of
the XF and CF85 series with MX engine is the
same. Please use chapter 10.16: "CF75 - CF85
ESC system" for all information.
11.15 XF SERIES FMS SYSTEM
XF series FMS system

The FMS system functionality of the XF and CF
series is the same. Please use chapter
10.17: "CF75 - 85 series FMS / DTS system" for
all information.
201122 351
XF105 Series PTO-control

codes
4610 without engine PTO A106
with engine PTO / without con- 12D

9181
trol ECU BBM
4D
9581 with engine PTO / with control D993
ECU AS-tronic
Selco description D954 PTO
codes
PTO
1412
out control PTO-1
with gearbox PTO-1 / without PTO-2
1118
control
G001207
Selco description
codes
4852
out control
with gearbox PTO-2 / with con-
various
trol

A105 section: 12.37: "Connector A105 Bodybuilder CAN system 7-pole"
A106 section: 12.38: "Connector A106 CAN-cab 9-pole"
4D section:12.7: "Connector 4D PTO control system"
11 Purpose of the function

customer to derive mechanical energy from the
PTO by activating a PTO switch. Before
via DAVIE. Up to two PTO's can be controlled by
the Body Builder Module.

352 201122

DAVIE.
PTO configuration for vehicles with a manual
gearbox.
PTO-1 PTO-2
Engine PTO
Engine PTO Gearbox PTO N1/ N4 (1)
Engine PTO Gearbox PTO N10 (1)
- Gearbox PTO N10 (1)
Gearbox PTO N1/N4 (1) Gearbox PTO N10 (1)
Gearbox PTO N1/N4 (1)
(1) In the BBM software no difference is made between N1, N4 or N10 PTO.

as follows:
dashboard switches.
connections (connector 4D) or via CAN.
controlled)
BBM, ECU,
D993
11
Valve Valve Switch Switch Switch Application Switch Switch Application

Control Control PTO-1 PTO-2 Air pressure connector
PTO-1 PTO-2 connector
PTO-1 PTO-2 Status Status PTO status A105 A106
B245 B246 F087 C750 C751 4D
F088 F141 IF BB-CAN
G001194
201122 353
CAN signal description (1)

CAN Message id Used CAN Signals for PTO Startbit Length
Message name
PTO-1 CAN Switch 16 2
PropB_CXB
18FF80E6 PTO-2 CAN Switch 18 2
CCVS 18FEF100 Brake switch 28 2
Clutch switch 30 2
EEC1 0CF00400 Engine speed 24 16
PTO_1 Blinking 18 2
PTO_2 Blinking 20 2
PropB_ BBM 18FF8225
PTO_1 warning 12 2
PTO_2 warning 14 2
(1) only PTO control related messages are shown.
Engine PTO
For vehicles with a MX engine a special engine 24V
PTO can be used. This 12 o'clock engine PTO
MX can be switched on and off when the engine 5
01
is already running. The clutch of this PTO type is C750
air pressure controlled. To make sure enough air 7 1

pressure is available for engaging the clutch, an
4594
air pressure switch is added. This switch is added

to an input of the BBM and is a switch on BBM 4596
condition for this PTO type. D993
3410
1
1 B245
11
2
F141
G001199

Upto 2 PTO are incorporated in the electrical
design of the XF series. Both PTO's can be
operated and monitored from in-cab position, by
wire from the outside via the bulkhead lead-
through for PTO (connector 4D) (see 11.2: "XF
series bulkhead connection overview") and via
CAN control in case the PTO option and the BB-
CAN option (see 8.6: "Body Builders' CAN
J1939") is present.

354 201122
PTO1 operation
By using the switch on position 8 (see section 24V
11.1: "XF series cab switch and connector
locations"), the BBM (Body Builder Module) is 5
01
activated via wire 4594. The BBM checks on the C750
basis of the cut-in conditions whether the output 7 1

(wire 4596) may be activated. These conditions
4594
must be met within a specified control time
(default = 4 s). The PTO output will not be BBM 4596
switched on, even if following the expiry of the D993
control time, the cut-in conditions are met. To
3410
1
allow the PTO to be switched on, the switch must 1 B245
first be set to off, and then switched back on. 2
F087
If activation of the PTO is permitted, wire 4596 is 2
activated, and the BBM expects a return status
message from the PTO system, within a second G001196-1
are met, or not. If the return status message (wire
3410) does not arrive on time, or if the message
states that the cut-out conditions are met, the
output will be switched off, and the PTO warning
will appear on the DIP(display on instrument
panel). The 'PTO active' indication on the DIP will
not illuminate, until the return status message is
concluded successfully. If this indication lights up,
the PTO-1 hour counter will start to run (installed
in the DIP menu). Control wire 4594 (active +24V,
in parallel connected to dashboard switch) is
included in the ESC application connector, which
means that preparation for operating the PTO
(switching it on and keeping it running) from the
body is provided. For manual gearboxes remote
operation of the clutch must be realized ( check
ordering possibilities).
3 possible settings of the PTO interlocks are

possible
(CP1-31)
- operation of PTO on a moving vehicle (CP1-
31)
- individual settings of all conditions (see
related customer parameters)
11
N10 Clutch protection (not clutch-misuse
protection)
In order to switch on a torque-dependent PTO,
the clutch pedal must be operated. The on/off
condition laid down in the BBM responds if the
pedal is depressed approx. 5 mm, which is not
sufficient for the protection of the PTO and the
gearbox (preventing misuse). If an N221/10 PTO
is installed, the PTO operation must therefore be
combined with extended clutch pedal protection;
in that case, it is necessary to add the G259 relay.
For additional information, contact DAF.
201122 355
PTO2 operation
Operation of the "PTO2" is identical to the PTO-1
operation, with exception of :
1. PTO-2 On/Off wire is 5241 (PTO-1 wire is
4594)
2. PTO-2 E/P activation wire is 4595 (PTO-1
wire is 4596) or 5149 with a N10 or Chelsea
PTO
3. PTO-2 Status return wire is 3668 (PTO-1
wire is 3410)
PTO3 operation
On the dashboard, a switch position is provided
for a 3rd PTO. The wiring for the 3rdPTO
operation is prepared ex-factory and goes directly
to the PTO3-valve without controlling by the
BBM. An additional warning lamp can be fitted on
the heater panel, beside the 2nd radio recess.
Gearbox PTO (Automated gearbox)
is operated via an electronic control unit. This 5
01

The PTO which is fitted to this gearbox, therefore 4594
from that used in combination with the manually AS-Tronic BBM 4596
operated gearboxes. D945 D993
3410

2
F087
2
Operation of PTO on a stationary vehicle is G001198-1

Cut-in conditions:
11 - The engine speed is lower than Nmax cut-in
(650 rpm)
Cut-out conditions:
PTO operation.
Cut-in conditions:

356 201122

(650 rpm)
Cut-out conditions:
Note:
AS-Tronic software version may limit
instationary PTO use, to 1st and RL gear with
direct drive gearboxes and to 2nd and RH
gear with overdrive gearboxes. No
gearchange possible with these versions.
Check the vehicle configuration on this in
case instationary PTO use is required.
undesirable situation occurs.
Note:
When the PTO is engaged, programmed to
instationary use, and crawler gears are
selected:
- As lowest gearing, gears 1 and RL are
available for Direct Drive (DD) gearboxes
- As lowest gearing, gears 2 and RH are
available for Over Drive (OD) gearboxes
Activation of PTO control via CAN message
PropB_CXB
In addition to engage the PTO via the hardwired

option, it is also possible, providing selection
code 9562 "with application connector body
builder CAN" has been chosen, to activate this
via CAN. To be able to use this functionality, the
body must provide CAN message PropB_CXB
11
with identifier 18_FF_80_E6 to pin 17 and 18 of
name
mote 10b=error
PTO 1 01b=active
11b=not available
mote 10b=error
PTO 2 01b=active
11b=not available
201122 357
PTO hour counter(s)

As is clear from the above, vehicles can be
equipped with one or more PTO's. The function of
the PTO hour counter is to record the number of
additional engine operating hours during PTO
operation, and if possible, to take them into
account when determining the vehicle's
maintenance intervals. Readout of the number of
PTO hours is via the DOT matrix display using the
menu control switch on the dashboard (DIP) or
via DAVIE. The operating time (in hours) of a
maximum of 2 PTO's can be read out via the
display. If PTO1 is switched on, the operating
time is automatically added to the total for PTO1.
When PTO2 is switched on, the operating time is
automatically added to the total for PTO2. Both
PTO1 and PTO2 can be reset using DAVIE. The
PTO counters will become visible after more than
1 minute operation.
A separate hour counter is available as analoge
gauge. See chapter 8.5: "CVSG type gauges".
are listed.

parameter
ID (1)
PTO-1/2 switch on conditions
1-01 / 1-45 PTO 1/2 ON - brake valid BBM ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE
PTO 1/2 ON - brake use BBM PRESSED / RE-
1-02 / 1-46
LEASED
1-03 / 1-47 PTO 1/2 ON - clutch valid BBM ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE
1-04 / 1-48 PTO 1/2 ON - clutch use BBM PRESSED / RE-
LEASED
ACTIVE
11 1-06 / 1-50 PTO 1/2 ON - park brake use BBM APPLIED / RE-
LEASED
1-07 / 1-51 PTO 1/2 ON - engine running valid BBM ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE
1-08 / 1-52 PTO 1/2 ON - engine running use BBM RUNNING / NOT
RUNNING
1-88 PTO 1 ON - minimum engine speed BBM Rpm
1-89 PTO 1 ON - pressure switch BBM ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE

358 201122

parameter
ID (1)
PTO-1/2 switch off conditions
1-12 / 1-55 PTO 1/2 OFF - brake valid BBM ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE
PTO 1/2 OFF - brake use BBM PRESSED / RE-
1-13 / 1-56
LEASED
1-14 / 1-57 PTO 1/2 OFF - clutch valid BBM ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE
1-15 / 1-58 PTO 1/2 OFF - clutch use BBM PRESSED / RE-
LEASED
ACTIVE
LEASED
1-18 / 1-61 PTO 1/2 OFF - engine running valid BBM ACTIVE / NOT
ACTIVE
1-19 / 1-62 PTO 1/2 OFF - engine running use BBM RUNNING / NOT
RUNNING

parameter
ID (1)
PTO-1/2 other
IN-STATION-
ARY / ENGINE
1-34 / 1-66 PTO 1/2 On Timeout BBM Milliseconds
1-91 PTO 1 OFF Time BBM Milliseconds
11
201122 359

parameter
ID (1)
AStronic PTO-1/2 switch on conditions
ACTIVE
LEASED

parameter
ID (1)
AStronic PTO-1/2 switch off conditions
ACTIVE
LEASED

parameter
ID (1)
AStronic PTO-1/2 other
IN-STATION-
ARY / ENGINE
1-33 / 1-85 AStronic PTO 1/2/ Time Milliseconds
11 1-34 / 1-66
1-35 / 1-67
PTO 1/2 On Timeout
PTO 1/2 Off Timeout
BBM
BBM
Milliseconds
Milliseconds

360 201122

parameter
ID (1)
Remote engine start/stop PTO-1/2 con-
trol
1-118 Remote engine start/stop PTO 1 control BBM ENABLED / DIS-
ABLED
Remote engine start/stop PTO 2 control BBM ENABLED / DIS-
1-119
ABLED
11.16 XF SERIES TRAILER

CONNECTION POINTS
The electric trailer connection consists of possibly

three 7-pin and one fiftheen pin sockets. For
details see the information in the CF series
chapter 10.15: "CF series trailer connection
points".
11
201122 361
11

362 201122
Application connector (code) number list
APPLICATION CONNECTOR (CODE) NUMBER LIST

Page Date
12.1 Connector 1M spare wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 201122
12.2 Connector 1P RAS-EC system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 201122
12.3 Connector 3C engine torque limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 201122
12.4 Connector 3L accessoiries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 201122
12.5 Connector 3P ESC system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 201122
12.6 Connector 4C ESC system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 201122
12.7 Connector 4D PTO control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 201122
12.8 Connector 4V refuse collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 201122
12.11 Connector 12D body builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 201122
12.12 Connector 23K body functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 201122
12.13 Connector 56A accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 201122
12.14 Connector 56W refuse collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 201122
12.15 Connector 182C power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 201122
12.16 Connector 183C power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 201122
12.17 Connector 238C radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 201122
12.18 Connector A000 trailer system (ISO1185 type 24N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 201122
12.19 Connector A001 trailer system (ISO3731 type 24S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 201122
12.20 Connector A004 trailer system (ISO7638). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 201122
12.21 Connector A007 accessories 24V 2-pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 201122
12.22 Connector A011 accessories 12V 2-pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 201122
12.23 Connector A038 accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 201122
12.24 Connector A043 driver seat connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 201122
12.25 Connector A058 trailer system (ISO12098). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 201122
12.26 Connector A068 (chassis - ESC system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 201122
12.27 Connector A070 accessories 8-pole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 201122
12.28 Connector A076 telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 201122
12.29 Connector A088 taillift system 7-pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 201122
12.30 Connector A095 application refuse collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 201122
12.31 Connector A097 FMS system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 201122
12.32 Connector A098 FMS system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 201122
12.33 Connector A100 HD-OBD diagnose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 201122
12.34 Connector A102 body builder 8-pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 201122
12.35 Connector A103 bodybuilder 12-pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 201122
12.36 Connector A104 spare wiring 18-pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 201122
12.37 Connector A105 Bodybuilder CAN system 7-pole. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 201122
12.38 Connector A106 CAN-cab 9-pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 201122
12.39 Connector A113 garbage truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 201122
12.40 Connector A117 trailer 13-pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 201122
12.41 Connector A122 hydraulic platform 9-pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 201122
12.42
12.43
Connector A123 hydraulic platform 21-pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Connector A125 hydraulic platform feed through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
201122
201122
12
12.44 Connector A126 FMS 2-pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 201122
12.45 Connector A134 refuse feed through wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 201122
12.46 Connector A138 FMS 12-pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 201122
12.47 Connector A139 - A140 extra camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 201122
12.48 Connector D318 (ECU) Toll Collect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 201122
12.49 Connector D365.A - D365.B radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 201122
12.50 Connector D347.A - D347.B radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 201122
12.51 ECN code number overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 201122
201122 363
12

364 201122
12.APPLICATION CONNECTOR (CODE) NUMBER LIST

12.1 CONNECTOR 1M SPARE
WIRING
Pin Wire Description Active Low (1) Pin on ECN code

Active High (2)
1 X003 Spare wire to dasboard switch 1
5 X007 Spare wire to header shelf switch 1
(1) Active low: function is activated if pin is grounded.

(2) Active high: function is activated if pin is connected to battery plus (12 V minimum).
See section 9.2: "LF series bulkhead

connections" for more information about the
location of this connector.
See section 9.5: "LF series accessories
connection dashboard" for more information
about the body function connections in the
dashboard of LF vehicles.
connection headershelf" for more information
headershelf of LF vehicles.
NOTE: 1M = 8 pole grey connector,
12
201122 365
12.2 CONNECTOR 1P RAS-EC

SYSTEM

Active High (2)
1
2
3
4
5 3514 Vehicle speed - D525:B07
5
6
7
8


NOTE: 1P = Brown colored connector.
12.3 CONNECTOR 3C ENGINE

TORQUE LIMITER
Connector 3C
Pin Wire Description Active low (1) Pin on ECN code
Active High (2)
1 3701 VCAN1 High D965: B45
2 3700 VCAN1 Low D965: B53
3 6185 Torque limiter AH/AL D965: B08
4 4605 Trailer Brake AH D965: B51
5 -
12 6 6186 Torque limiter AH/AL D965: B11

See section 10.2: "CF series bulkhead

connection overview" for more information about
the ESC system available on CF75-85 and XF
vehicles.

366 201122
12.4 CONNECTOR 3L ACCESSOIRIES
Bulkhead connection 3L
Active High (2)
B2 3660 12V power supply Cargo interior detection D911: B04
sensor
B3 4721 Gearbox Neutral switch AL D358: B15
B6 3651 12V power supply ulrasonic sensor D911: A10

NOTE: 3L = Brown 16-pole connector

Connectors and signals available are
depending on vehicle options chosen.
Make sure that the correct SELCO's are
used when ordering the vehicle, in
order to assure functionality.

12
201122 367
12.5 CONNECTOR 3P ESC SYSTEM
Bulkhead 3P lead-through for engine speed control

Selection code 0797: Cab Connector 3P
Active high (2)
A1 3524 PTO1 Status AL D358L: C30
A2 4596 PTO1 Solenoid AH D358L: B23
A3 3143 ESC enable AH D358L: D09
A4 3144 ESC N1 / N_variable AH D358L: D05
A5 3145 ESC N2 / Set + AH D358L: D06
A6 3146 ESC N3 / Set - AH D358L: D07
A7 M Ground (KL31) - -
A8 - - - -
B1 3412 Cab lock AL D942: B08
B2 3157 Engine running AH D358L: C42
B3 3420 Remote PTO AH D358L: C17
B4 5280 Remote enigine start (only with BBM) AH D993 - D08
B5 3848 Remote engine stop (only with BBM) AH D993 - C16
B6 3878 CVSG data (only with BBM) - D993 - D11
B7 2161 Power supply (KL15) - G188: 87
B8 1600 Power supply (KL30) - D942: B08


connection dashboard" for more information
dashboard of LF vehicles.
connection headershelf" for more information
12
headershelf of LF vehicles.
NOTE: 3P = Blue 16 pole connector

368 201122
12.6 CONNECTOR 4C ESC SYSTEM
Cab Connector 4C (Selection code 0797); DAF-DMCI variant (CF75-85 and XF series)
Active high (2)
1 M37 Ground (KL31) - -
2 3848 Engine Stop (+24V signal) AH D993: C16
3 3003 Engine speed output signal AL (3) D993: D05
4 3039 Vmax special application AH D993: C17
5 3141 Set + Esc AH D993: C19
6 3142 Set - Esc AH D993: C18
7 3143 ESC enable AH D993: C20
8 3144 N Variable AH D993: C21
9 3145 ESC N2 AH D993: D06
10 3146 ESC N3 AH D993: D07
11 5280 Remote Engine start AH D993: D08
12 1240 Power supply (KL15) - -

(3) This engine speed signal corresponds to 30 pulses per crankshaft revolution. A "Pull Up" resistor must be fitted in accordance
with Figure A.
See section 10.2: "CF series bulkhead 1010

the location of this connector. BBM
1k
D5 3003
See section 10.16: "CF75 - CF85 ESC system" 4C:3
for more information about the ESC system
available on CF75-85 and XF vehicles.
G001269
Figure A: location of "Pull Up" resistor
Bulkhead lead-through for engine speed

control (connector code 4C)
12
201122 369
PACCAR-Cummins variant (CF65 series)

Active high (2)
1 M37 Ground (KL31) - -
2 3848 Remote Engine stop AH D993: C16
(3)
3 3003 Engine speed output signal AL D993: D05
4 3039 Vmax application AH D993: C17
5 3141 No function AH D993: C19
6 3142 No function AH D993: C18
7 3143 Engine speed control enable AH D993: C20
8 3144 ESC N1 AH D993 C21
9 3145 ESC N2 AH D993: D06
10 3146 ESC N3 AH D993: D07
11 5280 No function AH D993: D08

(3) This engine speed signal corresponds to 30 pulses per crankshaft revolution. A "Pull Up" resistor must be fitted in accordance
with Figure A.
WARNING! All signals mentioned in 1010

connector pinning are active +24V BBM
1k
(HS = High Side) and inactive open D5 3003
or 0V (LS = Low Side) unless stated 4C:3
otherwise!
G001269
See section 10.2: "CF series bulkhead Figure A: location of "Pull Up" resistor
the location of this connector.
See section 10.13: "CF65 series ESC system" for
more information about the ESC system available
on CF65 vehicles.
12

370 201122
12.7 CONNECTOR 4D PTO CONTROL

SYSTEM
Connector 4D (PTO control system)

Active high (2)
1 M39 Ground (KL31) -
2 4594 Remote control PTO-1 AH D993: C07
3 3410 PTO-1 status and indication on outside panel AL D993: C10
4 4596 PTO-1 valve AH B245: 01
5 3668 PTO-2 status and indication on outside panel AL D993: C11
(not for CF65)
6 3878 CVSG gauges Databus connection D993: D11
7 3745 PTO-3 AL F117: 01
8 6157 PTO-3 valve AH B405: 01
9 4595/ PTO-2 valve AH B246: A01
5149
10 3798 PTO- warning D993: D03
11 5241 Remote control PTO-2 (not for CF65) AH D993: C08
12 5462 12V for CVSG gauges A124: 01


See section 10.18: "CF series PTO control /
protection" for more information about the PTO
control system available on CF vehicles.
otherwise!
12
201122 371
12.8 CONNECTOR 4V REFUSE

COLLECTOR
Pin Wire Description BBM Pin Active Low (1) Related

INPUT / OUT- Active High (2) CP in
PUT BBM unit
1 3215 PTO ACTIVE D21 AH tbd
Gives the status signal of PTO-1 from OUTPUT
chassis
2 3211 HIGH RPM REQUEST D24 AH tbd
Request signal from the superstructure to INPUT
activate high RPM
3 3039 FOOTBOARD PROTECTION C17 AH / --
/ Vmax APPLICATION SPEED INPUT AL (3)
When this input is high, and gearbox is
switched into reverse, engine stop and
park brake becomes active.
When this input is high, Vmax application
will be active when Gearbox in Drive.
4 3249 DRIVE LINE ENGAGED D22 AH
If the output of the function gearbox state is
drive line engaged.
5 -- -- -- -- --
6 4591 REVERSE INDICATOR C09 AH
Active when gearbox is switched into re- INPUT
verse (relay G350).
7 3248 REVERSE GEAR INDICATOR D36 AH
Active when reverse gear is engaged (relay
G350)
8 3402 PARK BRAKE ACTIVE D310 lite - C30 n/a
Active when park brake is engaged
(1) AL = Active Low: function is activated if pin is grounded.

(2) AH = Active High: function is activated if pin is connection to battery plus (12V minimum).
(3) Fault detection on pin C17 depending on foorboard switch.

location of the refuse connector on LF vehicles.
See section 9.13: "Refuse preparation LF Series"
for more information on the refuse collector
12
system on LF vehicles.

372 201122

COLLECTOR
Pin Wire Description BBM Pin Active Low Related

INPUT / (1) CP in
OUTPUT Active High BBM unit
(2)
1 1600 KL30 10A -- -- tbd

Power supply 24V before contact - Fuse
E290
Other consumers also fed via this power
supply.
2 1600 KL30 10A -- -- tbd
Power supply 24V before contact - Fuse
E290.
supply.
3 -- -- -- -- tbd
4 5439 Park Brake Control -- -- tbd



COLLECTOR

(1)
INPUT / CP in
(2)
1 M Ground -- -- tbd
2 M Ground -- -- tbd
3 2161 KL15 15A.
Power supply 24V after contact - Fuse
-- -- tbd
12
E156.
supply.
4 2161 KL15 15A. -- -- tbd
Power supply 24V after contact - Fuse
E156.
supply.

201122 373

12.11 CONNECTOR 12D BODY

BUILDER
Selection code 9562: Cab Connector 12D

Active high (2)
1 M40 Ground (KL31) - A102: 7
2 M98 Ground (KL31) - A102: 8
3 3412 Cab lock AL A102: 4
4 3809 Enable CAN open AL A105/A106: 3
5 3772 FMS - A098:4
6 6164 Power supply Taillift - A088:7
7 6165 Relay G466, Taillift open, pin B5 - A088:2
9 6167 taillift "Standby for Use" signal - A088:1
12 A8 Reserve radio recess - A104:8
16 3842 BB_CAN_Ground - D993: D09
17 3810 BB_CAN_Low - D993: D19
18 3811 BB_CAN_High - D993: D17
19 3157 Engine running signal AH D358: C42
20 1154 Power supply (KL30) - A102: 1
21 1258 Power supply (KL15) - A102: 2
12 (1) Active low: function is activated if pin is grounded.

the ESC system available on CF75-85 and XF
vehicles.

374 201122
See section 10.5: "CF series accessories

connection in dashboard" for more information
about the reserve connector A104 behind the
radio recess panel in the on CF75-85 and XF
vehicles.
protection" for more information about the
otherwise!
12
201122 375
12.12 CONNECTOR 23K BODY

FUNCTIONS
Bulkhead connection 23K

Active High (2)
A1 3503 Fuel level D358L: D12
A2 3402 Park brake signal AH D358L: B05
A3 5104 Reverse buzzer switch AL C880: 5
A4 4517 Switch cross lock AH C748: 1
A5 1665 Power supply (KL15) D942: B03
A6
A7 1217 Power supply (KL15) D942: P08
A8 2036 Direction trailer left D358L: A07
A9 2037 Direction trailer right D358L: A08
A10 2170 Light rear left AH C201: 2
A11 2169 Light rear right AH C202: 2
A12 2152 Rear fog lights G005: A03
A13 4601 Brake signal AH D942: A07
B1 1356 Power supply (KL15) D942: L02
B2 4591 Reversing alarm signal AH D942: A05
B3 1110 Power supply (KL30) D942: A08
B4 1240 Power supply (KL15) G353: 87
B5 5051 Fuel heater AH G201: 87
B6 3659 Cargo Door Alarm AL D911: B06
B7 2008 Direction indicator rear left D358L: E07
B8 2009 Direction indicator rear right D358L: E04
B9 3408 Differential lock D358L: C34
B10 3428 ABS/EBS trailer D358L: C32
B11 3412 Cabin Lock AH D358L: B16
B12 2155 Body interior lighting AH D358L: C09

12 NOTE: 23K = Yellow 25-pole

connector,
Connectors and signals available are
depending on vehicle options chosen.
Make sure that the correct SELCO's are
used when ordering the vehicle, in
order to assure functionality.


376 201122
12.13 CONNECTOR 56A

ACCESSORIES
Bulkhead lead-through for accessories

Active High (2)
1 9094 Ground EBS trailer A004: 3
2 9088 Ground CAN line A058: 13
3 2008 Direction indicator trailer left AH D358: A07
4 2009 Direction indicator trailer right AH D358: A08
5 2102 Marker light left AH D787: A33
6 2103 Marker light right AH D787: A28
7 2152 Rear fog lamp AH D878: A24
8 2155 Body interior lighting / worklamp cab rear AH G462: C01
9 4591 Reversing signal AH G350: D23
10 4601 Brake signal AH G036: C08
11 3812 CAN 11992/3 low TT-CAN D993: D13
12 3813 CAN 11992/3 low TT-CAN D993: D12
13 3651 12V supply ultrasonic sensor D911: A10
14 3659 Cargo door AL D911: B06
15 3660 Cargo interior AL D911: B04
16 3428 EBS trailer warning AL D878: D35
17 3558 Trailer CAN 11992/2 low D977: B03
18 3559 Trailer CAN 11992/2 high D977: B06
19
20 1390 Power supply (KL15) A004: 2
21 1113 Power supply (KL30) D878: C16


connector pinning are active +24V 12
otherwise!
201122 377
12.14 CONNECTOR 56W REFUSE

COLLECTOR
Refuse preparation connector 56W

(1)
INPUT / CP in
(2)
1 3412 Unlatched cabin F009 AH tbd

Active at open cabin lock (execpt at fully
turned over cabin)
2 -- -- -- -- --
3 3238 ENGINE RUNNING A08 AH --
Active when engine speed > nhhhh400
RPM.
Output signal 24V.
4 3215 VEHICLE SPEED >5 KM/H D31 AH --
Active when vehicle > 5 km/h.
5 3214 VEHICLE SPEED >10 KM/H D32 AH --
Active when vehicle > 10 km/h.
6 3212 ENGINE SPEED >1400 RPM D23 AH --
Active when engine speed > 1400 RPM.
7 3210 BODY ACTIVE C12 AH --
body active signal from superstructure.
24V input.
8 3213 BODY RELEASE D34 AH --
Active if body active signal is high and all
switch on conditions are met.


12

378 201122
12.15 CONNECTOR 182C POWER

SUPPLY
9-pin econoseal (black)

Active High (2)
1 1107 Power supply (KL30) AL C960:7
2 1258 Power supply (KL15) G763: B1
3 5444 Speaker telematics (plus) AH D324: A16
4 2630 Switch search light supply AH Various
5 2649 Spotlicht switched return AH C244: 7
6 5445 Speaker Telematics AL L036: D1
7 5399 Telephone speaker AH L036: 2A1
8 5418 Telephone speaker AL L036: B1
9 M52 Ground (KL31)


12.16 CONNECTOR 183C POWER

SUPPLY
12-pin econoseal (black)

Active High (2)
1 1154 Power supply (KL30)
4 2630 Search light switches AH Various
5 2102 Tail light, left signal AH A058: 5
6 2122 Signal, main beam AL C927: 5
7 2216 High lights / spot lights signal AH C927: 7
8 M70 Ground (KL31) 12
9 -
10 -
11 M668 Ground (KL31)
12 5270 Buzzer door open / parking brake not applied AH B330: A1

201122 379

12.17 CONNECTOR 238C RADIO

SYSTEM

Active High (2)
1
2
3
5
6
8 M469 Ground (KL31) A076: 3

See section 10.7: "CF series radio preparation"

for more information about the location available
on CF and XF vehicles.
12

380 201122
12.18 CONNECTOR A000 TRAILER

SYSTEM (ISO1185 TYPE 24N)
2
7 3
4
1 5
6
22032802-007
7 pin connector; light system
Active High (2)
1 M133 Groumd (KL31)
2 2102 Tail light and contour lighting, left, and AH D878: A33
number plate light
3 2008 Direction indicator, left AL D358: A07
4 4601 Brake lights AH G036: C08
5 2009 Direction indicator, right AL D358: A08
6 2103 Tail light and contour lighting, right. and AH D878: A28
number plate light

See section 9.14: "LF series trailer connection

points" for the function of this connector on LF
vehicles.
See section 10.15: "CF series trailer connection
points" for the function of this connector on CF
and XF vehicles.
12
201122 381

SYSTEM (ISO3731 TYPE 24S)
2
7 3
4
1 5
6
22032802-007
7 pin connector; accessories
Active High (2)
2 3659 Cargo door alarm system AL D911: B06
(Note: not connected on LF vehicles)
3 4591 Reversing lights AH D878: D23
5 3660 Cargo Internal alarm system AL D911: B04
6 3651 power supply alarm system D911: A10


vehicles.
and XF vehicles.
12

382 201122

SYSTEM (ISO7638)
2 3
4
1 6
7
20090503-005
7 pin connector; ABS / EBS system
Active High (2)
2 1390 Control
3 9094 Ground (KL31)
5 3428 Information D878: D35
6 3559 CAN 11992 EBS ONLY D977: B06
7 3558 CAN 11992 EBS ONLY D977: B03


vehicles.
and XF vehicles.
12.21 CONNECTOR A007

ACCESSORIES 24V 2-POLE
Connector accessories 24V

Pin Wire Description Active Low (1) Pin on ECU
Active High (2)
1 M683 Ground (KL31) - -
2 1103 Power supply (KL15) - D878: C35
12
See section 7.13: "Connection points and

permitted power loads" for the maximum load
permitted on this connector.
See section 10.1: "CF series cab switch and
connector locations" for the location of this
connector.
201122 383
See section 11.1: "XF series cab switch and

connector.

ACCESSORIES 12V 2-POLE
Connector accessoire 12V

Active High (2)
1 M31 Ground (KL31) - -
2 1311 Power supply (KL30) - D330: A4


connector.
connector.

ACCESSORIES
2-pin
Active High (2)
1 1175 Power supply (KL30) - E168: 2
2 M22 Ground (KL31) - -

12 See section 11.12: "XF series microwave

preparation" for more information about the
location and function of this connector.

384 201122
12.24 CONNECTOR A043 DRIVER

SEAT CONNECTOR
Driver seat connector 2-pole

Pin Wire Description Active Low (1) Pin on ECU code
Active High (2)
1 M802 Ground (KL31) - -


12
201122 385

SYSTEM (ISO12098)
1 11 2 3
10
4
9
12
13
5
15 14
8
7 6
20090503-004
15 pin connector
Active Low (1)
Pin Wire Description Pin on ECN code
Active High (2)
1 2008 Direction indicator, left AH D358: A7
2 2009 Direction indicator, right AH D358: A8
4 M131 Ground
5 2102 Tail light and contour lighting, left, and AH D878: A33
number plate light
6 2103 Tail light and contour lighting, right, and AH D878: A28
number plate light
7 4601 Brake lights AH D878: C8
11 3660 Cargo internal alarm system AL D911: B4
12 3651 Power supply 12V alarm system D911: A10
13 9088 Ground for 14 and 15
14 3813 TT CAN high ISO 11992 D993: D12
15 3812 TT CAN low ISO 11992 D993: D13


and XF vehicles.
12

386 201122
12.26 CONNECTOR A068 (CHASSIS -

ESC SYSTEM)
LF series with ESC system via the VIC unit

Selection code 9231: Chassis Connector A068
Active High (2)
1 M3 or Ground (KL31) - -
M5
2 3848 Remote Engine Stop (CF65 BBM only) AH (D993: C16)
3 3003 Engine speed output signal AH D364: B12
4 3039 Vmax special application AL D364: B20
(3)
3145 Set+ / ESC N2 AH D358L: D07
5 or
(4)
3141 - -
(3)
3146 Set- / ESC N3 AH D358L: D06
6 or
3142 Ground (4) - -
7 3143 ESC enable AH D358L: D09
8 3144 ESC N1 / N_variable AH D358L: D05
9 3145 ESC N2 / Set+ AH D358L: D06
10 3146 ESC N3 / Set- AH D358L: D07
11 5280 Remote Engine Start (BBM only) AH (D993: D08)
12 2161 Power supply (KL30) -

(3) In case chassis is specified with selco 8431 or 8665 (Manual or AS-Tronic gearbox)
(4) In case chassis is specified with selco 4207 (Allison Automatic gearbox). Note: there will be no wire fitted in the mating bulkhead
connector 3P.

See section 9.10: "LF series ESC control" for
more information about the ESC system available
on LF vehicles.
12
201122 387
A068 connection detail

A068 ZT
9
5 12
2 8
4 11
1 7
3 10
6
CF75 - 85 and XF series with ESC system via the BBM unit
Active High (2)
2 3848 Engine Stop AH D993: C16
3 3003 Engine speed output signal AL D993: D05
4 3039 Vmax special application AH D993: C17
5 3141 Set + Esc AH D993: C19
6 3142 Set - Esc AH D993: C18
7 3143 ESC enable AH D993: C20
8 3144 N Variable AH D993: C21
9 3145 ESC N2 AH D993: D06
10 3146 ESC N3 AH D993: D07
11 5280 Engine start AH D993: D08


chassis connections" for more information about
See section 10.16: "CF75 - CF85 ESC system"
12

388 201122

ACCESSORIES 8-POLE)
A070 connetor details

Active High (2)
2 2155 Body lighting AH D878: C01
3 4601 Brake signal AH D878: C08
5 3651 power supply alarm system D911: A10
7 3660 Cargo internal alarm system AL D911: B04
8 M21 Ground (KL31)
/M71
(3)

(3) Wire codes are: M21 or M71 for CF75 - 85 and XF series and M1 for LF and CF65 series.
- Section:9.3: "LF and CF65 series chassis

connections" for LF and CF65 series.
- Section: 10.3: "CF75 and CF85 series
chassis connections" for CF75 - 85 and XF
series.

TELEPHONE
A076 Telephone preparation

Active High (2)
1 1363 Power supply 12V (KL15) D878: D01
2 1108 Power supply 12V (KL30) D895: A04

12
See section 10.9: "CF series telephone

preparation" for more information about the
telephone preparation on CF and XF vehicles.
201122 389
12.29 CONNECTOR A088 TAILLIFT

SYSTEM 7-POLE

Active High (2)
1 6167 Taillift standby for use signal AH D965: B04
2 6165 Tailift down AL G466: 87
3 6166 Taillift open G466: 87a
4 1258 Power Supply (KL15) E163: 2
5 6168 Taillift open AH G466: B01
6 6169 Taillift open AL G466: B02
7 6164 Power supply Taillift AH C889: 1

See section 7.17: "Taillift preparation" for more

information about the taillift system available on
LF, CF and XF vehicles.
See section 12.11: "Connector 12D body builder"
for the (bulkhead) connector on the other end of
the taillift wiringloom.
12

390 201122

APPLICATION REFUSE
COLLECTOR
21 Pole Refuse preparation connector - Bulkhead position 78B

Pin Wire Description Pin on Current Active Low Related
(1)
ECN code CP in
Active High BBM unit
(2)
1 3216 PTO ACTIVE D993: D21 0,5A AH 1-94

Gives the status signal of OUTPUT
PTO-1 from chassis
2 3211 HIGH RPM REQUEST D993: D24 5mA AH 2-28 / 2-29
Request signal from the super- INPUT 2-30 / 2-31
structure to activate high RPM
3 -- -- -- -- -- --
4 3039 FOOTBOARD PROTECTION D993: C17 5mA AH or 1-128 (3)
/ Vmax APPLICATION INPUT AL (3) 2-10
SPEED
When this input is high, and
gearbox is switched into re-
verse, engine stop and park
brake becomes active.
When this input is high, Vmax
application will be active
when Gearbox in Drive.
5 1113 KL30 15A, power supply 24V D878: C16 15A n/a n/a
before contact for Work lights,
fuse E048.
6 1240 KL15 15A, power supply D878: A18 15A n/a n/a
24Volt, fuse E091.
Other consumers are also
connected via this power sup-
ply.
7 4591 REVERSE GEAR INDICA- D878: D23 5A n/a n/a
TOR
Active when reverse gear is
engaged (relay G350)
8 M571 GROUND SUPPLY 20A n/a n/a
9 1154 KL30 15A, power supply Haz- SUPPLY 15A n/a n/a
ard beacon lights.
24V, fuse E142.
10 4722 CAB UNLOCKED
Active at open cab lock via re-
D878: D31 1,5A n/a n/a 12
lay G351.
(except when cab fully tilted)
11 1258 KL15 15A, supply voltage 24 OUTPUT 15A n/a n/a
V, fuse E163.
12 3238 ENGINE RUNNING D993: A08 1,5A AH n/a
Active when engine speed > OUTPUT
400 RPM.
OUTPUT: 1,5A, <5V, 24V.
201122 391
Pin Wire Description Pin on Current Active Low Related

ECN code (1) CP in
Active High BBM unit
(2)
13 3215 VEHICLE SPEED >5KM/H D993: D31 0,5A AH n/a

Active when vehicle speed > 5 OUTPUT
km/h.
14 3214 VEHICLE SPEED >10 KM/H D993: D32 0,5A AH n/a
Active when vehicle speed > OUTPUT
10 km/h.
15 3212 ENGINE SPEED >1400 RPM D993: D23 0,5A AH n/a
Active when engine speed > OUTPUT
1400 RPM.
16 M572 GROUND OUTPUT 20A AH n/a
17 3213 BODY RELEASE D993: D34 1,0A AH 1-99 / 1-100
Active if body active signal is OUTPUT 1-101 / 1-102
high and all switch on condi- 1-103 / 1-104
tions are met.
18 3249 GEARBOX DRIVE EN- D993: D22 0,5A AH n/a
GAGED OUTPUT
Active when gearbox is not in
Neutral position
19 3402 PARKING BRAKE SIGNAL D358: B05 1,5A n/a n/a
Active when Parking brake is via
applied. R005: A5
20 3248 AUXILIARY STOP D993: D36 5mA AH n/a
(emergency) Stop signal from INPUT
the superstructure.
21 3210 BODY ACTIVE D993: C12 5mA AH 1-99
Body active signal from super- INPUT
structure. 24V input.

(3) CP 1-128 = fault detection on pin C17 depending on footboard switch (switch to 24V or ground).
See section 10.19: "Refuse preparation CF75 -

CF85 Series" for more information about the FMS
system available on CF75-85 and XF vehicles.
12

392 201122
12.31 CONNECTOR A097 FMS

SYSTEM
Selection code 6407: FMS prepared

(Cab Connector A097 (in location 34A of the bulkhead connector)
Active High (2)
2
3
4 3773 Interconnection to A097:10
5 3767 Interconnection to A098 A098: 5
10 3773 Interconnection to A097:4
11 1101 Power supply (KL30) E084 (10A)
12 9093 Ground (KL15)
13
14
15
16
17 1101 Power supply (KL30) D878: D14
18 1258 Power supply (KL15) E163: C2
19
20
21
(1) Acive low: function is activated if pin is grounded.

See section 10.17: "CF75 - 85 series FMS / DTS

system" for more information about the FMS
12
201122 393
12.32 CONNECTOR A098 FMS

SYSTEM

(Cab Connector A098 in location D878; central box dashboard)
Active High (2)
2 3502 Vehicle speed B525: B6
3 3237 Engine speed D965: B1
Interconnection to 12D 12D: 5
4 3772
interconnection to A104 A104: 1
9 3225 DTCO B525: D8
3783 DCAN-H D358: B12
10 (3)
3782 DCAN-L D358: B06

11 (3)
12 4596 PTO AH D993: A4

13 4601 Stop Lights AH D878: C08
14 2102 Marker Lights AH D878: A33
16 - - - -

(3) See paragraph "terminator tresistor D-CAN" in case of preparation.

12

394 201122
12.33 CONNECTOR A100 HD-OBD

DIAGNOSE
Heavy duty diagnose connector A100 (LF and CF65 series)

Active High (2)
1 1357 Power supply (KL15) - D942: M3
2
3 3425 K-line EBS - D403: A10/A11
4 9107 Ground (KL31) -
5 9107 Ground (KL31) -
6 3783 D-CAN High - D358L: B12
7 -
K-line - D905:10, D940:15,
8 3646
D929:9, D911:B15
K-Line - D356L: C4, D851:
9 4732
3,4
10 -
11 -
12 4733 K-line DIP4 - D899: 03
13 -
14 3782 D-CAN Low - D358L: B06
15 3037 K-line ACH-EW - D521: 4

See section 9.1: "LF series cab switch and

connector locations" for information about the
location of the HD-OBD connector on LF
vehicles.
location of the HD-OBD connector on CF
vehicles.
location of the HD-OBD connector on XF
12
vehicles.
201122 395
Heavy duty diagnose connector A100 (CF and XF series)

Active High (2)
2 3797 K-line heater unit B473: 11
3 3425 K-line EBS - D329: A10/A11
4 9107 Ground (KL31) -
5 9107 Ground (KL31) -
6 3783 D-CAN High - D358: B12
7 -
8 3646 K-line CDS - D905: 10
9 -
10 3065 K-line AS-Tronic - D954: A2
11 4883 K-line EST42 - D902: 14
12 4733 K-line DIP4 - D899: 03
13 3470 K-line AGS - B344: 03
14 3782 D-CAN Low - D358: B06
15 3037 K-line ACH-EW - D979: B03

12.34 CONNECTOR A102 BODY

BUILDER 8-POLE
8-pin Econoseal (for CF75-85 and XF series)

Active High (2)
1 1154 Power supply (KL30) E163: C2
3 3157 Engine running signal D358: C42
4 3412 Cab locking open signal F616: 02
5
12 6
7 M40 Ground (KL31)
8 M98 Ground (KL31)


chassis connections" for more information about

396 201122
8-pin Econoseal (for LF and CF65 series)

Active High (2)
3 3157 'Engine running' signal D358L: C42
4 3412 Cab locking open signal D911: B5
5
6
7 M2, Ground (KL31)
M40
8 M1, Ground (KL31)
M41,
M43



BODYBUILDER 12-POLE
12-pin connector spare wiring CF XF series

Active High (2)
A1 Spare or
1
3772 Panic FMS A098: 4
2 A2 Spare 12D:6
3 A3 Spare 12D:7
4 A4 Spare 12D:8
5 A5 Spare 12D:9
6 A6 Spare 12D:10
7 A7 Spare 12D:11
8
9
A8
A9
Spare
Spare
12D:12
12D:13
12
10 A10 Spare 12D:14
11 A11 Spare 12D:15
12

201122 397

12.36 CONNECTOR A104 SPARE

WIRING 18-POLE
18 pole connector spare wiring radio compartment

Active High (2)
A1 Spare or A103:1
1
3772 Panic button FMS (connector A098)
2 A2 Spare A103:2
3 A3 Spare A103:3
4 A4 Spare A103:4
5 A5 Spare A103:5
6 A6 Spare A103:6
7 A7 Spare A103:7
8 A8 Spare A103:8
9 A9 Spare A103:9
10 A10 Spare A103:10
11 A11 Spare A103:11
12 - -
13 - -
14 - -
15 - -
16 - -
17 - -
18 - -


connection in dashboard" for more information
about the spare wiring that is available behind the
12 radio console of CF75-85 and XF vehicles.

398 201122

BODYBUILDER CAN SYSTEM
7-POLE

Active high (2)
3 3809 Enable CAN open AL R003: A3
4 3811 BB_CAN_High - D993: D17
5 3842 BB_CAN_ground - D993: D09
6 3810 BB_CAN_Low - D993: D19
7 - - - -


12.38 CONNECTOR A106 CAN-CAB

9-POLE

Active High (2)
1 1154 Power supply (KL30) - E142: B02
2 M372 Ground (KL31) - -
3 3809 Enable CAN open AL R003: A03
4 3811 BB_CAN_High - D993: D17
5 3842 BB_CAN_ground - D993: D09
6 3810 BB_CAN_Low - D993: D19 12
7 - - - -


201122 399

12.39 CONNECTOR A113 GARBAGE

TRUCK
12 Pole lighting connector - Bulkhead position 8A

Connector A113 in location 8A
Bulkhead lead through
Pin Wire Description Active Low (1) Pin on ECU code
Active High (2)
3 4601 Brake lights Ah D878: C08
4 2102 Marker light left Ah D878: A33
5 2103 Marker light right Ah D878: A28
6 2008 Direction indicator left Ah D358: A07
7 2009 Direction indicator right Ah D358: A08
8 - -
9 - -
10 2152 Rear fog light Ah D878: A24
11 - -
12 - -


CF85 Series" for more information about the ESC
12

400 201122

13-POLE
Trailer connector A117

Active High (2)
A 1113 Power before contact (KL30)
G 2152 Fog light D878: D24
56 4591 Reverse light D878: D23
58L 2102 Marker lights_LH D878: A33
58R 2103 Marker lights_RH D878: A28
54 4601 Stoplights D878: C08
54L 2008 Direction indicator_L D358: A08
54R 2009 Direction indicator_R D358: A07


12
201122 401

HYDRAULIC PLATFORM 9-
POLE
Hydraulic Platform connector - Bulkhead position 8A

(1)
INPUT / CP in
(2)
1 3883 BODY NOT SECURED D01 AH

OUTPUT
2 3893 CLOSET OPEN NA
direct relation to body secured
3
4 3879 VEHICLE SPEED 1 D31 AH 1-129
Vehicle Speed>parameter value vehicle OUTPUT
speed 1 level, then Vehicle Speed 1 output
must be active. At set speed 3 km/h of pa-
rameter value the output must be deactivat-
ed
ed
ed
ed
8 - -
9 - -
12 (1) Active Low: function is activated if pin is grounded

(2) Active High: function is activated if pin is connected to Ubat (12V minimum)
See section 10.20: "Hydraulic Platform CF75

series" for information about the function of this
connector on CF75 vehicles.
connection overview" for information about the
location of this connector on CF vehicles.

402 201122

HYDRAULIC PLATFORM 21-
POLE
Hydraulic Platform preparation - Bulkhead position 78B

(1)
INPUT / CP in
(2)
1 M1 GROUND SUPPLY SUPPLY n/a n/a

2 3884 ENGINE RUNNING A08 AH 2-28 / 2-29
Active when engine speed > 400 RPM. OUTPUT 2-30 / 2-31
OUTPUT: 1,5A, <5V, 24V.
3 5463 SURROUND LIGHT A03 AH n/a
Active if body release is active and all switch OUTPUT
on conditions are met.
4 3886 BODY RELEASED D21 AH 1-128
Active if body active signal is high and all OUTPUT 2-10
switch on conditions are met.
5 3887 VARIABLE ENGINE SPEED (VES) D29 n/a n/a
Range from 0,5 2,5 Volt = VES is inac- INPUT
tive
Range from > 2,5 5 Volt = VES is standby
Range from 5 15 Volt = VES is active be-
tween idle (1000 RPM) and 3000 RPM
6 3888 WALL CONNECTION D36 AH n/a
when active starting the engine is inhibited. INPUT
7 3889 SAFETY FEEDBACK D26 AL n/a
when active in combination with body release INPUT
function engine will stall.
8 3890 HIGH RPM REQUEST D24 n/a n/a
Request signal from the superstructure to ac- INPUT
tivate high RPM
9 3891 BODY SECURED D35 n/a n/a
Body secured signal from superstructure. INPUT
24V input.
10 3893 CLOSET OPEN n/a AH n/a
Active at open closet via relay G351.
11 3892 REMOTE START STOP C12 AH n/a
The function will generate depending on the INPUT
pulse (rising edge) of the switch an internal
start or an internal stop signal depending on
the engine speed condition.
12
12 1258 KL15 15A, supply voltage 24 V, fuse E163. SUPPLY n/a n/a
13 -- -- -- -- --
14 -- -- -- -- --
15 -- -- -- -- --
16 -- -- -- -- --
17 -- -- -- -- --
18 -- -- -- -- --
201122 403

INPUT / (1) CP in
(2)
19 -- -- -- -- --
20 -- -- -- -- --
21 -- -- -- -- --
(1) Active Low: function is activated if pin is grounded.

(2) Active High: function is activated if pin is connection to battery plus (12V minimum).


HYDRAULIC PLATFORM FEED
THROUGH

Active High (2)
1 - - - -
2 - - - -
3 - - - -
4 - - - -
5 - - - -
6 - - - -
8 - - - -
10 - - - -
11 - - - -
13 - - - -
14 - - - -
12 15
16
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
17 - - - -
18 - - - -
19 - - - -
20 - - - -
21 - - - -


404 201122
See section 10.20: "Hydraulic Platform CF75

series" for information about the function of this
connector on CF75 vehicles.
12.44 CONNECTOR A126 FMS 2-

POLE

Active High (2)
1 3783 D-CAN High D358L: B12
2 3782 D-CAN Low D358L: B06

See section 9.12: "LF series FMS system" for

more information on the FMS system on LF
vehicles.
For After Sales part number information; see
section 13.5: "Electric connector parts cabine (LF
Series)".
12
201122 405
12.45 CONNECTOR A134 REFUSE

FEED THROUGH WIRE

Active High (2)
1 - -
2 - -
3 - -
5 - -
6 - -
7 - -
9 - -
10 - -
11 - -
12 - -
13 - -
14 - -
15 - -
16 - -
17 - -
18 - -
19 - -
20 - -
21 - -


CF85 Series" for more information about the
Refuse preparation on CF75 - 85 vehicles.
12

406 201122
12.46 CONNECTOR A138 FMS 12-

POLE
Selection code 6407: FMS prepared (Cab Connector A138)

Active High (2)
1 9093 Ground (KL31) - -
2 - - - -
3 1363 Power supply (KL15 12V) - D878: D1
4 9162 Ground (KL31) - -
5 - - - -
3783 D-CAN H - D358: B12
6
A (3)
7 - - - -
8 - - - -
3782 D-CAN L - D358: B06
9
A (3)
10 1258 Power supply (KL15) - E163 (25A)
11 1130 Accessoires - D878: D11
12 1101 Power supply (KL30) - D878: D14

(3) See paragraph "terminator tresistor D-CAN" in section 10.17: "CF75 - 85 series FMS / DTS system" in case of preparation.

12.47 CONNECTOR A139 - A140

EXTRA CAMERA
Connector A139
Active High (2)
1 5469 Survellance trigger Al D333:04

12
Connector A140
Active High (2)

201122 407

12.48 CONNECTOR D318 (ECU) TOLL

COLLECT
Selection code 9681: Toll Collect prepared

Active High (2)
A1 1101 Power supply (KL 30) D878: E084
A2 2630 Search light D878: E117
A3 1258 Power supply (KL15) E163
A5 9025 Ground (KL31)
B3 3502 Vehicle speed B525: B6
C1 3831 VCC5 - D319: 01
C2 3832 Ground (KL31) - D319: 02
C3 3833 VCC - D319: 03
C5 3837 CAN H - D319: 05
C6 3835 Wake up acknowledge - D319: 06
C7 3836 CAN L - D319: 07
C8 3834 Wake_up - D319: 04
F1 GPS antenna coax - D345: B1
F2 GPS antenna coax GND - D345: B2
E1 GPS antenna coax - D345: A1
E2 GPS antenna coax GND - D345: A2


connector locations" for more information about
the Toll Collect ECU location on CF75-85
vehicles.
connector locations" for more information about
12 the Toll Collect ECU location on XF vehicles.

408 201122
12.49 CONNECTOR D365.A - D365.B

RADIO SYSTEM
D365.A power supply

Active High (2)
1
2
3
4 1130 Power supply (KL30) D942: BA2
5
6 1106 Power supply (KL30) D942: DB9

D365.B speakers connection

Active High (2)
1 4831 Right rear min
2 4832 Right rear plus
3 5448 Right front plus
4 5449 Right front min
5 5450 Left front plus
6 5451 Left front min
7 4827 Left rear min
8 4828 Left rear plus

See section 9.7: "LF series radio preparation" for

more information about the location of this
connector.
12
201122 409
12.50 CONNECTOR D347.A - D347.B

RADIO SYSTEM
D347.A power supply

Active High (2)
1
2
3
5

D347.B speakers connection

Active High (2)
1 4831 Right rear min
2 4832 Right rear plus
3 5448 Right front plus
4 5449 Right front min
5 5450 Left front plus
6 5451 Left front min
7 4827 Left rear min
8 4828 Left rear plus

See section 11.6: "XF series radio preparation"

for more information about the location of this
connector.
12.51 ECN CODE NUMBER

12 OVERVIEW
ECN Description ECN Description ECN Description

code code code
B245 Valve PTO-1 control D318 ECU Toll Collect
B246 Valve PTO-2 control D319 Radar Toll Collect
B330 Buzzer door open/park D324 ECU telematics E... Fuses (see overview in
brake not applied cab)
B344 ECU AGS D330 ECU 24/12V 10A

410 201122
ECN Description ECN Description ECN Description

code code code
B405 Valve PTO-3 control D345 Aerial Toll Collect
B473 Heater unit D356 ECU 24/12V F117 Switch PTO status 3rd
B525 Tachograaf F616 Sensor Cab lock
C201 Light rear left D358 ECU VIC3
C202 Light rear right D358L ECU VIC3L G005 Relay rear fog lights
C244 Light interior driver side D364 ECU ECS-IBSe G036 Relay brake light
C245 Light interior co-driver D403 ECU ABS-E2 G201 Relay fuel heater
side
C748 Switch cross lock D521 ECU ACH-W2 G350 Relay reverse light
C880 Switch reversing buzzer D878 Central Box G353 Relay contact
C889 Switch Taillift D895 ECU 24V/12V 10A G460 Time relay (60s)
C927 Switch light auxilary D899 ECU DIP4 G462 Relay work light
driving roof
C960 Switch roof hatch D902 ECU Intarder EST42 G763 Power distribution
screen
D905 ECU CDS
D911 ECU Alarm ALS-S L036 Loud speaker dual coil
D929 Central Box
D942 Fusebox R003 Relay CAN-open
enable
D954 Modulator AS Tronic
D965 ECU DMCI
D977 ECU EBS-2
D979 ECU ACH-EW
D993 ECU body builder
module
12
201122 411
12

412 201122
Part numbers
PART NUMBERS
Part numbers
Page Date
13.1 Mountings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 201122
13.2 Flange bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 201122
13.3 Electric connector parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 201122
13.4 Electric connector parts cabine (CF75-85 and XF Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 201122
13.5 Electric connector parts cabine (LF Series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 201122
13.6 Electric cable contour lights chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 201122
13.7 Extension piece for the LF mud guard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 201122
13.8 Indication lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 201122
13.9 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 201122
13.10 CVSG Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 201122
13.11 Adapters air system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 201122
13.12 Lowered drawbar components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 201122
13.13 Miscellaneous parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 201122
13
201122 413
Part numbers
13

414 201122
Part numbers
13.PART NUMBERS
13.1 MOUNTINGS
Part numbers
Tie rod
Item Part number Quantity 15
A 1240928 1
14
B 1321533 1
(Tightening torque: 55Nm)
C 1202089 1
D 0523917 1 A C
(Tightening torque: 20Nm) 358
415
120 120
B D
M16 M12
20070604-010
Attachment plate (LF and CF65 Series)

Item Part number Quantity
(1)
A 0290591 1
B 1231056 (M12 x 40 mm) 3
C 1231051 (M12) 3
D 1403666 1
E 1231055 (M12 x 35 mm) 3
G001181
(1) Items A, B and C also available in set with DAF partnumber: 0370729.
Attachment plate (CF75-85 and XF Series)

A 0654833 1
B 1231064 3
C 1669590 3
13
G000311
201122 415
Part numbers
Mounting bracket (2)

Set (1) A B C D E E
- MAK8208 14 5 13 55 B
- 1212965 13 7 17 60
C
0591092 0290590 - 7 17 -
- 1403668 13 5 13 50 A
D
20070604-009
(1) Set = bracket with flange bolts and nuts.

(2) For more information also see sub section "Tie rods" in: 3.2: "BAM's - body attachment methods"
Mounting console (for tanker)

Item Part number Quantity D M16x55
A n/a 1 E B
B 1231066 3 C
C 0282263 3 A
D 1243045 2
E 0274020 2 F
F 1321533 2 M16
G000301
B C D E B C D E B F
HG
K I J I G000440-01
Item Description Quantity Part number Notes

13 A Flanged bolt x 1231054
1231055
M12-10.9 x 30 mm
(single chassis frame)
M12-10.9 x 35 mm
(double chassis frame)
B Console 2 1409881 Upper console for sub-frame
C Flanged bolt x 1243046 M16-10.9 x 110 mm
D Spring x 0274020

416 201122
Part numbers
B C D E B C D E B F
HG
K I J I G000440-01

E Washer x 0640205 35 x 17 x 4 mm (295 - 350 HV)
F Flanged bolt x 1243050 M16-10.9 x 35 mm
G Flanged nut x 1669590 M16-10.9
H Console x 1409358 Console
I Flanged nut x 1321533 Prevailing torque M16 flanged nut
J Flanged nut x 1231051 M12-10.9
K Console x 1409372 Console
Chassis cross connecting member

Item (1) Part number L
[mm]
A
1662797 766
L
A
1439638 776
G000398
(1) Cross member assy to be installed with M16 flange bolts
Cab suspension springs in combination with top sleeper mounting, CF series

Cab type Quantity Part number Cab suspension
13
2 1265278 Front
Sleeper Cab
2 1265272 Rear
201122 417
Part numbers
13.2 FLANGE BOLTS
The property class of the flange a

bolts (1)used in the chassis of the
CF and XF Series is 10.9. The part
numbers for the differen length ver-
sions of these flange bolts are given b
in the table below. c l
G000366
a: Flange l = 30 l = 35 l = 40 l = 45 l = 50 l = 55 b: Flange nut

bolt property property
class class 10
10.9
M12x1.75 1231054 1231055 1231056 1231057 1231058 1231059 1231051
(c: 5,25 mm)
M14x2 1243041 1243061 1243060 1243059 1243058 1243057 1243043
(c: 6,00 mm)
M16x2 - 1243050 1231063 1231064 1231065 1231066 1231052
(c: 6,00 mm)
(1) For the flange bolt tightening torques, see section 2.6: "Attachment of components to the chassis".
13.3 ELECTRIC CONNECTOR PARTS
F
D
B H
A
K
L
22032802-009

A Sealing ring x 1305193 Blind sealing plug
1 1261638 4-pin connector housing
B Connector 1 1261636 8-pin connector housing
1 1278100 12-pin connector housing
13 D Contact pin x 1261640 0.5 - 1.0 mm2
x 1267698 1.5 - 2.5 mm2
F Sealing plug x 1258968 0.5 - 1.0 mm2
x 1258969 1.5 - 2.5 mm2
G Sealing plug x 1258970 Blind sealing plug

418 201122
Part numbers
F
D
B H
A
K
L
22032802-009

1 1226724 For 4-pin connector and 10 mm hose
(pos. I)
H Connector
(pos. I)
(pos. I)
x 0090863 13 mm
I Protective hose x 0090862 10 mm
x 0090865 17 mm
1 1261637 For 4-pin connector
K Connector 1 1261635 For 8-pin connector
1 1278101 For 12-pin connector
L Contact pin x 1261641 0.5 - 1.0 mm2
x 1267697 1.5 - 2.5 mm2
13
201122 419
Part numbers
Electrical contact kit supplied with the LF chassis
Kit Description Quantity Part number Notes

Contact pin 14 1261641 0.5 - 1.0 mm2
(female) 1 1267697 1.5 - 2.5 mm2
Contact pin 5 1261640 0.5 - 1.0 mm2
A (1)
(male) 3 1267698 1.5 - 2.5 mm2
19 1258968 0.5 - 1.0 mm2 (color: blue)
Sealing plug
4 1258969 1.5 - 2.5 mm2(color: white)
Contact pin 7 1261640 0.5 - 1.0 mm2
(male) 1 1267698 1.5 - 2.5 mm2
B (2)
7 1258968 0.5 - 1.0 mm2(color: blue)
Sealing plug
1 1258969 1.5 - 2.5 mm2(color: white)
(1) kit A = plastic bag strapped against standard chassis wiringloom if chassis is ordered with the ESC system (= selection code
9231).
(2) kit B = plastic bag strapped against standard chassis wiringloom (always supplied).

CABINE (CF75-85 AND XF
SERIES)
Cab / bulkhead connectors (CF75-85 and XF

Series)
13

420 201122
Part numbers
Cab connectors (male and female type); for pins see following table
D B E A E C
G000544
connector (female type) A (1) connector (male type) B (1)

Qty DAF number and color DAF number and coler
of Grey Blue Yellow Green Grey Blue Yellow Green Purple
Pins
6 1313845 1313846 1313847 1354021 1306709 1315071 1315072 1364069 -
9 1312604 1312611 1313806 1365784 1306710 1313809 1313838 1364299 -
12 1312605 1312610 1313804 1354022 1306711 1313808 1313812 1364070 1743590
18 1312607 1312609 1313803 1354023 1306713 1313807 1313811 1364071 -
21 1312606 1312612 1313805 1354024 1306714 1313810 1313839 1364072 -
(1) locking device E for connector with :

- 6 pins: 1317004
- 9 pins: 1317005
- 12 pins: 1317006
- 18 pins: 1317008
- 21 pins: 1317009
Pins to be used in:

connector C:
JPT male contact for 0.5 - 1.0 mm wire diameter 1315076
or 2x 1.0 mm diameter
Connector D:
JPT female contact for 0.5 - 1.0 mm wire diameter 1315077
or 2x 1.0 mm diameter

CABINE (LF SERIES)
13
Cab / bulkhead connectors (LF Series)
201122 421
Part numbers
Cab connectors (male and female type); for pins see following table
E
E F
D
A
B C
F
G001180
Qty DAF number and color
connec-
of
tor Blue Yellow White Green Red Brown Grey Purple
Pins
A - 1606389 1404127 - 1406116 1606390 1605771 1605770
8
B - 1606396 1404129 - 1606397 1606434 1605768 1405404
C 1607492 - 1605085 1606435 1607143 1607144 - -
16
D 1607586 - 1454349 1454347 1607584 1607588 - -
C - 1606320 - - - - - -
25
D - 1454356 - - - - - -
Pins used are:

contact E:
Contact F:
FMS connector A126 FMS 2-pole (LF series; positioned in dashboard recess)
DAF Part number Qty
Description
1804571 1x Connector housing
1804573 1x Electrical contact
1804575 1x Wedge
13 FMS connector A126 FMS 2-pole counter part (LF series; third party telematic system)
DAF Part number Qty Description
1804572 1x Connector housing
1804574 1x Electrical contact
1804576 1x Wedge

422 201122
Part numbers
13.6 ELECTRIC CABLE CONTOUR

LIGHTS CHASSIS
LF, CF and XF chassis

Electric cable
Item Part number Total quantity of B B B
LED lights L1 L2 L2
1697589 4x
1697590 A
A (1) 6x
(illustrated)
L2 L 2
1697591 8x L1
B B B
B 1731959 1x (color: amber) L 1 = 3000 mm

B L 2 = 4200 mm
G000538
(1) Part number = kit with 2 separate (identical) electric cables.
13.7 EXTENSION PIECE FOR THE LF

MUD GUARD
Extension piece for the LF cab mud guard to

enable repositioning of the indicator lights.
Extension piece (1)
1453911 (RH) 1
A
1453912 (LH) 1
1453909 (RH) 1
B
1453910 (LH) 1
1453913 2
81 mm
C
A C
G000548
13
179 mm
(1) The approximate overall width over the cab mud guards is for: the LF45 = 2190mm; LF55 14-16t = 2350mm and LF55 18t =
2420mm. The standard wiring loom of the indicator lamps has sufficient length to allow repositioning.
201122 423
Part numbers
13.8 INDICATION LAMPS
Drawing Designation Part number (1) Lens col-

our
Lamp holder 1395972
(suitable for two lenses)
20081102-003
Loading crane not locked 1399886 Red

20070604-020
Tail lift open 1399887 Red

20070604-021
Doors in superstructure open 1399888 Red

20070604-022
Loading crane active 1399889 Green

20070604-020
Tail lift active 1399890 Green

20070604-021
Lock not locked 1399891 Yellow

20070604-023
PTO 2 1399892 Yellow

20070604-024
Superstructure lighting 1399893 Yellow

20070604-025
Spotlights 1399894 Yellow

20070604-026
Rotating beam 1399895 Yellow

20070604-028
Trailer lifting gear 1399768 Yellow

20070604-027
Tipper body up 1645053 Yellow

DSYM0254
Unmarked lens 0069816 Yellow

Unmarked lens 0069817 Green
Unmarked lens 0069818 Red
Plug 1329779 Black
(in cases when only one lens is mounted)
Holder (Switch like shape) (2) 1409558 -
(could be modified to carry a LED lamp)
13 Holder + 1 LED
Standard suited for 12 V
1427990 Red
With an additional resistor (470 Ohm) suitable

for 24V
20081102-003
(1) Part numbers suitable for switch locations in CF and XF dashboard and overhead console of the XF105 Super Space Cab.
(2) Part numbers suitable for switch locations in header shelf of LF chassis.

424 201122
Part numbers
13.9 SWITCHES
Part number (1) Number of Description Colour

Positions
1435592 2 switch, on/off Amber
1339010 2 switch, on/off Green
1435600 2 switch, on/off with blocking (for PTO), spring-loaded Amber
1366100 2 switch, on/off with blocking (for PTO), spring-loaded Green
1435596 3 switch, on1/off/on2 Amber
1339014 3 switch, on1/off/on2 Green
1435597 3 switch, fog lamp, front (and rear) Amber
1675749 2 switch, on/off + green LED for function indication (pin 9 & Amber
10, 9=+24V)
1700905 (2) 2 switch, on/off for rotating beacons Amber
(2)
1700780 3 switch, on1/off/on2 for sunroof hatch Amber
(2)
1409968 2 switch on/off for night heater Amber
1322402 lens, PTO No colour
1322399 lens, work lamp No colour
1686102 lens, work lamp on roof. For CF and XF series (Comfort No colour
and Space cab only)
1686103 lens, work lamp on roof XF105 series (Super Space Cab No colour
only)
(1) Part numbers suitable for switch locations in the LF, CF and XF dashboard and overhead console of the XF105 Super Space
Cab.
(2) Part numbers suitable for switch locations in the LF header shelf.
13.10 CVSG GAUGES
Gauges to be connected on the CVSG data

communication bus of the BBM module. For
electrical components see chapter
13.13: "Miscellaneous parts".
Metric units (supported by the BBM module)
DAF Part number Internal reference Description Range
1736187 Q43-6002-201C Primary air pressure 0 - 10 bar
1736188 Q43-6002-202C Secondary air pressure 0 - 10 bar
1736190 Q43-6002-204C Engine oil pressure 0 - 7 bar
1736191 Q43-6002-205C Engine coolant temperature 40 - 120 C
13
1736192 Q43-6002-206C Engine oil temperature 40 - 150 C
1736193 Q43-6002-207C Main trans oil temperature 65 - 150 C
Metric units (not supported by the BBM module)

1736189 Q43-6002-203C Application air pressure 0 - 10 bar
1736195 Q43-6002-216C Transfer case oil temperature 40 - 150 C
201122 425
Part numbers

1736196 Q43-6002-217C General oil temperature 40 - 150 C
1736197 Q43-6002-221C PTO oil temperature 40 - 150 C
Imperial units (supported by the BBM module)

1736198 Q43-6002-101C Primary air pressure 0 - 150 psi
1736207 Q43-6002-102C Secondary air pressure 0 - 150 psi
1736209 Q43-6002-104C Engine oil pressure 0 - 100 psi
1736210 Q43-6002-105C Engine coolant temperature 100 - 250 F
1736211 Q43-6002-106C Engine oil temperature 100 - 300 F
1736212 Q43-6002-107C Main trans oil temperature 150 - 300 F
Imperial units (not supported by the BBM module)

1736208 Q43-6002-103C Application air pressure 0 - 150 psi
1736213 Q43-6002-121C PTO oil temperature 100 - 300 F
General (not supported by the BBM module)

1736216 Q43-6002-118C Fuel level #1 E - 1/2 - F
1736222 Not available yet Voltmeter 18V-36V
1736217 Q43-6002-302C Ampere -150A - +150A
1736218 Q43-6002-301C Hourmeter 0 - 999999 hours
1736219 Q43-6004-301C Clock Analog
1736220 Q43-6006-301C Transmission display (Allison gear-
box)
General
Ite DAF Part number Remark
m 1
1 1736214
2 1736921 4 pole connector
3 1365147 0,50 to 0,75 mm2
52mm
13
3
G001191

426 201122
Part numbers
13.11 ADAPTERS AIR SYSTEM
Screw-in adapter for straight and right-angled pipe fittings
A B A C D
22032802-025
Model B Model A
Type of con- NG8 NG12 NG8 type SV232 NG12 type SV232
nection
Screw thread M16 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5 M16 x 1.5 M22 x 1.5
Adapter (A) 0090182 0537162 1377738 1377743
+ clip (B) 0090181 0537161 - -
+ ring (C) 0090183 0537163 - -
Straight and right-angled quick-release coupling (pipe fitting) (1)

C D
Air pipe di- Type of Model A Model B Air pipe di- Type of con- Model C Model D
ameter connection SV230 SV232 ameter nection SV230 SV232
[mm] [mm]
6 x1 NG 8 0090286 1377739 6 x1 NG 8 0090290 1377741
6x1 NG 12 0537169 1377744 6x1 NG 12 0537177 1377748
8x1 NG 8 1207062 1377757 8x1 NG 8 1207061 1377756
8x1 NG 12 0537170 1377745 8x1 NG 12 0537178 1377749
10 x 1.25 NG 12 0537176 1377747 10 x 1.25 NG 12 0537181 1377751 13
12 x 1.5 NG 12 0537175 1377746 12 x 1.5 NG 12 0537179 1377750
16 x 2 NG 12 1206819 1377740 16 x 2 NG 12 0090292 1377742
(1) See the product range documentation for any other models.
201122 427
Part numbers
Straight and right-angled coupling (for LF series APU air govenor)
Air pipe diameter [mm] Air pipe diameter [mm]

6 1409391 6 1408395
8 - 8 1409686
10 1408340 10 1408507
Quick-release tee couplings for various applications

Tee coupling for:
Governor/air distribution unit
DAF number: 1377753
DAF number: 1377752
13

428 201122
Part numbers
Quick-release tee couplings for various applications

DAF number: 1377766
For horn:
DAF nummer: 0529656
13.12 LOWERED DRAWBAR

COMPONENTS

U-shaped
E 2x 1396942 Profile length: 960mm (2x 19 holes)
profile
x 1303464 Used in chassis with inner
reinfrocement at the rear.
x 1303465
Chassis Selco: 4004 (7.0/VA) or 4005 (7.0/DL)
F
L-shaped
support x 1326987 Used in chassis without inner 13
reinforcement at the rear.
x 1326986
Chassis Selco: 4000 (7.0/00) or 4002 (7.0/V0)
G Cross member 2x 1303469 U- shape profile
H Support 1x 1434960 Carrier of drawbar coupling
1x 1445143 Chassis support for air and
J Support
electrical connectors
201122 429
Part numbers

P Plate 4x 1314647 Dimensions: 170x 65x 10 mm
- Flanged nut 76x 1669590 M16 (class 10.9)
- 64x 1231064 M16 x 45 mm (class 10.9)
- Flanged bolt 3x 1231065 M16 x 50 mm (class 10.9)
12x 1231066 M16 x 55 mm (class 10.9)
13

430 201122
Part numbers
13.13 MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
Chassis sections for chassis extensions:

- 45 series
192 x 71 x 4.5 x 3000 KF460 n/a
- LF 45 series
192 x 66,5x 4.5 x 3000 KF460 1425161
180 x 47/62 x 4 x 3000 (inner reinforcement) KF460 1455544
- 55 series
260 x 75 x 6 x 3000 (inner radius: 14 mm) KF460 1308229
- LF 55 and CF65 (1)series
260 x 75 x 6 x 3000 (inner radius: 12 mm) KF460 1674216
- CF65 (2), CF75, CF85 and XF series
260 x 75 x 7 x 3000 KF 375 0513777
245 x 65 x 5 x 3600 (inner reinforcement) KF 375 0668604
310 x 75 x 7 x 3000 KF 375 0513922
295 x 65 x 5 x 3000 (inner reinforcement) KF 375 0513926
- CF85 and XF series
310 x 75 x 8.5 x 3000 KF 375 0513923
292 x 65 x 8.5 x 3000 (inner reinforcement) KF 375 n/a
Fuel system:
- Quick-release coupling for connecting extra fuel 8 mm PVC 1318421
consumers to the fuel tank float.
- Air pipe to be used if twin fuel tanks are mounted; ( 8 mm internal) 1399869
length = 10 metres
Electrical system: Electrical components, converters
- 24/12 volts converter max. 10A 1368353
- 24/12 volts converter max. 20A 1368354
Electrical components for connecting extra batteries
- Diode 24V; 20A 0629678
- Mini control relay 24V; 150A 1745069
- Divider relay 1347161
Electrical components for connecting CVSG gauges
- Timer relay (relay switch off after 10 seconds) 24V; max. 5A 1651907
- Dc-DC converter 24V-12V / 10 1726283
Amp
PTO flanges:
- Flange, 6-hole (DIN 75) for ZF PTO 0586358
- Flange, 6-hole (DIN 100) for Chelsea PTO 1408266
Fifth wheel base plates:
- Base plate (pre-drilled) Height 12 mm 1377195
KA dimension adjustment pitches of 25 mm
Height 26 mm 1377193
Height 40 mm 1377192
13
Height 80 mm 1377186 (1x)
1377185 (1x)
Height 120 mm 1377592 (1x)

1377593 (1x)
- Fifth wheel base plate (pre-drilled) Height 12 mm 1377194
3 KA dimensions are possible: KA = 470, 520 and 570 mm (FT Low Deck)
201122 431
Part numbers
(1) CF65 chassis produced from week 0513 onwards (V.I.N. code: XLRAE65CC0E677039).
(2) CF65 chassis produced up to and including week 0512.
13

432 201122
Reaction form
REACTION FORM
Reaction form
Page Date
Feedback form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 201122
14
201122 433
Reaction form
14

434 201122
Reaction form
14.REACTION FORM
Feedback form
To help maintain the present level of quality and user-friendliness of the DAF Bodybuilders' Guidelines
and the information given in this manual, I would like to submit the following recommendations and/or sug-
gestions.
Section:
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
Subject:
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
Suggestions:
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
Please send to: Sender:
DAF Trucks N.V. ..........................................
Truck Logistics, Sales Engineering dept. ..........................................
Building C0801100
Hugo van der Goeslaan ..........................................
PO Box 90065 ..........................................
5600 PT
Eindhoven ..........................................
..........................................
Fax: +31 (0) 40 2143924
..........................................
.......................................... 14
..........................................
..........................................
201122 435
No rights can be derived from this publication.
DAF Trucks N.V. reserves the right to change
product specifications without prior notice.
Products and services comply with the European
Directives effective at the time of sale but may
vary depending on the country in which you are located.
For the most recent information
contact your authorized DAF Dealer
DAF Trucks N.V.

Hugo van der Goeslaan 1
P.O. Box 90065
5600 PT Eindhoven
The Netherlands
Tel.: +31 (0) 40 21 49 111
Fax: +31 (0) 40 21 44 325
www.daf.com
driven by quality
ISO14001 ISO/TS16949
Environmental Quality
Management System Management System

BBG201122EN

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BBG201122EN

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BBG201122EN

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the bodybuilder guidelines?

What is the purpose of the bodybuilder guidelines?

What are the requirements for verification of superstructures?

What are the requirements for verification of superstructures?

Bodybuilder guidelines

DAF LF, CF and XF105

In the interest of continuing product development,

1.5 VEHICLE SPECIFICATION AND TOPEC Light: On top of the above-mentioned

should each bring in their own specialism.

- asymmetric loading; - Air intake openings on filter units.

1.7 PERIOD OF BODYING AND NOTE: Many components and in

1.8 PAINTING THE CHASSIS AND

In case the chassis (cab) and components must

DAF LF55 series engines use a highly advanced combustion

DAF CF65 series

With the Super Space Cab, the driver virtually

FT 4x2 Tractor chassis

Wheelbase and rear overhang indications

1.10 DIMENSIONS 1.12 FEEDBACK FORM

It is essential for the quality and durability of the

For the levelling of an air-suspended chassis, at

2.2 DRILLING OF HOLES

When mounting components, use the existing

from a bend in the chassis frame is not

Dimensions for holes drilled in side members:

Minimum distances for drilling of holes

2.3 WELDING ON THE CHASSIS

WARNING! Welding on the chassis

WARNING! For the LF45 hybrid

The following DAF welding instructions should

Measures to be taken when welding!

Welding on the cab

- Disconnect the connectors between chassis

See section: 7.13: "Connection points and

2.4 MODIFYING THE REAR

For the chassis material to be used for rear

- The rearmost cross member must be

Tapering of chassis side member rear ends

For certain applications, for instance for plant

Welding instructions for rear overhang

The drawing shows how a weld should be made

Position of the welds between main and

Specification of welding material

2.5 WHEELBASE MODIFICATIONS

Wheelbase modifications may only be carried out

Components such as toolboxes, extra fuel tanks,

(1) If non-DAF bolts are used, adhere to the supplier/manufacturer's instructions.

2 chassis frame without flitches or if

chassis frame withflitches, a cross 96120404-208

2.7 REPLACING RIVETS BY BOLTS

If, for whatever reason, rivets have to be

The diameter of the hole of the removed rivet is

- Fitting an M14 - 8.8 flange bolt in hole t2

2.8 INLET AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS

When modifications are made to the engine air

- There must be a minimum clearance of at

Exhaust pipe characteristics

Installation configuration overview

Repositioning the pump module:

NOTE: Modifications should be carried